Home

MATRIX-TM User Guide Version 4.2

1. 4 Issue the key from Matrix bin and follow the Drawer Mapping to locate the locker with item to issue Issue the item using the key and then press on the lt Close gt button to complete the issue process 5 For following the transactions created return to Main Menu and select the lt Transactions gt options Page 266 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 METRO i z YW Transactions admin ITMDemo42 10 07 2008 Select record to update KD3101694 Key To 3101694 in Non Keys 1 00 7 10 2008 9 59 AM 3101694 Demo HM90 E90A D32 Milling 1 00 admin cr NADermo1 01 02 01 gt PS BZ Ey admin cr Demo4 01 01 01 4 28 2008 9 47 AM 3101694 Demo HM90 E90A D32 Milling admin cr NADemo1 01 02 02 4 22 2008 12 57 PM R5930128 key To 5530123 in Non keys 1 00 admin cr Demo4 04 02 02 Two Issue transactions were created one for the key and one for the item selecting the key item Exception If on the step 3 after pressing the lt Issue gt button you get the After issuing the item return the key to the Matrix by selecting the lt Return gt option and following message this means that the key for the locker is not available The user who last issued this key will be displayed in the window You will be requested to select if you want to continue the issue process without issuing key By pressing lt Yes g
2. Statuses e Draft Automatically initiated orders which still need to be approved e Opened Automatically or Manually initiated orders which are already sent or yet to be sent to the supplier this is the default status for new orders Closed Status that can be updated automatically or manually The order status is updated automatically when all of the ordered items are received fully or Page 136 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 The order status is updated automatically when some of the ordered items are received partially but the user confirms closing all of the lines or The order status can be updated manually even if some of the order lines are still open or only partially received This will require user confirmation to close the order lines The following chart shows the order header statuses including the valid transitions between statuses Page 137 of 432 SEX MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 The Order Header statuses All lines will be opened Automatic when all Lines Received All lines will be closed When the order header status is changed from Draft to Open all the line statuses change from Draft to Open When the Header Status changes to closed all the lines that are not Canceled change to Close Other details regarding the order Revision The number of times the order has been revised Supplier PO The supplier s order reference number
3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 Page 223 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 To build the Catalog click the lt Print gt button on the Menu bar This will export the list to Excel with barcodes and pictures Item Catalog Pictures 6501822 Demo TNMS 431 12 IC20 5502161 Demo TPGH 321 R IC70 6502203 Demo TPMT 321 IC70 6502222 Demo TPMR 221 IC70 9 10 4 Items Cost Centers This report displays the linked items to cost centers To run the report open Menu Reports gt Items gt Items Cost Centers Page 224 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 a Items Cost Centers E 0 x ltem Key E COo E ltem Code DO E ltem Description Po Cost Center Name o H Ce Found 3 Records 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 2 vork Center W2 WC Grinding2 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 Work Center WC Grinding1 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 Department Grinding For instructions how to link items and cost centers please refer to Chapter B Define Items per Cost Center section 19 3 10 Help and Technical support The system has a Help module that describes all the Topics of the MATRIX TM software In case a user cannot solve a problem in the system using the Help or needs to ask any question about the use of the machine and software there is an option to send an email from the system to Technical S
4. gogoa a lt Oia Mi n hi o ny BS Please refer to Chapter B Advanced Reports section 9 1 for instructions how to build and run an Advanced Report 9 2 3 Issue Return Comparison This report enables to display returned quantities compared to the issued quantities per item user To run the report open Menu Reports gt Transactions gt Issue Return Comparison Page 206 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 a22 Issue Return Comparison _ 5 x Description j Filter and Grouping Choose Fields Report Type Group By Design Report Listing No Subtotals M Subtotals Only Standard Chart Item Code Filter Advanced Condition operator All conditions At least one condition Returned Quantity xi lt z Issued Quantity gt M M E I Simple Title Please refer to Chapter B Advanced Reports section 9 1 for instructions how to build and run an Advanced Report 9 3 Stock Reports The stock reports allow following the actual stock quantities 9 3 1 Advanced Stock Report This screen enables the user to create a customized report for stock based on the basic stock reports It also enables the user to save the definitions and to run the report at a scheduled time The report displays the stock by Quantity The quantity of items in stock Value The total monetary value of the stock Average Cost of th
5. 5 If you need to access the bins on the TOCH module you have to manually create the bin units Without bin units the access to this bin will be impossible in Touch module For instructions on how to add bin units see Chapter B Tab Cabinet Units section 5 2 1 2 subsection Cabinet Units Manual Creation 5 3 1 1 Tab General This tab contains general information regarding the bin Page 87 of 432 Cx 2 BEX MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 STE RE Bin Maintenance E 10 x Bin Key Bin Code Cabinet Code ltem Code ltem Description E Demo1 01 01 13 Demo1 5505421 CJ Demo IDI 0295 5G C908 General Stock Management Additional Fields Usage Transactions Orders Bin Units Status jate m Consignment ltem Type Expendable rT Reworked fT Used Item Replenishment M Bin Stock Management Automatic Order p Do not Order j Issue Any Quantity Capacity Capacity Ep m Allow Over Capacity Issue Default Issue Quantity fai Issue Price m m Do not Issue M Current Quantities Items in Bin 45 00 Ordered Quantity bo Draft m Last Count Date Re q3 9n Issued Quantity Quantity of Reworked Internal Order P Remarks Fields description Status Indicates the bin s status Active Not active This field is mandatory Consignment If the bin is marked Consignment the issue transactions made from this bin will also be marked
6. 603 Database Auto Backup Day Set this system option for scheduling the automatic backup 605 Database Auto Backup Time Set this system option for scheduling the automatic backup 701 Server Port Set this system option for enabling sending emails orders reports through the system 702 User Name Set this system option for enabling sending emails orders reports through the system 703 User Password Set this system option for enabling sending emails orders reports through the system 705 Mail Server Set this system option for enabling sending emails orders reports through the system 707 Use SSL Set this system option for enabling sending emails orders reports through the system 802 Auto Purchase creation mode This system option is important for creating automatic orders Page 322 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CR GREI oSA MATRIX Set this system option for creating automatic orders job 807 Auto PO Day DBName AutoPOService Set this system option for creating automatic orders job 808 Auto PO Time DBName AutoPOService This key will be used for automatic orders Verify that this key 809 Default Site Key points to the expected site Average usage calculation Set this value when initiating the database and before first 900 type Monthly Process st
7. Transaction Quantity Date 16 08 2006 10 02 60 Transaction quantity 20 00 User admin creator Issue to admin creator Update Quantity Remarks Page 181 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 8 6 STOCK COUNT This screen enables you to perform a stock count in the system In order to continue with the Stock Count procedure follow these steps 1 Inthe main menu go to Menu Operations gt Stock Count The Stock Count screen will appear as follow RE Stock Count Bin Key Cabinet Name Found 36 Records cab1 0 Bin Code Item Key O HH ltem Code D ltem Description Last Count Date z Used Item l z Allow Over Capacity E z cab1 01 01 01 durable durable durable durable el 25 09 2006 MATRIX v cab1 0 1 01 03 durable durable 25 09 2006 cab1 0 1 01 04 durable durable 13 09 2006 cab1 01 01 05 kit kit 27 09 2006 cab1 0 1 01 06 kit kit 27 09 2006 cab1 0 1 01 07 kit kit 18 09 2006 cab1 01 01 08 kit kit 25 09 2006 cab1 0 1 01 09 expendable expendable 26 09 2006 cab1 0 1 01 10 expendable expendable 25 09 2006 oO a saioion h i o ny BS cab1 01 01 11 NIiN w a A a R Be expendable expendable 18
8. 14 10 2007 10 58 31016866 Demo HM90 E90A Milling Kardex 01 4 5 admin creator 14 10 2007 10 51 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A Milling 1 00 lt ardex 0 1 4 5 admin creator 06 08 2007 08 00 31016866 Demo HM90 E904 Oot eae erero2 01 01 01 admin creator 10 10 2007 12 19 3101745 Demo HM90 E90A Milling i Demo2 01 02 08 admin creator 30 08 2007 11 47 3101745 Derno HM90 E90A Milling i MatrixMkKT 02 02 02 admin creator 02 08 2007 12 33 31017453 Demo HM90 E90A Milling i MatrixMKT 02 02 02 admin creator 25 11 2007 14 21 3101749 Demo HM90 E9DA Milling l Demo1 09 03 06 admin creator 10 10 2007 15 34 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A Milling Demo1 09 03 12 admin creator 10 10 2007 15 34 3101749 Dero HM90 ESDA Milling 4 Demo1 09 03 12 admin creator 10 10 2007 15 29 3101749 Demo HM90 E9DA Milling Demo2 02 03 04 admin creator This screen displays all the Issue transactions By default it displays transactions for the currently logged in user 2 To display all the transactions or transactions of other users press on the 200 lt gt button A screen with all users will be displayed Page 284 of 432 Ox CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 A MATRIX v List of Users x admin creator basic basic Danny Goldbaum Liora Banchik Meirav Gur Arie Michael Malutin Orr Dromi Rachel Yanai Raoul Rapke Yanai Dominitz
9. CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 For hardware solutions please refer to MATRIX support GE3001 Error message 90005 Command is already in queue Device is busy Problem When trying to open a bin got the error message 90005 Possible reason Perhaps you tried to open a bin before the previous transaction was completed For example If the drawer was not closed Solution Make sure that the drawers are closed Reload Touch GE3002 Error message 90006 Unable to open compartment Problem When trying to open a bin got the error message 90006 Possible reason Perhaps you tried to open a bin that has wrong coordinates definitions Solution Check the bin units of this bin in the Manage gt Cabinet Maintenance gt Cabinet Units Y Z X coordinates GE3003 Error message 90007 No Connection to Cabinet Drawer Problem When trying to open a bin got the error message 90007 Possible reason Perhaps the problem is with the COM Port cable that connects the PC to cabinet control system 1 The cable is not connected properly or 2 The cable is connected to the wrong port there are usually 2 entries Solution Verify that the cable is connected to the correct COM Port and tighten the connection GE3004 Error message 90008 Problem with connection Problem got the error message 90008 Possible reason Usually this message is displayed on the top of Setting editor when trying to load
10. F 7 Basic Orders Report M Update Operations Basic Orders Report Basic Usage Report T Delete Bin Search Bin M Save Bin Maintenance Bin Units Report Budget Group xl 4 Select a relevant screen from the list to display its controls on the grid and screen operations under the grid 5 For every relevant control there is a list of authorization options Select one of them Enabled Allowed operation Disabled Disallowed operation will be colored in grey Hidden Hidden operation 6 Then mark the operations that should be available for the selected screen with a y For example if none of the operations are marked then the selected screen will be read only Note some of the operations are not changeable defined by the system as not changeable Add ka Update 3 Delete E Save ee 7 Click the Login to the system as a User of this User Group and check the changes done lt Save gt button to save the changes Page 330 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 19 Define Cost Centers Defining the cost centers and its details is done from the menu Administration 19 1 Add Cost Center Header Here you can Add Update Delete the Cost Center Header that appears in the system 1 Go to Menu Administration gt Cost Center Header 2 Click the a lt Add gt button and the followin
11. Select a user to filter the transactions created by this user or press on lt Cancel gt button to see all the transactions 3 Search for a transaction by item code description Page 285 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 be gt Transactions x admin creator ITMDemover40 11 42 2007 P Select record to update 6402508 sean E e00 r 25 11 2007 14 21 6402508 Demo GIMY 315 Turn Gro Matrix 02 02 03 admin creator 07 10 2007 11 40 6402508 Demo GIMY 315 Turn Gro Matrix 02 02 03 admin creator 05 09 2007 11 24 6402508 Demo GIMY 315 Turn Gro 1 Matrix 02 02 03 admin creator 21 03 2007 09 49 6402508 Demo GIMY 315 Turn Gro 1 Matrix 02 02 03 rachel r 18 03 2007 08 08 6402508 Demo GIMY 315 Turn Gro 1 Matrix 02 02 03 rachel r 14 03 2007 14 23 6402508 DemoGIMY 315 Turn Gro 1 Matrix 02 02 03 danny d 11 03 2007 15 59 6402508 Demo GIMY 315 w Turn Gro 1 Matrix 02 02 03 rachel r 11 03 2007 15 23 6402508 DermoGIMY 315 Turn Gro 1 Matrix 02 02 03 rachel r 11 03 2007 15 22 6402508 Demo GIMY 315 Turn Gro 1 Matrix 02 02 03 rachel r 26 02 2007 12 56 6402508 Demo GIMY 315 Turn Gro Matrix 02 02 03 rachel r 22 02 2007 16 35 6402508 Demo GIMY 315 Turn Gro 1 Matrix 02 02 03 rachel r 4 Select transaction to correct The following screen wi
12. Demo1 01 01 01 Demo1 01 01 0 Demo1 01 03 1 Demo1 01 04 0 Demo1 01 04 0 Demo1 01 04 0 Demo1 01 04 0 Demo1 01 04 0 Demo1 01 04 0 Demo1 01 04 0 Demo1 01 04 0 Demo1 01 04 0 Demo1 01 04 10 Ola A Ml mn Hhiwolma hiry 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Page 77 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gate Figure 2 Cabinet type Kardex Cabinet Maintenance lol x Key Se Code KDemo1 Name KardexDemo1 S kKDemo1 01 A 01 KDemo1 01 B 01 kKDemo1 01 E 02 kKDemo1 01 A 07 kKDemo1 01 B 07 kKDemo1 01 C 04 KDemo1 01 D 04 KDemo1 01 D 04 kKDemo1 01 E 03 kKDemo1 01 E 03 KDemo1 01 A 08 kKDemo1 01 B 08 KDemo1 01 C 04 f lo ojala lala ala lal 4 o BS Figure 3 Cabinet type Non Automatic JE Cabinet Maintenance Key E Code NADemot Name Non Automatic Demo1 i NADemo1 01 01 01 NADemo1 01 02 01 NADemo1 01 01 02 NADemo1 01 02 02 NADemo1 01 01 03 NADemo1 01 02 03 NADemo1 01 01 04 NADemo1 01 02 04 NADemo1 02 01 01 NADemo1 02 02 01 NADemo1 02 01 02 NADemo1 02 02 02 NADemo1 02 01 03 Page 78 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 A Cabinet Units Automatic Generation _ The Build Drawer button is an automatic function which automatically builds all bins for a certain drawer configuration This is
13. Page 198 of 432 Combo box If selecting Consignment field dynamic list will be displayed allowing selection of single value The From and To buttons will be disabled Consignment lO E No Grid If selecting Transaction Type field a dynamic grid with all the transaction types will be displayed allowing multiple selection of the types for filtering The From and To buttons will be disabled Adjust Bin Quantity Receive Return To Cabinet Transfer Zero Issue Stack Count Updated nimime Td ke a Dates If selecting Transaction Date dynamic fields will be displayed allowing selection of dates range for filtering A pre defined period relative to the date of the report yesterday last 3 days last week last month and last year Free choice of dates from a specified date to a specified date The From and To buttons will be disabled Page 199 of 432 CITMS Specify From f MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 e Grid If selecting Item Code field a dynamic grid with all the items will be displayed allowing multiple selection of the items for filtering The buttons From and To will be also enabled allowing selection of the items by the range of item codes W 3101686 3101694 Demo HM90 ESDA Demo HM90 E90A 3101745 Demo HM90 E90A 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A 3102566 Demo HM
14. Reset SQL User Password User Name Ci User New Password DOO Confirm Password 0 Cate Restore Activate Jobs Reset SQL User Password Manage Tools Stock Balance Restore Default Reset Matrix Admin Password Logs i Send by E mail Delete Logs Replications Utilities Click on the Button to activate Process History Choose Menu Option l Page 393 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 25 1 Backup of the Database This option lets you backup your Database to a file on the disk and to attach it to a mail Use the email option when you are asked to send the copy of database to support If you want to backup the database to a file you need to choose the file name IE Database Administration Connection Server Name local Data Base ITMDerna Back Up Backup File CADBbackup tempmatrix bak en M Send e mail User Name iTm2005 User Password IITM Data Base Tools Send by Outlook C Send by SMTP Restore Activate Jobs Reset SQL User Password Manage Tools Stock Balance Restore Default Reset Matrix Admin Password Logs Send by E mail Delete Logs Replications Utilities SQL script running Process History Backup 24 12 2006 17 00 36 Backup Succeeded Zip File Succeeded Note The Database which will be backed up is the database selected in the Setting program A bac
15. Save all the conditions by clicking the lt Save gt button Note The following table describes the transaction types and their key The Matrix to SAP interface type is usually set to transfer all the transaction types but actually only the Issue and Receive transactions will be processed in the MATRIX SAP interface program MSI Page 385 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 1 Adjust Bin Quantity 2 Issue 3 Receive 4 Return To Cabinet 5 Transfer 6 Zero Issue 7 Stock Count 9 Send To Rework Run 5 Click the m lt Run gt button to transmit the transactions now or continue to the next instruction in order to create scheduler for transmission 24 1 3 Creating Interface Scheduler 1 Open Menu Administration gt Interfaces gt Interface Scheduler 2 Add new interface by clicking the a lt Add gt button on the Menu bar The following screen will be displayed Interface Scheduler User Name admin creator Schedule Day Daly o H Schedule Time 54 99 Date Last Updated Tr a Interface Name interface to SAP z Active Vv Fields Description User Name Set to any user Interface Name Select from the list the previously created interface Schedule Day Select the day the interface will be activated to transmit Schedule Time Select the time the interface will be activated to transmit Active Check the box to activate this schedul
16. o gt v PO Details e PO Number Booo Line No Eoo Item Code 5101694 Hern Deseription Demo HM90 E90A4 D32 Additional Item Code ja Ordered Quantity 10 00 Received Quantity fo Sum Of Invoices Unit Price 30 00 Invoice Key rr Invoice Number SOXS0S0B7 Reference lt sis Invoice Quantity Booo Invoice Date 20 Novernber 2006 Create User Moo Update User Create Date 1006 Update Date 3A 12006 3 Click the browse button to select the order line that was fully or partially received to the cabinet The screen Order Line Received Quantity will be displayed listing all the received order lines that were not approved yet RE Order Line Received Quantity PO Details o PO Key ft is PO Code o Received Quantity E DO PO Status H Supplier Name gt ltem Key E sd Item Code o ltem Description E o Order Date r ti CCO Receive Date S H Found 3 Records Invoice demo 5 00 Partial 3 Invoice demo 4 3102566 invoice demo 15 00 Partial lIscar 3101745 Page 161 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 EERO 4 Select the order line from the list and double click or click the lt Select gt button The data from the order line will be filled in automatically into the Invoice Maintenance screen PO Detail PO Key Line No Item Code Item Description Additional Item Code Order
17. Click the lt Save gt button 11 2 Define the Touch Cabinet definition for computer 1 Open Menu Administration gt Touch Machine gt Touch Cabinet 2 Click the a lt Add gt button Page 230 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATRIX w The Touch Cabinet Maintenance screen will be displayed The user must define here which cabinets to connect to the previously created touch name HE Touch Cabinet Maintenance Touch Name Cabinet Name OOO l 3 For field Touch Name select the previously created Touch name For field Cabinet Name select the cabinet you want to attach to the Touch 4 Click the lt Save gt button and close the screen In order to attach more cabinets to current TOUCH repeat steps above Page 231 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 g etaise 12 TOUCH Interface and Initial operations 12 1 Login to the TOUCH Module 1 Run the TOUCH module from the Start menu or by link on your desktop to receive the Login screen 2 By using the virtual keyboard enter your user name and password or use the barcode reader to read the number marked on your employee card 3 Press on the lt OK gt button or lt Enter gt on the keyboard The system will check the data entered and if confirmed you will login to the system Page 232 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 12 2 Main TOUCH Menu After login you will receiv
18. Demo TPGH 2 2 L IC70 i Demo TPGH 2 2 L Iso Turn Demo 11ER 0 35 ISO IC50M l Demo 11ER 0 35 ISO Threading Demo ADKT 150550R HM 1C250 8 DemoADKT 150550R H Milling Demo TPGH 2 1 XL IC70 3 Demo TPGH 2 1 XL Iso Turn Demo QNMG 433 TF IC9015 i Demo QNMG 433 TF _ Iso Turn Demo SPKR 42EDTR HS 1C250 7 DemoSPkKR 42EDTR HS Milling Demo ADKT 150550R HM IC635 7 DemoADKT 150550R H Milling Demo DR MF 08 DemoDR MF OE 25 Drilling Demo TPGB 2 1 IC20 Demo TPGB 2 1 Iso Turn Demo TPU 221 IC20 i Demo TPU 221 a Miling Demo IDI 0295 5G IC908 i Demo IDI 0295 SG Drilling Figure 2 Search screen after changes T Y Receive Item admin ITMDemo42 27 07 2008 Please enter Item Order HeliOcto Cutter F45KT DO63 22 R06 AFO 4 51 00 Demo HM90 E90A D20 3 W20 C Milling 9999999 00 Demo HM90 E90A D32 4 W32 C Milling 9999999 00 Demo HM90 E90A D 75 3 W 73 C Milling 156 00 Demo HM90 ES0A D1 25 3 W 75 C Milling 9999999 00 Demo HM90 ES0A D 62 2 C 62 LB Milling i 151 00 HeliAlu Cutter HM90 EAL D50 30 22 16 00 Demo CHAMRING 110 WN32 09 Item Code Demo CHAMRING 080 WN20 06 Ttem Description Additional Item Description ChamDrillJet Drill DSM 160 024 20B 1 5D Group Stock Demo DR MF 10L 2 25D 12A 05 Space Additional Item Code Page 245 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX T
19. T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 21 Manual Processes 21 1 Monthly Process The main purpose of the monthly process is to calculate the Minimum and Maximum factors of the different stock levels Bin Item cabinet Item for the system s statistics and for automatic reordering of the items In order to be able to calculate the Minimum and Maximum factors the following parameters are first being calculated e Average Lead Time e Average Usage e Frequency and Frequency Levels e Min and Max levels Before running the Monthly Process the system will check the Last month that was fully processed described in system option 303 in MMYY format and the Current month by the PC time If the Last month is the month before the Current month the process will stop notifying that the Monthly Process was already completed for this period See the following example Example If now it is September 2007 and system option 303 is set to 0807 meaning August 2007 then the process will not run at this month anymore In order to recalculate the months July 2007 and August 2007 set the system option to 0607 June 2007 Average Lead Time This step calculates minimum and maximum lead times for each Item Supplier according to the order lines which were supplied during a defined period of time Using the results the system calculates the Average Lead Time which will be used in the next steps of the Monthly Process If no order lines exist the s
20. TMDemo database Page 339 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 1 Open the cost center header for which you want to limit item selection for issue mark the Item Limitation field and save In the example here open the Department and Work Center headers RE Cost Center Header Maintenance Oj x Cost Center Name Cost Center Label Department Cost Center Sequence fo Manual Input Type Choose from List from List E Is Required Vv Cost Center Parent Min Length Max Length Remarks Item Limitation v S Cost Center Header Maintenance Oj x Cost Center Name Work Center Cost Center Label Work Center i Cost Center Sequence p Manual Input Type Choose from List x w Cost Center Parent Department gt Min Length Eoo Max Length 10 Is Required 2 Open the cost center detail for which you want to links items that will be available for issue Once you have marked in previous step the cost center header with Item Limitation all the cost center details of this header will display additional grid on the bottom part of the screen for adding the items Page 340 of 432 os CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 varera Cost Center Details Maintenance Pije Es Cost Center Name Department x Cost Center Code Di Cost Center Description Grinding Cost Center Detail Parent Cost Center Detail Parent By this ex
21. Touch screen mm PCnameA CabinetA1 P Ze TouchNameA TouchNameB In order to create the definitions login to the MANAGE system and follow these instructions Set Touch definition for computer 1 Open Menu Administration gt Touch Machine gt Touch Machine Administration 2 Click the lt Add gt button The screen Touch Maintenance will be displayed ioixl Computer Name j Touch Description ftouch y Page 42 of 432 PRLS I UEA AE CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 A MATRIX v 3 Fill the Touch Description field with a significant value that describes the name of the touch station Fill the Computer Name field with the exact name of the PC that will run TOUCH The value can be taken from Go to that computer Properties gt follow tab Computer Name Take the value from field Full Computer Name but do not include the period at the end of the name Click the lt Change gt button gt use the value of Computer Name field Insert the value in MANAGE and click the ta lt Save gt button Connect the cabinet s to previously defined TOUCH Name 4 Open Menu Administration gt Touch Machine gt Touch Cabinet 5 Click the lt Add gt button The screen Touch Cabinet Maintenance will be displayed io x Touch Description ftouch Cabinet Name cabt i SE 6 For field Touch Description select the previously created Touch description
22. computer name Page 422 of 432 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 GE1006 Cannot update system options of automatic processes in Manage Problem The Manage does not save changes for the system options that are responsible for the creation of the jobs for automatic processes Also cannot delete update the jobs Possible reason By changing these system options in Manage jobs should be created for automatic processes Perhaps there are already jobs with wrong definitions and when Manage fails to update the existing jobs it fails to save the system options values as well See also reason of GE1005 Solution See solution for GE1005 GE1007 The scheduled reports are not created Problem The job D8Name ReportsEngine does not create scheduled reports Possible reason See reasons of GE1001 GE1003 Solution See solutions for GE1001 and GE1003 If they do not help solve the problem try to delete and create the job again Also check the Date Last Updated field on the Report Scheduler GE1008 The scheduled reports are not created as a File Problem The scheduled reports are not created as a File Possible reason The files are created into a folder defined in system option 401 which is used for temporary files and the files which are removed from there automatically Solution Check that the File Name on the Report Scheduler is defined to full path and different than the path defined in system option 401 GE
23. of all levels ordering Page 352 of 432 a T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 22 Import Data The Import Data module enables administrator users to import data located in an external file into the database of the MATRIX TM software In this way the user does not have to add data records manually through the Manage module and an entire data table can be loaded automatically After importing the records the user can manage update delete them through the application in the same way as if they had been added manually Important Through this module data is manipulated massively It is recommended that you use it only after you fully understand how Import Data works Two types of files can be used for import Text file txt or MS Excel file xls Chapter D Tables for Import section 22 1 and the Chapter D Tips for Preparing Input Data section 22 2 describe the tables that can be used for importing data the accepted formats for each field and tips for editing the data Use these chapters in preparing the import data file to ensure successful import Excel file xls recommended option 1 Add one or more sheets using one sheet per one data tables 2 Use the top row for describing the column names optional 3 Edit the data according to the expected data format Text file txt 1 Create text file for only one data table Use the top row for describing the column names optional
24. screen Required Unique Not relevant for import on Item or Cabinet levels CALC_LEVEL N A Bin or Item Cabinet or Item Required Unique MIN QTY _OV Minimum Quantity Numerical MAX_QTY_OV Maximum Quantity Numerical AV_USAGE_OV Av Monthly Usage Numerical AV_USAGE_EF_DATE Av Monthly Usage Expire Date Date until the Minimum and Maximum quantities are valid for example 31 12 2008 FREQUENCY CLASS OV Frequency Class A B C D E Z N FREQUENCY_CLASS_EF_DATE Frequency Class Expire Date Date for example 31 12 2008 Example for Excel format This is example for importing Minimum and Maximum quantities for the Item level which will be valid until 31 12 2008 The fields Cabinet Code and Bin Code are not relevant here and have no value therefore they can be unchecked for In File field in Import project or removed for fields which have the lt Delete gt button available 2300158 Item 10 20 31 12 2008 2300159 Item 10 20 31 12 2008 2300161 Item 30 40 31 12 2008 2300162 Item 10 15 31 12 2008 2300164 Item 20 30 31 12 2008 2300165 Item 15 20 31 12 2008 2300166 Item 15 20 31 12 2008 continuation of the table Page 373 of 432 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 22 2 Tips for Preparing Input Data This section provides tips for editing the import data Please follow these tips and Chapter D T
25. CITMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Are Remained Quantity The quantity of items from order lines which still need to be received For the report open Menu Reports gt Orders Report gt Advanced Orders Report Advanced Orders Report loj x Description Demo report 2 for Orders by Item Chart type 7 Filter and Grouping Choose Fields Report Type Group By Design Report al E Standard Chart Listing No Subtotals Item Code Subtotals Only Y Field ouaniy H Chart PE Quantity Color Style Order Type Please refer to Chapter B Advanced Reports section 9 1 for instructions how to build and run an Advanced Report 9 8 Bin Units Report This report displays in generic view all the Bin Units in the system For each bin unit it details the Y Z X coordinates the Sent value which determines if this bin unit has a latch for opening and the Cabinet Bin which uses this bin unit Please note that some records may not have coordinates This will be bins without bin units Page 217 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 To run the report open Menu Reports gt Bin Units Report HE Bin Units Report o1 x Cabinet Key i Cabinet Name __ Bin Key a Bin Code ss Item Code Po ltem Description D a a Sent z Drawer l Additional Item Code Found 200
26. Page 1 of 432 BOLL Ex Sots CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See MATA TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER A GETTING STARTED ccccccececececececeseseseseeeseseseseseceseseseseseseseseseeeseseseseeeessenssesess 1 INTRODUCTION nediritan a bedi nen Ea ai 1 1 General Description of the SystemM aeesessrriseeriresrrrssrirresrinansiratsinnnadtannaatunndaannanennnnnaaaa 1 2 Hardware Overvi W osusi eis hin eased AAEE din iene nis vA ean 1 3 Software OVERVIGW iciuse ei wets Soidisie vee desvedesdudde AAEE ANLE elvan Hee tv Ae a 2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS arrinin a a a 2 1 System REQUIFEMEMNIS a errores EEE N vidi ide NEEE 2 2 Decide where to Locate the Server ccccccccceccesseceeeeeeecesceeeseeceeceaaeeseeeeeeeeaeensnseeeeeeeaeaaees 2 2 1 SQL Database installed On the Server ccccccccceesesseeeceeeeeceaaeeeseeeeeaeaaeeeseeeeeeees 2 2 2 SQL Database installed on the Cabinet PC 0 00 cee ceccccceeeceseeseeeeeeeeeeaneneeeeeeees 2 3 Install MSDE fawstistinevnuciavertdalevaeatedaweed dtaeuseltctalspeiedtaadelddessseievsaidaddluaavelardasidelestaavelelaaaseleieuss 2 4 Install MATRIX TM Setup ahanoa ddadvannludapsea dda anette a aaa iae aa aaa ai aaa aa a aA 2 5 Install MATRIX TOONS rnain naa a a a a a a ra a a a 3 WORKING WITH MATRIX TM 00ccccesesesesesescscscscsesesssceeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 3 1 Connect to the Database uu neinna a a aaa aa 3 2 MANAGE
27. Process History Use the lt Send gt button to activate the command Page 405 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 25 9 Delete Logs Use this command to clear all the logs Use the lt Delete Logs gt button to activate the command 25 10Replications A Database replication is an active copy between two or more Databases That means that any change in one Database will cause the same change in the other replicated Database This option lets you prepare the parameters for creating a replication We suggest that you contact support prior to activating a replication f Database Administration gt 2 5 x Connection Server Name Data Base User Name User Password Backup Restore Replications local liTMDema Replication Name iTm2005 ITM Server Name Database SQL Login Data Base Tools SQL Password SQL Login Time out Activate Jobs Reset SQL User Password SQL Query Time out Manage Tools Stock Balance Run Before Restore Default Reset Matrix Admin Password Repeat every fon demand Logs Utilities Send by E mail On Minute 22 From 0 to 59 Delete Logs Replications SQL script running Process History _ __ _ Page 406 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Fields description Replication Name New check box Server Name Database SQL Login SQ
28. Search Results Collection of records which appear in the lower part of the search screen after a search is completed Calendar Date Clicking on the y button will display the following calendar screen which enables selecting the date Jump Months L November 2006 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 30 34 1 2 3 6 7 8 10 13 14 15 17 ake 20 21 22 Choose Date 29 2 3 Page 68 of 432 f CITMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 4 e Mandatory fields Code i Mandatory fields are marked with a red asterisk and must be filled in for the record to be saved to the database Page 69 of 432 KZ CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 R 5 Base Entities The base entities are 1 Supplier 2 Cabinet 3 Bin 4 Item 5 1 Supplier Following is the Supplier Maintenance screen in which the company s suppliers can be managed io xi Supplier Key rt Supplier Code Moo Additional Supplier Code ss Supplier Name lsr ts lt CS Address SCAR METALINE o B00 Westway Place 0 Arint mooo Schedule Schedule Type Specified Schedule Day Every Sunay tssts iY Schedule Time fio S COC Date Last Updated favo o Order Mode Create purchase Draft recomme r Contact Fax No Phone No 1 812 45 445 55 Contact Person Danny Goldman Home Page www iscar com E Mail suppot iscarcom SSCS Order Parameters Currency USD Order Method
29. See more in Chapter D Report Scheduler section 23 and Chapter D Interfaces section 24 3 DBName AutoPOService This job is responsible for the automatic running of the Automatic Orders process The job is created by changing system options 807 209 in the Manage module and activated automatically every hour See more in Chapter D Automatic PO Process section 21 2 4 DBName AutoBackup This job is responsible for the Automatic Backup of the database The job is created by changing system option 600 in the Manage module and activated automatically at the time scheduled in system options 603 605 5 Replication Job This job is responsible for the automatic update of changes activating replication The job name is a combination of two communicating databases and servers details The job is created by this Database Administration tool and its activation depends on the schedule definition in the Replication definitions See more in Chapter E Replications section 25 10 25 3 2 SQL Server Service Manager In order to be able to run the jobs automatically or activating them manually the SQL Server Service Manager program must run and be active on the server where the database is located This program is installed as a part of SQL Server installation or MSDE installation Follow the next steps on the server to ensure jobs activation 1 Double click the icon located on the Windows Taskbar as marked on the ima
30. Tr Item Code E e Item Description E a Item Type El H Group E y Supplier Name E D Consignment ft y Found 59 Records i Demo11IR 28 U Expendable Threading 1 00 Metaldur No 2 00 08 02 2006 08 13 5605180 Demo APKT 1003 Expendab Milling Ingersoll i 08 02 2006 08 13 5600660 DemoSPKR 42ED Expendab Milling Iscar i 08 02 2006 08 12 6402110 Demo GIMY 304 Expendab Turn Groove TaeguTec j 08 02 2006 08 12 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A Kit Milling Outiltec d 08 02 2006 08 11 3101745 Demo HM90 E90A Durable Milling Outiltec i 01 11 2004 5601196 Demo APKT 1003 Expendab ing Outiltec j 01 11 2004 5505421 Demo IDI 0295 5 Expendab illing Iscar j 01 11 2004 5605179 Demo APKT 1003 Expendab illing Iscar 3102566 Demo HM90 E90A Durable iling Outiltec 5600048 Dermo APKT 1003 Expendab illing Ingersoll 9 3 3 Dead Bins Report This report displays all the bins that were not in use and considered as Dead according to the following conditions There is stock in the bin but There are no transactions for the bin OR There is no Issue Receive date OR Last time that there was Issue Receive transaction on that bin was more than X months ago The number of months is defined by System Option 213 Number of months with no Item Bin activity To run the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Re
31. 2 Select Restore option and create a new empty database under new database name by restoring from the following file MATRIX Installation folder ServerSetup DB ITM bak For more details read the Chapter E Restoring the Database section 25 2 If you have not installed the Matrix software yet 1 Install the required software components before installing Matrix software e Microsoft Net Framework 2 0 and e MSDE as described in Chapter A Install MSDE section 2 3 2 Install full Matrix TM software Server Manage and Touch modules as described in Chapter A Install MATRIX TM Setup section 2 4 and at the step of installing database select the option New Database and insert the database name Page 413 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 26 2 How to Create Initial Data in the Database This section describes the steps for creating the initial data for the new database such as cabinet configuration items users in order to be ready to operate the Matrix cabinet On the workstation for building the database 1 In the Settings program set the software to the previously created database Read more in Chapter A Connect to the Database section 3 1 Load Manage module and login to the database Read more in Chapter A Login to MANAGE module section 3 2 1 Create a cabinet s with compatible configuration Read more in Chapter A Cabinet section 5 2 Create manually the following data
32. CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 g amp see 13 4 ADJUST ITEM Stock adjustment is used where items in bins are incorrectly recorded in the system and therefore need to be adjusted Access to this option is normally restricted to the stock control manager Stock adjustment process Press on the lt Adjust Item gt icon from the Main screen Search and choose the item you wish to adjust Press on the lt Next gt button E O OCN oS The Adjust Items screen will appear Note The text in red above the table describes the next operation to be performed Adjust Items C C TS A Demo TPGB 322 60 Ic70 Demo TPGB 322 60 IC70 148 00 Open bin to adjust Demo1 5 Select the bin you wish to adjust Page 277 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Note You can choose only one bin at a time to be adjusted Press on the lt Adjust gt button Open the drawer which is lit up Check the quantity in the bin O 00 D Adjust the stock quantity in the bin in the field In Stock by using either the Add Reduce buttons or virtual keyboard 10 Close the drawer The stock will be adjusted with the selected changes A stock adjustment transaction will be created Page 278 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 13 5 COUNT BINS The purpose of this process is to count the stock in the bins In order to be able to cycle count the bins the s
33. IS_AUTO_ORDERING Automatic Order Boolean IS_OVER_CAPACITY_ALLOWED Allow Over Capacity Boolean DEFAULT_ISSUE_QTY Default Issue Quantity Numeric 2 Select field and open for update to change its default for example Capacity field for Bin application HE Default Yalue Maintenance Eigi x Application Name m Field Name Espaciy 7 Value ft Change for example the default value to 10 and save 4 Create new bin manually or build drawer for some cabinet The created bin bins will use now the new value for the field Page 127 of 432 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 6 Stock Management Levels 6 1 Stock Levels The stock in the system is managed using Stock Levels There are 3 levels of management and the management is done for each item on each level BIN level ITEM CABINET level and ITEM level For example in the chart on the next pages we can see stock management levels of an item called ITEM 5530123 ITEM 5530123 is defined in the system It is located in 2 cabinets Demo1 and Demoz In Demo1 it is associated with 6 bins in different drawers and in Demo2 the item is associated with 3 bins Some of the bins contain used items indicated in red some bins contain reworked items indicated in green and some bins contain new items indicated in blue 1 BIN level manages the quantity of ITEM 5530123 in each bin 2 ITEM CABINET level manage
34. If the System Option 111 Number of reference fields to use on Receive is set to 1 or more the References screen will appear Page 269 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ke Reference admin TADemo ee ee CT IM SE Input Cost Centers Reference 1 PO Reference 2 Po This screen supports working with interface to ERP systems For example In interface to SAP Reference 1 PO Number Reference 2 Line No For more details see Chapter D Interfaces section 24 If the System Option 111 is set to 0 or none the Receive Item screen will appear as below Note The text in red appearing above the table describes the next operation to be performed Page 270 of 432 Receive Item admin ITMDemo 5601196 Expendable Demo APKT 1003PDTR 76 1C328 Demo APKT 1003PDTR 76 1C328 Choose Bin and quantity Demo1 OOOOOOOOO At the top part of the screen the Item data and the Purchase Order Code will appear The table displays the bin bins which can receive the item Important If the order line is not on the Bin level not associated to a specific bin all available bins connected to that item in the different cabinets will be listed If the chosen order line connected to a specific bin only that specific bin will be displayed In this case to see all the available bins use the lt Show All Bins gt button The default receive quantity will be the order line quantity and the bin free sp
35. If the cost center headers are defined as a hierarchy they need to be entered in order Department gt Work Center gt Machine and the Job Number Otherwise the order will not matter Setting the cost centers for the cost center headers can be done in several ways depending on the cost center header type Department Cost center header of type Choose from List Press on the 200 lt gt button will open a list of optional cost centers for this header Select the desired cost center and press on the C button Work Center This cost center header type is also of type Choose from List If this cost center header is defined in hierarchy with the one before it the list of cost centers will be displayed automatically after selecting the previous cost center header Otherwise the user will have to open the list manually Machine This cost center header type is like Work Center Job Number Cost center header of type Numeric Keyboard Touching it will dynamically display the Virtual Keyboard Use the Virtual Keyboard to enter the data manually or use the Barcode Reader After setting the cost centers press on the lt Next gt button Choose item Next the search screen will appear that enables the user to search and choose an item Use the search methods described before in Chapter C Search Screens section 12 3 4 in order to locate the item Page 252 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 g
36. In Touch created by Return module Created with quantity In Manage created by sending Rework order to supplier In Touch cannot be created Created with or quantity In Manage created by Stock Count functionality In Touch created by Count Bins module Created with or quantity with when issuing item for transfer and with when receiving item to its destination In Manage created by Stock Transfer functionality or by Transfer Order Receive Order functionalities In Touch created by Transfer Order and Receive Order modules Created with O quantity In Manage cannot be created In Touch created by lt Alert gt option in the Issue module Page 185 of 432 9 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Note Only an Issue transaction can be modified by the user For more details continue following here the instructions Transaction Maintenance In order to view transaction details select a transaction from the list and click the za lt Update gt button from the Menu bar The Transaction Maintenance screen will be displayed In the upper part of the screen you can view the following transaction data Transaction Key Transaction Type Item Code Item Description Bin Code and Cabinet In the middle part of the screen you see the User who created the transaction and the date the Transaction was created Details of the User who last updated the transaction are also
37. MOGUIG arniran ane a a aa dda ctyadcaseteieddeesubtaddaaaideetans 3 2 1 Login to MANAGE esaii a Mild AAAA 3 2 2 Adding USES sict ndece rte ited a a a ee 3 2 3 Adding SUDPIICIS na Saenen aaa a cane a aa a a 3 2 4 Adding Roms sass n a niet Aa es A 3 2 5 Adding Cabinets Drawers and BInS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeteesnnaeees 3 2 6 Set TOUCH Definitions ccc cesses cece ee ee eeeseeeeeesaeeeeseeaessesuuaeeeesaaaeeseneeeeees 3 3 TOUGH Mod le Semen an ents nie ert Prue Ro vr SE EA 3 3 1 LOGIN tO TOUCH 0 0 0 eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeneee ee aA AEE EEEE E Ra 3 3 2 Checking the Connection to Cabinets 0 0 00 eccccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeenieeeeeenteeeeeetneeesenaes 3 3 3 ESS TU CS AE ee E Ee A E EE A ee OE Ee ET 3 3 4 FROCCIV Cie sare ot a E e r A E A e A E E e e 3 3 5 0 aee i E A E E E en E ee 3 3 6 Adjust an Item sseeereersrresrerrressrnnsirrresrerrasatenatadannaattanaanunaaatanaeaaanaaataa aaan an anaana 3 3 7 GOUNE BINS maea a E E A E E a eS et 3 3 8 Transfer OrdefS are anaa a a a aaa A AREE IAE E EE A ERE 3 3 9 Transactions nornen ea a EEE EE OAE EAEI E E E AE E T 3 3 10 Receive Without OFder snscneneiniin iiti iaa daai iara 3 4 important TIPS sincan ii aaa aai aaia ai REE CHAPTER B MATRIX TM MANAGE MODULE 0 cccccscssscssssssesesecesecesesesenessessssesssesssesssess 4 MANAGE INTERFACE AND INITIAL OPERATIONS cccccccccccccccececcceceeeccececececeeeeeesueeeeaueeeueeeuenenenss 4 1 Login to the
38. Menu Administration gt Cost Center Details with no link to other cost centers COST_CENTER_CODE Required Unique Cost Center Code Free text up to 50 characters COST_CENTER_VALUE Required Cost Center Description Free text up to 50 characters COST_CENTER_KEY defined as COST_CENTER_HEADER Required Unique Cost Center Name Cost Center Name as appears on the Cost Center Header Maintenance screen COST_CENTER_DTL_FATHE R_KEY This field is not in use anymore since the change in version 4 in Cost Centers Now every Cost Center can be linked to several different Cost Centers on the Cost Center Header above USER_CREATED DATE_CREATED USER_LAST_MODIFIED DATE_LAST_MODIFIED These fields are not editable in the interface and not recommended for import Import Cost Centers Hierarchy by table TVL_COST_CENTER_LINKS This table allows you to link the cost center to its parent cost center s as seen on the Cost Center Details Maintenance screen COST_CENTER_DTL_KEY defined as COST_CENTER_CODE_CHIL Cost Center Code Free text up to 50 characters Page 363 of 432 MATRIX R CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 e D Required Unique The Cost Center Code Free text up to 50 characters of the Cost Center Detail Parent which is marked on the Cost Center Details Maintenance COST_CENTER_FATHER_K EY defined as COST_CENTER_CODE_PAR
39. Numeic Length E To define an additional field 1 In the left Table grid mark the entity for which you need to add the new field and click the lt New gt button 2 Enter the field s name 3 Set the new field s type Numeric Text Boolean yes no or Date 4 Set the field s length this value should not be set for Boolean or Date fields The Additional Fields defined in this screen will appear in the Additional Fields tab in the Update screens of each of the abovementioned entities The purchase order s details additional fields are displayed in its Update screen in the Additional Fields tab located within the Details tab Page 126 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 5 6 Defaults List This feature enables to define default value for some of the fields on the maintenance screen of Bin and Item When creating new item bin these defaults would be used This helps initially to create records with appropriate parameters instead of setting them manually one by one saving user a lot of time To change default 1 Open Menu Administrator gt Defaults List The following screen will then be displayed this screen presents the recommended default values HE Defaults List y E joj Application Name o H Field o Field Name DO f Ce Found 7 Records CAPACITY Capacity Numeric IS_CONSIGNMENT Consignment Boolean ItemType Item Type List IS_CALC_LEVEL Calc Level Boolean
40. Operations gt Return The Return search screen will appear and will display all the available positions for return Note This screen will display only the items that can be returned and only the bins that can accept those items for return according to the previous section 2 Select the item and bin to which you wish to return the used item and click the lt Update gt button on the Menu bar If you wish to return items to more than one position click the lt CTRL gt button on the keyboard and mark all required items while choosing the items you must continue pressing on the lt CTRL gt button on the keyboard At the end click the lt Update gt button The Return Items screen will appear with the requested item s for return Pl Return Items 15 x 31017465 Demo HM90 E90A D 75 3 Demo2 0 MatrixDemo2 Demo HM90 E90A D 75 3 Demo2 0 MatrixDemo2 Demo HM90 ES0A D 62 2 C Demo2 0 MatrixDemo2 Page 173 of 432 QR CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Bo MATRIX v If you don t wish to return some of the items mark the line in the grid and click the lt Delete gt button to remove the record from this screen Select the line for changing quantity for return and click the a lt Update gt button on the right side of the grid The following screen will appear OOOO hl Quantity ft Fill in the quantity you wish to return and click the lt Save gt button Click the lt Ret
41. S Py CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATRO To run the report open Menu Reports gt Additional Fields Report gt Additional Fields Report HE Additional Fields Report Table Name Field Name 0 H Entity Value sd Found 68 Records Supplied from Germany Supplied from Supplied from USA Supplied from Length Length 3101686 Length 3101694 Length 3102566 Entity Maintenance 9 9 2 Additional Fields Advanced Items Report This screen enables the user to create a customized report based on the records of the basic additional fields report It also enables the user to save the definitions and run the report at a scheduled time To run the report open Menu Reports gt Additional Fields Report gt Additional Fields Advanced Items Report Page 219 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 amp Sets D E Additional Fields Advanced Items Report 0 x Description Report of additional fields for Items Filter and Grouping Choose Fields Report Type Design Report m Standard Chart Listing No Subtotals Condition operator All conditions At least one condition I Simple Title Item Code Supplier Name Please refer to Chapter B Advanced Reports section 9 1 for instructions how to build and run an Advanced Report 9 9 3 Additional F
42. Ship To Bill To 50 State Stet O 20OstaeStet chicago O aa Jeor s SOOCOCOC C C HICQOO sSOSCSCSCSCSC fit FF3434 M Supplier Information Contact Person Bay Royde Addresses Neapolsky va Canada Toronto Delivery Address fields Automatically filled in with the address and the contact person data of the Site for which this order was created see General tab This data can be modified temporarily for the specific order or permanently on the Site definition see Chapter D Site section 16 6 Ship To The address to where the ordered items should be delivered Bill To The address to where the order invoice should be sent Contact Person The name of the contact person at the ordering site Supplier Information fields Automatically filled in with the address and the contact person data of the applicable Supplier This data is non editable on the order and can be modified only on the Supplier definition see Chapter B Suppliers section 5 1 Fill in the details and click the lt Save gt button on the Menu bar Page 150 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 7 2 Create Automatic Orders The system allows you to create automatic orders for replenishing stock The ordered items and their quantities are determined by the system calculation according to the replenishment parameters The calculation process compares between the current sto
43. Status Reworked Used Item Do not Issue Do not Order New Durable Used V V Expendable New New Used needs a Rework Regrind y y y Reworkable After rework y y 5 3 1 2 Stock Adjustment A stock adjustment transaction is initiated by the user when there is an inconsistency between the stock quantity and the number of items in the bin Items in Bin field To change the stock 1 Change the quantity in field Items in Bin and click the E lt Save gt button or set focus to other field At this point the user is asked whether he wishes to modify the stock quantity 2 If you choose not to update the operation will be cancelled and the field will contain the amount already recorded in the database Otherwise the following Stock Adjustment screen will be displayed Page 90 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 at Stock Adjustment x Bin Code ltem Code ltem Description Demo1 01 01 13 5505421 Demo IDI 0295 56 IC908 Old Bin Quantity 45 00 New Bin Quantity mooo Adjustment Quantity Ee Comments A 3 We recommend inserting a remark to explain the reason for the adjustment Save the changes After saving the transaction s details the system will perform the adjustment for the relevant bin 5 3 1 3 Tab Stock Management This tab displays information of stock management on the Bin level in order to replenish the stock by automatic purchase or
44. default with shipping method of the selected supplier if user has not made any selection yet This is a mandatory field and must be filled in 4 Click the EJ lt Save gt button on the Menu bar to create the order in the system Once the order is created PO number is automatically received and the order tabs are created 9 Note Once the order is created it cannot be deleted from the system but only can be closed Page 134 of 432 f CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 5 Continue to enter values for the fields in the following tabs Page 135 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 7 1 1 Tab General Note When adding a new order only the general fields at the top of the page and the General tab appear The other tabs will only appear after entering the mandatory values and saving the order The General tab contains additional general details regarding the order TTT ii nlx PO Number PO Code Supplier Supplier Name Shipping Method px p standard j liscar ep PHL 7 mman General Details Additional Fields Links Address Status Oe o Revision ooo 3 C Sent Supplier PO M Order Date a207 F Site Mst H Site Requested By bomn H Request Date a207 z I Send To ERP Currency USD Freight ey Total Price En Remarks Update Create User admin creator SS Update User Jadmincreator SCS Create Date A062007 Update Date amgr0o7
45. status and the ordered quantity is reduced Order Maintenance The transferred quantity will be added to the On Route quantity in the order line Tab Details and will be reduced from the bin entity Tab General 6 Continue with Receive process at the cabinet which created the Internal Order 8 3 RETURN Order to Supplier If there is a need to return items to a supplier because of damage the wrong item was supplied or for any other reason the user has an option to return the item to the supplier The return option is available only if the order line was received into stock Maximum quantity for return is the quantity that was received in the order line 1 Goto Menu Order gt Return to Supplier 5 2 Search for the order line that you want to return and click the z lt Update gt button or double click it The following screen will be displayed Page 170 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eae MATA Return to supptier T PO Detail 133 ltem Code 3101694 Item Description Demo HM30 E90A D32 4 32 C PO Key Line No Supplier Name Received Quantity Cabinet Code Dm E anaes Demo1 01 05 06 Quantity To Return a Maximum Quantity 2 00 In Stock 7 00 Remarks This screen displays in the Cabinet Code and Bin Code fields all the cabinets and bins respectively that contain the item of the selected order line for return If only one cabinet or bin contains t
46. the way to deal with them If none of the solutions helps to solve the problem or the problem does not appear here please contact support It is also recommended to read the instructions described in Chapter E Activate Jobs section 25 3 as a part of troubleshooting GE1001 None of the Automatic processes are running Problem None of the automatic processes are running Possible reason The SQL Server or SQL Server Agent is not running Solution Follow the instructions in Chapter E SQL Server Service Manager section 25 3 2 GE1002 Error message when trying to activate jobs in Database Administration Problem The following message is displayed when trying to activate any job Activate Job failed SQLServerAgent is not currently running a x Activate Job failed SQLServerAgent is not currently running so it cannot be notified of this action Changed database context to msdb Possible reason The SQL Server or SQL Server Agent is not running Solution Follow the instructions in Chapter E SQL Server Service Manager section 25 3 2 Page 421 of 432 D T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 GE1003 Cannot run jobs from workstation Problem General failure in running jobs on the client workstation Possible reason The installation of Server module creates folder ServerSetup as following Matrix Installation folder ServerSetup If this folder does not exist the jobs that use file S
47. 2 18 2 Users Entering the system is done by a User Name and Password In order to be able to enter the system the system manager must define every user name and its password and to which group it s connected The user will get the authorizations from the group s to which it is assigned Search User Entering the user definition is done through the menu 1 Inthe main menu go to Menu Administration gt Users and Authorizations gt Users 2 Fill the parameters for search and click the la lt Search gt button on the Menu bar The following screen will appear oix User Key E User Name sd Full Name DO User Code E Po Phone No sd Last Issue date o H Found 5 Records Through this screen you have the ability to update delete add details of a user Add User 1 Click the a lt Add gt button through the permanent data record Page 325 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 2 Oo oy MATRIX v The following screen will appear without frame on the bottom part HE User Maintenance User Key Password Full Name E Mail First Name Badge Number User s Language 1 User Name fmn SSS x Vibia Confirm Password Foo i famin s S Phone No ees Locked a A fadminf SS Last Name per a 7 Bc2000 User Code hmn SOS User Group ero Admin 2 Enter the user de
48. 307 16 7 2 Budget by AMOUNT cece ee ent eect eene ee ee tees eee eaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeneaes 311 16 8 Unit OF Meas re aes scs cade ceca stevesvsuaesachicasy cxsxevade cubated sctcenderagvatasictvsvsescdesisascteesdceuiasiiers 312 17 SYSTEM OPTIONS wesc sciesscissschetchivadet EE EAEE NEE eaei AEE A TENEN ENEE EREET KANAANAN NEEE TERE EEANN EE 314 17 1 Find System Option cece ee eenee eee ene ee ee ecne eee ee eeeeeeecaeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 314 17 2 Update System Option ccccccccsccceceeeeeseeeeeaeceeeeeeeesaceaeaeeeeeeeeesesanaeeeeeeeeeseeneaeees 315 17 3 Table of System Options eeclesie ceeeee erent EEEE AETS 316 17 4 Special System Options cccccececsccceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenaeeeeeeeseseeniaeeeeeeeeneeees 321 18 MANAGING USERS AND AUTHORIZATIONS cssccccecseeeeeeceneeeeecceeececaeeeeecenaeeeeecseeeeessieesessaes 324 18 1 GrOUP Of USETS ai cis iets ead anana Vea aaa iaaa E aes veda E Aaaa a aaa EEA aa 324 18 2 USCIS cect A E E E TA E E 325 18 3 Authorization Manager sese isernia reion eE RANNE RENAE RASANA SENERA T ANAE SE 328 18 3 1 Menu Authorization eseeeeseeenneneeeeeeeen rn nstesenrrtnnnrasttertrnnntnsstenrnnnnnnentennnnn nenene ent 328 18 3 2 Controls Authorization 2 20 00 cccccce cscs ce cece eeeeceeeeeeee eee eeseceaeaeeeeeeeseseceuaeeeeeeeeeeeees 329 19 DEFINE COST CENTERS itsss tccanedacecSasneadsaseccsccssadeadanastashexssaaesdeahadeaustaninadchhacsacsdsaieac
49. 4 2 MATEIX Figure 2 Take the first portion of the components and close the drawer Issue Kit Item admin ITMDemo Take the items and close the drawer Demo1 Demo1 01 01 14 44 00 Page 262 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ggefraise Figure 3 The next portion of the components is presented Press lt Next gt Demo1 Demo1 09 01 05 5 00 Demo1 09 07 05 25 00 Demo1 09 07 11 40 00 10 Page 263 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 cf Figure 4 Take the second portion of the components and close the drawer Issue Kit Item admin ITMDemo 12 07 2007 Take the items and close the drawer Current Item Code Cabinet Drawer Bin Stock Demo1 z Demo1 09 01 05 5 00 Demo1 09 01 11 Demo1 09 07 05 Demo1 09 07 11 40 00 Press lt Finish gt to complete the kit issue Current Cabinet Drawer Bin Stock Quantity Page 264 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ax Pe After each drawer is closed the stock of the kits component items is subtracted and issue transactions are written Those transactions contain a remark noting the kit item 13 1 2 Issue an Item from Locker The purpose of this process is to issue item from locker from a bin defined in a Non Automatic cabinet by issuing first the key for the locker from Matrix cabinet bin To enable this process please make first the item definitions in Ma
50. 432 SEX ss CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 se PX pZ K2 MATIX Life cycle of REWORKABLE Item 904 Yes 904 No Order of New items Receive Bin Used No Rework No Yes Bin Used No Rework No Used Yes Rework No Used Yes Rework No e When Reworkable items are sent to regrind supplier but cannot be fixed close manually their order after receiving all that was fixed Receive Bin Used No Rework Yes e When 904 Yes and there is a rework bin it may still be possible to receive the rework order to it Page 121 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 5 4 5 Add Images to Items The system supports displaying the item s image in the Manage and Touch modules To use this feature the folder defined in System Option 400 Item Pictures path must contain all the files with the extension as defined in System Option 204 Picture File Type When opening an item in Manage or Touch the system will try to find the compatible item picture and to display it If no matching file will be found the Group Image of that item or No Image will be displayed There are three ways to add images to the items Manual file renames and copies 1 Rename the image file using Item Code value and extension such as defined in the System Option 204 jpg gif bmp For example the image file name of item with Item code 1030606 can be 1
51. 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 7 Orders standard Rework and Internal This module describes 3 different types of orders standard orders Rework Orders and Internal Orders that are managed in 2 different ways manually and automatically All order types are created in a similar way therefore their screen and fields are described here once and differences between them will be noted The system displays a list of orders each type in a different list where we can add a new order can sort and or filter existing orders and can open them for maintenance The Order Maintenance screens contain the orders general information PO number PO code supplier supplier s name and shipping method and the following tabs each contains information relevant to the order General Details Additional Fields Links and Address Using the tabs a user can view the content and status of each line item in the order and can update its details Three types of orders Order standard An order for purchasing new items from a supplier 1 Operated by Menu Order gt Orders 2 The order can be created both manually and automatically 3 When creating the order we select items that we want to order from the supplier Select item of any type Durable Expendable Reworkable Kit 4 In order to receive the items into the system it is not necessary to make lt Send Order gt operation 5 When the items are supplied by the s
52. AdditemCode Additional Item Code English 6 6 Additionaldescription Additional Item Description English 7 7 AdditionalltemCode Additional Item Code English 8 8 AddText Add Text English 9 9 Adjustitem Adjust Item English 10 10 AdjustiteminstrLine Open bin to adjust English 11 11 AdjustitemsTitle Adjust Items English AdjustitemTouch Adjust Item Touch English 2 Locate the text that you wish to translate and double click the record or click the lt Update gt button The following window will then appear HE Root Text Maintenance 5 x Text Code rmnuTouchCountBins Cuna User Controls Count Bins Inventur AS MEAL Conta lo scomparto P epo tat Bin nea T O tens Compter casier Contar bins Przelicz Miejsce Inventario de Contenedor Pre tej predalnike Inventera Fack Optzl rum EE MHBeHTapM3salMa Prepo ta prie inok rekeszek sz ml l sa Tel vakken Page 299 of 432 QR CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Seow MATRIX This grid displays translations of the selected text to different languages supported by the system The buttons on the right side of the grid allow you change delete the existing translations or add a missing translation 3 For update select the relevant culture record and click the za lt Update gt button The following window will then appear HE Text Maintenance 0 x Culture li Text C
53. Chapter B Receive Rules section 8 1 1 The Maximum Quantity column represents the maximal number of items that can be received When the maximum quantity 9 999 999 00 it means that the bin was marked with Allow Over Capacity and therefore there is no limit on the items can be received 2 Select the desired bin and click the a lt Update gt button or double click the line The screen as following will appear lolx ltem Code pimes o ltem Description Demo HM90 ES0A D32 4 W32 C Cabinet MxDemo5 Ver20 Bin Demo5 01 03 04 Capacity se Allow Over Capacity fa Items in Bin foo t SF Used ltem ia Maximum Quantity fe Reworked fa New Received i Remarks References Reference 1 Reference 2 Receive Order Cancel Fields description Item Cabinet Bin disabled fields All the data regarding the selected bin Maximum Quantity The maximum quantity that can be received Page 167 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 New Received Insert here the quantity you now want to receive up to the maximum quantity Reference fields The reference fields are displayed for supporting interface with ERP systems The number of reference fields 0 4 depends on the System Option 111 3 Enter the received quantity in the New Received field and the references to the order in ERP system and click the lt Receive Order gt button The stock of it
54. Check box With Head if your import file has a fields heading as a first row Click the lt Add gt button displayed next to grid at the bottom of the screen in order to add tables for import Page 375 of 432 RR CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ob MATRIX rr The following screen will be displayed listing all the available tables for import xi Table Name ENT ITEM MASTER ENT ITEM MASTER USER_PROFILES TVL_ITEM_GROUPS ENT_SUPPLIER_MASTER ead ENT_ITEM_SUPPLIERS TVL COST CENTER DETAILS 7 Select Table that you want to include in the import and click the lt Save gt button The table will be added to the list of tables for import 8 Click the lt Save gt button on the Menu bar to save the project 22 4 Adjusting data for import 9 Go to Table Properties tab The combo box Table Name will display all the available tables for import 10 For every table you want to import follow the next instructions Edit table and its existed fields Select from the combo box Table Name the table for import The grid for table fields will be displayed including all the required fields described in the table above and sometimes some of the optional fields that were added by default Here you can add other available fields to the table and to set definitions for all the fields from the grid 11 Select from the grid the field for editing and click the za lt Update gt button on the right side of the
55. Database version is different from the application version Page 425 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 see CI x The Database version is different from the application version Possible reason You tried to load a newer Matrix software version with database from older version Solution Upgrade the database so that it is compatible to the newer version of the software Please follow Chapter F How to Upgrade the Database to the currently installed software section 26 5 Otherwise use the older software version with the current database not recommended GE2004 Error message 10 when trying to load Touch Problem When trying to load Touch get the following error message number 10 No cabinet was connected to this PC Please refer to System Message E MessageNumber 10 No cabinet was connected to this PC Please refer to T ouch Machine Administration and Touch Cabinet settings in MANAGE module Administration menu Possible reason The PC from which you are trying to run Touch was not defined in the database or no cabinets are connected to the PC name Solution Set the touch definitions as described in Chapter A Set TOUCH definitions section 3 2 6 27 3 Troubleshoot Access to the Cabinet Hardware This section describes problems that might occur in accessing cabinet drawers bins through the Touch module and the software solutions for them Page 426 of 432
56. For field Cabinet Name select the cabinet you want to attach to the Touch Click the lt Save gt button and close the screen In order to attach more cabinets to the current Touch repeat steps 4 6 Page 43 of 432 os CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 emate 3 3 TOUCH module 3 3 1 Login to TOUCH Follow these steps to login to TOUCH module 1 Go to the Windows Start Menu gt Programs gt MATRIX TM gt MATRIX TM Touch If there is a problem in running the module please refer to Chapter A Connect to the Database section 3 1 The Welcome to MATRIX TM Login will be displayed Password LOO Y 2 Fill in the User Name and Password fields and press on the lt OK gt button Initial User Name admin Initial Password admin If there is a problem to login check the user name and password Page 44 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ain Menu admin ITMDemo42 24 07 2008 Select an Option Issue Receive Adjust Item Count Bins Transfer Order Receive without Order TOUCH Operations If the login was successful the Main Menu will then be displayed with the following options Issue Issue items Receive Enter orders from supplier into the cabinet re stocking Return Return items to the cabinet Transactions Allows an authorized User to correct transactions Adjust Item Adjust stock quantities of items Count Bins Stock counti
57. History Process History will show you all the transactions which where done by Database administration creating a log of activities letting you track when the last backup or restore were made etc Page 410 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 25 14Restore Item Bin This option enables restoring an Item or Bin that was previously removed by Manage module Database Administration 4 0 Connection Restore Item Bin iTMDema A l TTM2005 Restore ltem User Password E Pipesiiein Database Tools Restore Record Backup Restore item 1 for kit Restore Item Bin Activate Jobs Reset SQL User Password Manage Tools Stock Balance Restore Defaults Reset Matrix Admin Password Logs Send by E mail Delete Logs Replications Utilities SQL script running Process History Use the lt Restore gt button to restore the record 25 15History Data Options This option enables to delete history of Orders in status Closed with order date earlier than the selected date and Transactions with transaction date earlier than the selected date Please consider backing up the database before delete this is irreversible operation Page 411 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 x A IE Database Administration 4 2 Connection History Data Options Server Name Database liTMDemo42 Activate this option only in special cases This procedure deletes rows fro
58. Interface 23 07 2008 15 13 40 Activate Job Succeeded Utilities SQL script running Matrix TM Agent Process History Refresh Jobs Delete Job Activate Job Local Information 2 Select the desired job from the list This will display in the grid a list of steps of job run progress and under the grid it will display if this job is currently enabled and the date time of the next run Clicking on step will display detailed results below the grid Page 400 of 432 or coe CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Database Administration 4 2 Connection Activate Jobs Server Name Database itMDemo42 Job Status Idle User Name rm2005 iTMDemoReportsEngine User Password E 29 07 2008 08 00 00 00 13 25 07 2008 08 00 00 00 14 Database Tools 25 07 2008 09 00 Succeeded 00 00 14 Backup Restore 25 07 2008 09 00 Succeeded 00 00 14 Restore Item Bin 25 07 2008 10 00 Succeeded 00 00 12 Activate Jobs 25 07 2008 10 00 Succeeded 00 00 12 Reset SQL User Password 96n7InNea 14 0N Qurreeded nn nn 49 History Data Options Manage Tools The job succeeded The Job was invoked by Schedule 1818 Stock Balance TMDemoReportsEngine The last step to run was step 1 Restore Defaults ITMDernoReportsEngine Reset Matrix Admin Password z Logs Next run date 27 07 2008 10 00 00 W Enabled Eo Send by E mail SSS Delete Logs Replications Interface 23
59. It also displays the Item Cabinet stock management information for each item by cabinet such as Min amp Max quantities draft and ordered quantities usage information etc To run the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Reports gt Stock by Cabinet 9 3 6 Stock by Item This report displays all the items in the system and their stock It also displays the Item stock management information for each item such as Min amp Max quantities draft and ordered quantities usage information etc Page 210 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 To run the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Reports gt Stock by Item 9 3 7 Min Comparison This report compares the Automatically Calculated Minimum stock with the Manually Determined Minimum stock on each stock management level Bin Item Cabinet and Item levels It calculates the difference between the two stock quantities in pieces and in percentage It also calculates and displays the monetary value of the difference in the Saving column To run the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Reports gt Min Comparison 9 3 8 Max Comparison The report compares the Automatically Calculated Maximum stock with the Manually Determined Maximum stock on each stock management level Bin Item Cabinet and Item levels It calculates the difference between the two stock quantities in pieces and in percentage It also calculates and displays the monetary v
60. MANAGE SyStem 0 ecccccceee ee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneaeeeeeeneaeeeeeneaeeseeeeaeeeeseaeeeeeeaaees 4 2 The system s Desktop erinesid aA ae ered ead ede wets 4 2 1 Main A700 nee Se a aa a a a a a a e A 4 2 2 Tolba a urninnenue anaa a a aaa aa a a a aa aeaa AA 43 Operational Principle S sinss dsni aa a a a a Eaa 4 3 1 Search for a record oneni inea a a a aa a a a aai 4 3 2 Change Search ViOW s icc ie etc te Ga ae ieee 4 3 3 Add arecord eran meee sgn A tS a ev E E Y 4 3 4 Update record ccccccecceceeccceeeeeeeeecencaeceeeeeeeeeecceaeeeeeeeeesecccaeeeeeeeeesesencieeeeeeeeeneees 4 3 5 D lete a record agerer n E E A E a a A e a aa Eh 4 3 6 SNOrtCut C E E E 4 4 Definition of COMMON Terms cce cece ccc cceecccsceeecessueeeeeeeeeseuaueueessaeueeeeeeseesauaeeeeeaaseeeenenseaes 5 BASE ENGI ES narr caret ectetean ncvevtcn estenestlsanud waa caunseavariie i 5 1 SUP PU ionic E decane ENE cpdassaneuadaees olan ap O E E E 5 2 C 0 Ome eae ES ne ne EE EE E G e 5 2 1 Adding a Cabinet 0 ccc tte etree errr nese eieee ee tieeeeeniieeeee teaser ennn ne enn 5 2 2 Deleting an Entire Cabinet cccecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeess 5 2 3 Adding Drawer Types ccccceecteeeee etter teeter ee eiieee eee tiieee ee eieeeeetiieeeeetiieeeeetieeeerena Page 2 of 432 BOLL Sots CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See MATEIX 5 3 EAEE EE AEEA E EEE AEA EE A EE E E EE EEE EEEE 86 5 3 1 Addin
61. MATRIX Set this system option for running automatic monthly process job DBName EndOfMonthProcess 305 End of Month Time Set this system option for running automatic monthly process job DBName EndOfMonthProcess 400 Item Pictures path Recommendation Locate the image files in one folder shared to all the Matrix users and define here global path for example pename Matrix Images This will prevent unnecessary copies of files and maintenance for each folder separately 401 Reports path To created reports into path defined here each Matrix user must have writing permissions for this path If there is a problem with permissions use folder which is shared for all the users or use environment variable such as TEMP MatrixTempDir Reports 404 Group Pictures path Recommendation Locate the image files in one folder shared to all the Matrix users and define here global path for example pename Matrix Images This will prevent unnecessary copies of files and maintenance for each folder separately 600 Create Database Auto Backup Set this system option for creating automatic backup job DBName AutoBackup 602 Database Auto Backup folder Recommendation If the database located not on the backed up server create the database backup file on the server which has automatic backup for the files or create it locally and then transfer the file to backed up server
62. MATRIX Yana E is to active o a fame o 1 Active 0 0 facte o 10 Active 1o Active tof Active o to active o Demo1 01 01 01 5501822 20 Demo1 01 01 02 5502097 20 Demo1 01 01 03 5502128 20 Demo1 01 01 04 5502149 30 Demo1 01 01 05 5502149 30 Demo1 01 01 06 5502154 30 Demo1 01 01 07 5502161 20 Demo1 01 01 08 5502161 30 Demo1 01 01 09 5502203 40 to active Pt continuation of the table jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jak aka a h a G jo jo jo jo jo jo jo jo 22 1 7 Import Stock Management Data This section describes Import of Data for Stock Management by table V_IMPORT_STOCK_MANAGE_LEVEL The main purpose of this module is to import Minimum and Maximum quantities for any stock management level Bin Cabinet Item in order to allow automatic orders ITEM_KEY defined as ITEM_CODE Required Unique Item Code Item Code as appears in the Item Maintenance screen CABINET_KEY defined as CABINET_CODE Required Unique Cabinet Code Cabinet Code as appears in the Cabinet Maintenance screen Not relevant for import on Item Level Page 372 of 432 a ae CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Ege Bin Code Bin Code as appears in the Bin BIN_KEY defined as BIN_CODE Maintenance
63. MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 qi AE Standard Order Maintenance B x PO Number PO Code Supplier Supplier Name Shipping Method Kx f demo orde 03 TaeguTec E Express i Ca General Details Additional Fields Remarks and Links Address Demo TPM 50 00 Demo Demo1 01 0 Open S126 Demo HM90 Demot 09 0 Open Line Details Remark Additional Fields ltem 5502222 Demo TPMR 221 Ic70 Cabinet Dermot Bin Derno1 01 04 10 Quantity poo 00 Received Quantity fo Unit Price fea 55 Total Price fi227 5 Order Date 08 02 2006 Request Date 08 02 2006 Promised Date 08 02 2006 Receive Date R Status Oen H Adding ITEMS to a standard Order or INTERNAL ORDER 1 Click the lt Add gt button located at the right of the order line grid The following screen will appear HE Search Item Item Key E Mm Item Code El Tr S Item Type El n ltem Description o Primary Supplier supp A Group M A Found 2 Records It will display all the items of any types Page 140 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 2 Search for the required ITEM mark the line and click the lt Select gt button or double click the line The items screen will be closed and the selected item will be added to the order As a result an additional index tab will appear bellow Note If an item which is not attributed to any supplier is selected a notifica
64. Management Page 108 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 b ITFA This tab displays information required for the stock ordering process The grid at the page s top section contains the different available Stock Management Levels Item level total quantity of this item in all cabinets and or Item Cabinet level total quantity of this item in a particular cabinet In order to purchase stock the minimum and maximum quantities and the monthly issuing frequency can be manually set for each cabinet to which the item is associated When selecting the required level by marking its row in the grid the fields at the lower part of the page display its details allowing the user to update some of them 9 Note The expiration date is obligatory if you change one of the override fields 3 Item Maintenance O x ltem Key Item Code Item Description ltem Type p2 5505421 i Demo IDI 0295 5G icgo8 Expendable gt i IBS General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions Links Orders Iter ltem Cabinet MatrixDemo1 ltem Cabinet MatrixDemo2 Quantity In Stock poo Ordered fc Rework Orders _ Draft bpo Issue Quantity pooo Internal Orders Calculated Override Expire Date Av Monthly Usage 0 000 pmo 31272007 a Minimum Quantity fo 7FTC 100 Maximum Quantity boa FTC 120 Frequency Class Issues per month E 2 5 H e a
65. Tab Supplier Information This tab is used to define the supplier of the selected item along with some additional data like pricing Page 103 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 z 0 x Hey Item Maintenance Item Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type p2 5505421 Demo IDI 0295 SG Icg08 Expendable j ES General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions Links Orders Iscar 01 USD E 1 5 r os usp el General Cost Break Usage Information Supplier Item Cade Supplier Item Description ee Unit of Measure Pieces z Expire Date Minimum Order Quantity fi Update User admin creator Discount E Update Date 2170672007 Supplier Price 250 Create User admin creator Pack Size i Create Date 07702 2006 Remarks f The screen s top section contains the item s general details Its middle section contains a list of suppliers who are associated with this item and their details Adding a supplier for an item 1 Click the lt Add gt button 2 Search the required supplier in the supplier s search screen mark his record and click the lt Select gt button Page 104 of 432 go MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 HE Search Supplier Supplier Key K Ke Supplier Code ss Supplier Name _ Found 2 Records supp supp Golomb 16 st Tel Aviv On
66. The definitions of the bin do not fit with the operation you have tried to perform 2 The bin does not have bin units 3 There is no free space to store the item Allow over capacity is not signed 4 The system options 904 905 block access to bins New Used Reworked Solution 1 Check the definitions of the following fields on the Bin Maintenance screen fields Status Consignment Do not Issue Used Item Reworked 2 Check if the bin units exist 3 Check the capacity of the bin 4 Check the system option 904 905 together with fields Used Item and Reworked GE5003 The bin does not accept the quantity that am trying to insert Problem try to set the bin quantity without success Possible reason It may happen if you have tried to fill a bin over its defined capacity Solution Check the Capacity and Allow Over Capacity mark on the Bin Maintenance screen 27 6 Troubleshoot General Issues GE6001 Cannot export reports to Excel Problem Using Manage try to export basic and advanced reports to Excel without SUCCESS Page 431 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Possible reason If Excel is not installed it will export the list to the web browser Otherwise this may happen if the folder defined for the reports does not exist or does not have writing permissions Solution Check if the folder defined in system option 401 Report Path exists on the PC If yes check the writin
67. This path must points to folder which includes the file ScheduleServices exe 203 System Currency Key This key will be used for automatic orders Verify that this key points to the expected currency 204 Picture File Type To ensure that all the pictures will be loaded properly verify that all the files have extension as defined here 205 Number of Records to display New records are added to the end of the list for example like with list of Transactions If number of records will exceed this value the last records will be cut To see the last records as first records in the search screen please sort the list for example by key date and save this sort Next time the list will be opened with new records on top and the old records will be cut 209 Create Scheduled Reports Set this system option for creating automatic scheduled reports job DBName ReportsEngine 300 Default Lead Time Set this value when initiating the database and before first Monthly Process starts to run 301 Number of months for Average calculations Set this value when initiating the database and before first Monthly Process starts to run 303 Last Monthly Process Set this value when initiating the database and before first Monthly Process starts to run Page 321 of 432 CITMS 304 End of Month Day MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CR GREI oSA
68. Updates database Update database from old version in order to make it compatible with the latest version of the MATRIX TM software The updates are done according to e Changes in Data structures such as fields and tables e Changes in System options e Changes in Views and Stored procedures e More definitions which reside in the database If the database version the value of System Option 0 Database Version is the same as the version of the current installation then this option will only restore the defaults Page 403 of 432 D amp D D T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Otherwise this option will run a full update of the database including restore of defaults Important This command will not change any of your data like items bins users etc Note This update is identical to the Update process during server installation Important After running the Restore Defaults option the changes will be irreversible It is strongly recommended to backup the database before using this option Important The Restore Defaults option restores the default values from the ITMDemo database to the database displayed in the Connection details Therefore for successful restore you must have the ITMDemo database on the same server This database is installed automatically when selecting Server option in the installation process Note The restore to ITMDemo database and Replicated databases is blocked in order t
69. Version 4 2 4 CHAPTER C MATRIX TM TOUCH MODULE TOUCH Module Preview The TOUCH module has been planned and designed around the typical method of working Our target is to improve control and shorten the work process and access to data The system allows the worker to perform a variety of operations with the MATRIX dispenser such as issuing returning counting etc all through an easy to use touch screen Page 229 of 432 ge MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Er MATRIX 11 Required pre definitions for TOUCH system In order to be able to work on the TOUCH module with the cabinets defined in the database the user must first login to the MANAGE module and create touch definitions Login to MANAGE system and follow these instructions 11 1 Define the Touch definition for computer 1 2 Open Menu Administration gt Touch Machine gt Touch Machine Administration Click the a lt Add gt button The Touch Maintenance screen will be displayed The user must define here the Touch definition for the computer oix Touch Name i Computer Name Fill the Touch Name field with a significant value that describes the name of the TOUCH workstation Fill the Computer Name field with the exact name of the PC that will run TOUCH the value can be taken from Go to that computer Properties follow tab Computer Name click lt Change gt button use the value of Computer Name field
70. Work Center cost centers omot m Project Properties m Result File Name CADBbackup temp forUG xls Gs With Head Vv Sheet Name Work Centers Table name T L_COST_CENTER_DETAILS On Source file 4 rows Inserted 4 rows Updated 0 rows Failed 0 rows Page 365 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 7 Import project adjusting columns between Excel and Project details RE Import Data Table Name TVL_COST_CENTER_DETAILS gt COST_CENTER_CODE m COST _CENTER_CODE 2 iv COST_CENTER_VALUE COST_CENTER VALUE 300M M COST_CENTER_KEY gt m costceNTeRHEADER MCN A S Column Properties Field Narne COST_CENTER_CODE In File Vv Required Fas Column Name E COST_CENTER_CODE Is Unique Vv Sequence C E Default Value tt E Cost centers of Work Center header imported by the project Search Cost Center Details x Cost Center Details Key 57 Cost Center Code o Name S y Cost Center Description ss Found 4 Records Tooling work Center Work Center Threading 4 Create data table for the cost centers of Machine header as in the following table Table 2 Data for table TVL_COST_CENTER_DETAILS Page 366 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Machine mo MAZAKG2001 Machine mos MAZAKG2003_ Machine Mmo MAZAKG2004 OKUMA LT10 3 5 Create another import p
71. a new Matrix version released you may want to upgrade the software with the new version To do this follow the instructions below On the computer with the Server installation with the database Note down the Database Name that you are working with for the steps after installation You can check the database name by opening the Settings program from Windows Start Menu gt Programs gt MATRIX TM gt MATRIX TM Tools gt Matrix TM Settings as also described in Chapter A Connect to the Database section 3 1 1 Login to the Database Administration program and Backup the database into file as described in Chapter E Backup of the Database section 25 1 This will guarantee the data is saved before making changes and in case any problem happens during the upgrade you can always go back to the previous version by restoring the database from the backed up file until finding a solution for the failure 2 Remove the existing Matrix software installation by selecting Windows Start Menu gt Programs gt MATRIX TM gt MATRIX TM Tools gt Matrix TM Uninstall and following the instructions 3 Install full Matrix TM software Server Manage and Touch modules as described in Chapter A Install MATRIX TM Setup section 2 4 Important At the step of installing database window Server Setup with title Select Installation Database Name set the Database Name of your database and select option Update Database Pag
72. also available for editing Page 80 of 432 ey AN as CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 m MATRI Recommendation To save time on setting values for the fields you can set default values that will be loaded when creating new bins For more information see Chapter B Defaults List section 5 6 5 Save the data by clicking the al lt Save gt button on the Menu bar For more information it is important to read Chapter A Bin Location section 5 3 3 Cabinet Units Manual Creation Usually the cabinet units need to be generated automatically as previously described If you still wish to add or edit manually the cabinet units you first need to create the bins in order to be able to associate cabinet units with bins 1 Click the lt Add gt button or Mark a certain row and click the ZZ lt Update gt button The buttons are located on the Cabinet Maintenance screen on the Cabinet Units tab at the right side of the grid The Cabinet Unit screen will appear Page 81 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ko Cabinet Unit x X 5 Le Poo Ti Boo Is Send Bin Code cab101 0103 F Drawer Position from Top Booo In MATRIX Cabinet the X Y Z coordinates of the unit which also has YES value for Sent field usually represent the location of the latch which opens the bin In other cabinets usually the drawers will look like open trays or shelves therefor
73. amount limitations for the user group Activate budget 1 Set System Option 108 Activate issue budget by Amount YES Define budget for user group 2 The budget definitions for Amount and Days are added on User Group screens Please continue to Chapter D Group of Users section 18 1 to define budget amount and budget days for the user group for which you wish to restrict the issue 16 8 Unit of Measure In order to define a new unit of measure follow the next steps 1 Go to Menu System Tables gt Unit of Measure 2 Click the lt Add gt button and the following screen will appear E Unit of Measure Maintenance E Unit Measure Key mooo Unit Measure Code o Unit Measure Symbol f Unit Measure Name General Units Decimal Length Poo 3 Fill in the data Unit Measure Code Unit Measure Symbol Unit Measure Name and Decimal Length Page 312 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 A 4 Click the lt Save gt button Page 313 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 17 System Options The system options are parameters which define how the system will behave in different operations This is a very powerful tool that lets the organization which operates MATRIX TM to adapt the way the system behaves to its individual needs 17 1 Find System Option In order to find defined system option you should follow these steps 1 In the main menu go to Menu Administration
74. and click the lt Save gt button This will create a grid of Cost Center Detail Parent In the Cost Center Detail Parent mark the parent cost centers to which this cost center is linked and click again the lt Save gt button For example If a work center has a number of machines and if machine 10 is under cost center C1 and cost center C2 then in the machine detail the parent cost centers would be C1 and C2 Page 333 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 2 19 3 Define Items per Cost Center You can define a list of items that will be available for Issue according to the selected cost center in Touch application in Issue module This will require defining the links between cost centers and items This will not have effect on the Issue in the Manage application There are two ways to make these definitions which are described in the following paragraphs Link cost centers to ITEM For each item to link the cost centers that will use this item Link items to COST CENTER For each cost center to link the items that should be available The image below shows as example structure of headers and cost centers and the item linked to them Cost Center DETAILS and links to Items Cost Center HEADERS Links between Headers and Details ee 3 WorkCenter NO Choose from List GM 1 1 Important notes before creating the links e The definition if to limit items for issue is made on the COST CEN
75. as consignment This will allow Issue transactions to be invoiced Item Type Non editable field which displays the type of item associated with this bin This item type determines the available functionalities for the bin More information is described in the Chapter B ITEM Life Cycle section 5 4 4 Reworked If the bin is marked Reworked the items in this bin have been received from a rework regrinding Sometimes it is important to differentiate between new items and between items which have been reworked Used Item Indicates whether the bin contains a new or used item See the following table for an explanation of this code Page 88 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CR Bin Stock Management States whether the stock is managed at the bin level This Automatic Order Do not Order Issue Any Quantity Capacity Allow Over Capacity means that the automatic PO process will replenish according to the Min and Max of the specific bin Default value not checked If checked the automatic processing will initiate orders for this bin Default value checked If checked no order can be processed for this bin either automatically or manually Default value not checked If selected the user may issue any quantity up to the maximum stock in the bin If not the user must issue the entire quantity of stock in the bin The maximum number of items that can be stored in this bin If checked the system w
76. button and the following screen will appear ioj Shipping Method Key Eo Shipping Method Name JHL 3 Fill in the data Shipping Method Name 4 Click the lt Save gt button 16 6 Site In order to define a new site follow the next steps 1 Go to Menu System Tables gt Site 2 Click the a lt Add gt button and the following screen will appear Page 306 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 bo fl Site Maintenance Oj x Site Key p Site Name Matrix Site Description DemoSite Site Company StartUp Phone No o Fax No Po Bill to Address 1 Ship to Address 1 DO Bill to Address 2 DO E Ship to Address 2 Bill to Address 3 Ship to Address 3 Bill to Address 4 DO O Ship to Address 4 3 Fill in the data Site Name Site Description Site Company and other contact details 4 Click the lt Save gt button 16 7 Budgets for Issue You can restrict the issue of items from MATRIX TM Touch according to a defined budget Each time a user wishes to issue an item via MATRIX TM Touch the requested issue will be checked to ensure that it does not exceed the user s budget either by quantity and or amount within a specific time period Budget options We can define a budget by Quantity and or Amount e Inthe Budget Group we have budget definitions by item quantity and days e Inthe User Group we have a definition by amount and days 16 7 1 Budget by Quantity
77. by pre defined parameters and to send them automatically at scheduled times by email 23 1 Define the reports In order to schedule reports you must priory to create advanced reports and save its definitions as described in Chapter B Reports section 9 1 Goto Menu Administration gt Scheduling Reports 2 Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar The following screen will appear RE Scheduled Report Maintenance loj x User Name admin creator SS File Type Wig Schedule Day Every Sunday Schedule Time 05 00 Query Name CHART GROUP BY TRN TYPE TSA Deae E mail H File Name Trn Date Last Updated n Separator Active d 3 Fill in the data for the required fields User name Select the user to whom you want to send the report by Email Make sure that the selected user has an email defined on his User Maintenance screen File Type Select a file type for the report XLS XML TXT PDF Schedule Day Select a permanent day for running the report Schedule Time Select a permanent hour for running the report Query Name Select an advanced report that was previously defined and saved Page 380 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Destination File Name CR Select a destination for sending the report E mail File E mail the created report will be sent to the user selected in the User Name field by his email address Make sure that the selected u
78. calculated at the end of each month Average Lead Time The supplier s average lead time calculated at the end of each month Page 107 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 2 Lead Time Override The lead time can be modified to the value specified in this field Lead Average Effective Date The date until which the lead time override mentioned above is effective Note To see specific supplier information mark the required supplier and click the lt Update gt button or double click the record As a result the above mentioned tabs General Cost Break and Usage Information will appear 5 4 1 3 Tab Additional Fields This tab displays the additional fields Numeric Text Boolean and Date set for the Item entity in the Additional Fields screen This screen only allows you to edit the fields that were already added For instructions how to add more fields to the entity see Chapter B Additional Fields section 5 5 To update values for each of these fields click the lt Update gt button set the required value and click the lt Save gt button HE Item Maintenance g Ioj x Item Key Item Code ltem Description ltem Type m 5505421 Demo D1 0295 56 1908 Expendable gt Links Orders Cost Centers General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions EA Additional Fields Field Comer number Value Eoo 5 4 1 4 Tab Stock
79. can connect a serial cable between those ports You also need to check that you have a Net framework 2 0 installed on your PC e From the Start menu run the VmDemo application e On the Setup menu set the Port and Baud rate to work e On the Setup menu set the application to simulate TMS CTRL e f you want to send telegrams between the two applications run the VmDemo again to open another application Page 32 of 432 en see CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Sea e Set the second application to work with TMS CTRL e Select Telegram click the lt Send Telegram gt button and wait for message response e f you get Timeout message check if the correct Port was given and the cable is connected correctly e f Error message appears check the parameters given and the machine situation Page 33 of 432 SEs CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 tea MATRIX 3 Working with MATRIX TM The section describes how to connect to the desired database and to start working with the Manage and Touch modules 3 1 Connect to the Database In order to start working with MATRIX TM you need to set the starting definitions such as database selection basic language etc on the Settings screen 1 In order to get to the settings screen go to Windows Start Menu gt Programs gt MATRIX TM gt MATRIX TM Tools gt MATRIX TM Settings The following screen will be displayed 1c x f Gene
80. clicking the lt Down gt arrow button a system message will appear and the record will be marked red Note The grid for item selection displays constant and customized columns If the columns Additional Item Code and Additional Item Description do not appear in the grid you can add them by setting System Option 1011 Please be aware that this setting will affect the display on TOUCH module as well Remove item from issue list Mark the item and click the a lt Up gt arrow button This operation will remove the items from the bottom table issue list Update quantity to be issued The fields at the bottom table are for display only except the last field Issue quantity which must be completed Select the line and click the 1 lt Update gt button on the right side of the grid The following screen will appear Page 177 of 432 CITMS Maximum Quantity 2 Quantity Fill in the quantity you wish to return and click the lt Save gt button Note You can only issue a quantity that complies with the Default Issue Quantity Processing the issue After all items requested for issuing have been moved to the bottom table issue list and the quantities were set click the lt Issue Item gt button EE This operation will update the stock quantities and create an Issue transaction 8 5 1 Issue Kit Open Menu Operations gt Issue The first step is to find the kit you wish to
81. complete assembled item or each kit component item can be located in its own bin so when issuing the components will be issued from different bins drawer by drawer 1 Press on the lt Issue gt Icon and enter the relevant cost centers as usual Page 257 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ematea 2 Then search for kit type items For example if you set up the Kit using the word KIT in the item description then searching KIT will bring up all kits in the cabinet In the screen below the result is shown in the top part of the screen Choose an Item admin ITMDemo Enter an Item Ki am mn e 3101686 Demo KIT HM90 ES04 D2D Milling 44 00 8080801 KIT item assembled only No Group 90 00 6080802 KIT item assembled separated No Group 30 00 3 Select Kit item and press on the lt Next gt button 4 If you receive the following pop up question execute this step Otherwise continue to the next step System Message Message Number 1514 Do you want to issue kit items as an assembly YES Assembly NO Separated items Page 258 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See 5 6 RID MATRIX The pop up question allows you to issue the kit items as an assembly from one bin or as separated items from multiple bins Yes for Assembly Select lt Yes gt to issue all the kit s component items from one bin as a regular issue of items The system will displ
82. drag the mouse to reduce enlarge the window size e Resize columns Click the divider between columns and drag mouse left or right in order to resize the width of columns e Re order columns Click a column header and drag it to a different position e Search parameters Set search parameters as described in the previous section Page 63 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 All the above operations can be saved To save the changed view 1 Open relevant search screen and make the required changes to the view 2 Click the E lt Save gt button on the toolbar to save the changes or Click the es lt Save amp Close gt button on the toolbar to save the changes and close the screen Add a record Users can add a record to the generic search screens like the list of Items Cabinets etc To add a record 1 Open the relevant search screen 2 Click the lt Add gt button on the toolbar The maintenance screen will be displayed in an Insert mode 3 Input values for the fields and click a lt Save gt button to save the record Once the record is saved it will be added to the search screen and may then be updated or deleted Note The fields that appear with a red asterisk are mandatory and must be filled in before saving the record Page 64 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Update record User can update an existing record in the generic search screen like the list of Ite
83. e User Groups follow Chapter D Group of Users section 18 1 e Cost Center Headers follow Chapter D Add Cost Center Header section 19 1 Import data into the database by following the Chapter D Import Data section 22 e Import Users e Import Suppliers e Import Item Groups e Import Items e Import Cost Center Details e Import Bins Note It is not mandatory to import at this stage all the data described above You can import this data later or add it manually Therefore consider this as a recommendation only 6 Back up the database into file to prepare for restore on the destined server Read more in Chapter E Backup of the Database section 25 1 Page 414 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 26 3 How to Operate the Database This section describes all the required software components and definitions in order to operate Matrix cabinet On the destination server 1 Install Matrix TM software Read more in Chapter A Install MATRIX TM Setup section 2 4 Restore the Database from the previously backed up file using Database Administration Read more in Chapter E Restoring the Database section 25 2 On the Settings program set the software to the previously restored database Read more in Chapter A Connect to the Database section 3 1 Create TOUCH definitions using Manage module Read more in Chapter A Set TOUCH Definitions section 3 2 6 Create the required jobs using Ma
84. for automatic orders e Select General tab and choose the following settings Page 155 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Select Stock Management in Item Cabinet Level for Stock Management Level field Go to the Item Maintenance screen of the items that you wish to include for automatic orders Select General tab and choose the following settings Check the box of Item Management Level field Select Stock Management tab and choose the following settings Look at the Minimum and Maximum levels which are calculated by the system If they are sufficient you do not need to change any data in this tab If you wish to override those values do the following Select Item Cabinet row from the grid of the relevant cabinet Fill in the value for Minimum Quantity field Fill in the value for Maximum Quantity field Fill in the date for Expire Date field This date will be effective for creating automatic orders according to the minimum and maximum quantities that were inserted manually Override column When this date expires the automatic orders will be created according to minimum and maximum quantities that are calculated automatically Calculated column If you decided to include the Item level for automatic orders Go to the Item Maintenance screen of the items that you wish to include for automatic orders Select General tab and choose the following settings Chec
85. generating Scheduled reports 402 Logo path Path for program Logo image 404 Group Pictures path Path for the ITEM GROUP picture files Activate job that automatically creates the Backup copy 600 Create Database Auto Backup of the Database 602 Database Auto Backup folder Path for Auto Backup copy of the Database Database Auto Backup 603 scheduler Day to create Auto Backup of the Database No of days to keep Database 604 Backup Number of days to keep Database Backup 605 Database Auto Backup Time Database Auto Backup Time 701 Server Port SMTP server mail port User name if SMTP server requires authentication for 702 User Name outgoing email User password if SMTP server requires authentication 703 User Password for outgoing email 704 Sender email Mail lt From gt address for outgoing mail 705 Mail Server SMTP mail Server name or address 706 Mail subject Mail lt Subject gt for outgoing mail Use Secure Authentication When the network security requires secure authentication in sending email this 707 Use SSL parameter must be set 708 E Mail for Technical Support E Mail address for Technical Support 801 Auto Purchase print destination Auto Purchase print destination How to run auto purchase O No run 1 Create purchase Draft 2 Create purchase Orders 3 Create 802 Auto Purchase creation mode purchase Orders and Send to supplier For calculating lead times of suppliers if an order was Percent for considering order supplied to this
86. grid Additional controls will be displayed to allow the data to adjust The following screen will then be displayed Page 376 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eee gt io Import Data Import Tables Properties Table Name USER_PROFILES he USER_NAME V USER_NAME USER_PASSWORD _USER_PASSWORD USER_CAPTION USER_CAPTION STR_FIRST_NAME FIRST_NAME i lt j 1 lt 1 lt 1 a Rustam O Turan ee BOOL BITU BOOL BITUL T O 4 Column Properties Field Name STR_FIRST_NAME In File Vv Required Yes Column Name FIRST NAME Is Unique E Sequence C e Default Value DO 12 If there is no data in your import file for the field or you don t want to use it o Un check the box In File o Fill the Default Value using the appropriate value type Numeric Text Boolean or Date as described in the tables above 13 If there is a data in your import file for the field o Check the box In File o Select Column Name and fill the edit box with the exact name from the import file if you have a column title for it or o Select Sequence and fill the edit box with the column sequence in the import file from 1 and on o Fill the Default Value using the appropriate value type Numeric Text Boolean or Date This value will be used in case you have no data for the record in the import file 14 Click the lt Save gt button on the Menu bar 15 Repeat the same actions for
87. group will be created and grid will be displayed for adding new items S Budget Group Maintenance Mi x Budget Group Name r Demo APKT 1003PDR HM9 Demo HM90 E904 D32 4 W Demo TPGH 2 1 XL 1C7 KIT 1 Demo Demo TPGB 2 1 IC20 o y e Quantity poo Number Of Days Foo 5 Click the lt Add gt button on the right side of the grid and select the desired item from the opened Search Item screen The item will be added to the grid 6 Fill in the following fields for each added item Quantity The maximum quantity of the item that can be issued Number of Days Number of days for which this quantity budget will be checked 7 Repeat the step 5 6 to add items to list Page 309 of 432 MATRE LR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Use the 4 lt Update gt and a lt Delete gt buttons to maintain the item records 8 Click the es lt Save amp Close gt button to save all the definitions The budget group will be added to the list of budget groups To add more items and item details use the za lt Update gt button or double click on the desired budget group Link budget group to a user group Once the Budget Groups are defined you need to link them to User groups This means that a user within the chosen User Group is limited to issuing items according to the items defined in the Budget groups their quantities in the defined period 9 Go to Administration gt Users a
88. gt button At this point you are able to enter the rest of the item s details in the screen s tabs Recommendation To save time setting values for fields you can set default values that will be automatically loaded each time you create a new item For more information see Chapter B Defaults List section 5 6 5 4 1 1 Tab General This tab contains general details regarding the item Page 100 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 RE Item Maintenance 5 x ltem Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type f22 5505421 i Demo IDI 0295 5G Ic908 Expendable j B General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions Links Orders Additional Item Code o ltem Long Description Demo IDI0296 SG 1C908 Barcode o ltem Auth Group z Unit of Measure Pieces E ltem Group Dring z eS n Category Regular s 5 Main Family cr gg Default Issue Quantity 5 00 Sub Family ltem Weight Item Price 1 00 Average Cost Price of Reworked Primary Supplier X ltem Management Level M Consignment b p Iscar Update Greate User admin creator Update User admin creator Create Date a7 Qp n06 Update Date 0702 2006 Remarks Fields description Item Code Item Description Item Type Additional item code The catalogue number that is displayed also on the TOUCH m
89. gt button on the Menu Bar Report Document Page 201 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Special built in program displaying a report as a list of records or Chart design according to the user s selections The report is displayed in printing format Activated by clicking the 3 lt Print gt button on the Menu Bar If you want to display a report as Report Document select Standard or Chart under Design Report If you want to display a report as MS Excel file this selection is not relevant and it will display anyway in Standard design Example for Report in Chart design Page 202 of 432 ActiveReports Document Gen a pHa amm Jay B Siia Forward E B OFAR A aw Produced Al 1608 2005 15 19 56 By aimin Conditon oporabr Tran caoton Typos Tran moton daw Quarer Quantty E 162 09 BY 211 00 By 293 00 ES 323 09 E 025 00 E 1 169 09 C 1 09 Reporl Fooler 9 1 2 Saving a Report You can save your report parameters in order to run the report again in the future To do this after creating the report click the lt Save gt button on the Menu bar The report will be added to a list under the defined report Description Note It is mandatory to fill in Description field if you want to save the report Page 203 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 9 1 3 Finding a Saved Report In order to access a saved report click the C button to the right o
90. have selected a Chart design the following definitions are required a Select value for X Field to represent the X coordinates of the chart Page 197 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 b Select Quantity or Value for Y Field to represent the Y axis c Select chart type for Chart field d Select Color Style of the chart 6 Set conditions for filter The grid in the bottom part of the screen enables selecting fields and values for filtering the records in report In the Field column select the field Quantity Cabinet Code As a result the edit fields and browse buttons in the columns From To will be enabled disabled for click depending on the selected field type For some fields dynamic objects will be displayed from the right side of the grid in order to select records for the filter The selected records then will be shown also on the From To columns From To If the browse button is enabled click the button to get a search list and select record as the start finish point for filter Otherwise click the row to edit the value for filter Sort Type Set the order for viewing the data either Ascending or Descending Examples e Edit box If selecting Item Description field by clicking the row dynamic edit box will be displayed allowing manual edition The buttons From and To will be also enabled allowing selection of the items by the range of item descriptions
91. in the MANAGE module The item to be returned must be of Durable Kit or Re workable type 1 Press on the lt Return gt icon 2 Search for an item by barcode or from the list and select the item 3 Open the bin following the instructions and put the item into the bin 4 Close the drawer At this point a Return transaction with the logged in user name will be created 3 3 6 Adjust an Item A user who has authority to adjust items can adjust the stock quantity of a bin as shown in the system to the actual quantity in the bin 1 Press on the lt Adjust Item gt icon 2 Search for an item by barcode or from the list and select the bin to which the item is linked Page 47 of 432 D T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 3 Open the bin following the instructions and adjust the quantities on the screen according to the actual quantity in the bin 4 Close the drawer At this point an Adjust transaction will be created with the logged in user name 3 3 7 Count Bins A user who has authority to count bins can reconcile between bin quantities shown in the system and between the actual quantities counted The count can be done for one bin or for all the bins in one drawer 1 Press on the lt Count Bins gt icon 2 Select from the list a particular bin for counting or select any bin from a particular drawer and then answer if you wish to count all the bins from the drawer or just the selected bin 3 Open
92. into the allocated bin s Close the drawer Stock will be updated and a Receive transaction s will be created 13 9 Working with Key to Lockers MATRIX TM lets you manage Keys Keys are stored in MATRIX cabinet and external lockers defined as bins of a Non Automatic cabinet connected to the key When issuing an item located in an external cabinet or locker the MATRIX cabinet will actually issue the key for the locker and create separate transactions one for the key and Page 291 of 432 3 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 one for the item To enable this process please make first the item definitions in Manage module as described in Chapter B Key Management section 5 4 6 Here are described Touch modules and the way the Key Management is handled in each Issue When item in locker is selected for issue it opens the bin with the key and two transactions are created Issue transaction for the key and Issue transaction for the item The Issue of the key itself is not available Receive Receive without Order When item is selected to be received to a locker it opens the bin with the key and two transactions are created Issue transaction for the key and Receive transaction for the item The Receive of the key itself is not available In Receive it shows the item but filters the bins marked as Used In Receive without Order it filters the item of Key type Return When an item is selected to be returned t
93. issue It is a good habit to start the description of a kit with the text KIT on the item definition which will make it easier to text search for a kit In the top part of the screen you will see the items which are the result of the selection Please notice that in the example below the first line outlined in blue has no cabinet or bin This means that each item comprising the Kit will be issued from its respective bin The second line in the example below is an assembled kit If you chose to issue this line all the items comprising the Kit will be issued from one bin Page 178 of 432 RR MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 fill Issue gt iol x Issue to admin creator Cost Center Department Drilling Machine Drilling Machine 12 Work Center we Drilling Job Number Generic Search kom Code Item Description KITI d Cabinet Bin S H Once a kit item is chosen with the arrow down in our example the blue line the following screen pops up and you will be asked to input the quantity for the kit Kit quantity xi Maximum Quantity 1000000 Quantity poo Once the lt Save gt button is clicked all the component items quantities are multiplied by the quantity of the kit The resulting components list with their calculated quantities is located in the bottom grid ready for issue MATRIX TM will choose the component items according to a method
94. items can be transferred Fields description Destination Cabinet Code The cabinet for which the item was ordered Destination Bin Code The bin for which the item was ordered If none the order was created on the Cabinet level Source Bin Code The list of bins that contain available stock for transfer Ordered Quantity The quantity ordered for the destination cabinet Received The quantity received by Receive process On Route The quantity that was issued for transfer and still was not received by the Destination Cabinet Transfer Quantity The quantity to be transferred to the Destination Cabinet not exceeding the Maximum Quantity Maximum Quantity The maximum quantity that may be transferred considering the current stock in the selected bin and the quantity left to Page 169 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 transfer in the above example 18 3 9 6 lt 19 the maximum quantity will be 6 Select the bin from which to issue the item Define the quantity that you want to issue for transfer in the Transfer Quantity field and click the lt Transfer Order gt button 5 Follow the changes done after confirming the order line update A Transfer transaction with negative Transaction quantity with the logged in user is added to the list of transactions The stock of item bin is reduced by the transferred quantity Order Maintenance The relevant order line is changed to On Route
95. more information in Chapter B ITEM Life Cycle section 5 4 4 8 1 2 Receive with MATRIX TM Order This type of Receive is based on the open purchase orders in MATRIX TM Manage For receive without order or for receive based on the order created in ERP system please refer to Chapter B Receive with ERP Order section 8 1 3 1 Open Menu Order gt Receive Order Page 164 of 432 RR CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 sates The screen Open Orders will appear displaying the list of all the order lines of all order types 2 Select the requested order line and click the a lt Update gt button or double click the line The screen as following will appear fil Receive Order j lol x PO Number 578 Line mooo ltem Code 3101694 ltem Description Demo HM90 E90A D32 4 W32 C Supplier Code woo Cabinet Dem SO zii Demo1 01 05 06 Quantity haso 8 7 FCS S Capacity 100 Received 700 Items in Bin fo On Route 11 00 Allow Over Capacity P Used Item iat Reworked New Received Remarks References Reference 1 o Reference 3 o Reference 2 P Receive Order Cancel J Fields description Cabinet Cabinet containing the item of the selected order line If only one cabinet contains this item this field will be disabled Bin Bins in the selected cabinet that can receive this item by Receive Rules as described in Chapter B Receive Rules section
96. multiple languages Once the TOUCH module is installed it starts automatically after the cabinet PC restarts Database Administration It is a program with collection of database maintenance utilities Backup restore database and configure data replication Control and monitor database jobs Reset passwords Page 14 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ic Page 15 of 432 BOLL Sots CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See MATRIC 2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS This chapter contains basic instructions about how to install the MATRIX TM software and how to START working with MATRIX TM by operating Hardware and Software Tools Please read these instructions carefully to ensure fast and easy installation and operation of MATRIX 2 1 System Requirements Hardware e Standard Intel Pentium 4 or compatible system e Minimum memory 512MB e Recommended Hard disks of minimum 40 GB divided to 2 partitions 20GB each Note If you want to have full functionality of the MATRIX TM system you will also need a MATRIX cabinet Software e Operating Systems Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 SP4 Windows Server 2003 Windows XP SP2 Windows Installer 3 0 or higher Microsoft Net Framework 2 0 e MSDE SP4 Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine must be installed if the computer running MATRIX TM is also running the SQL server e Regional Settings and formats have to be configured according to your local
97. number Otherwise no value will be shown If it is a Receive transaction this field will display the line number from the order Otherwise no value will be shown The reference fields 1 4 display the input from Receive transactions when working with Interfaces in SAP for example Reference 1 PO Number in SAP Reference 2 Line No in SAP The calculated transaction cost in the chosen currency If it is a Receive transaction the currency will be taken from Order Otherwise it will have for general currency The calculated transaction cost in the system s default currency system option 203 Indicates if it is a consignment transaction Its value is copied from the related item bin For more information about the calculated values see Chapter B PRICES of Items and Transactions section 8 9 For any transaction type except ISSUE The tab does not enable editing fields Page 191 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 4 General Costs PO and Costs PO Number Ba o Line No Booo Reference 1 T Reference 3 o Reference 2 ee Reference 4 nary Transaction Value Fso 8 8 t SW United States Dollar Trans value in System currency Bie System Curr NIS I Consignment For ISSUE transaction The tab enables to edit Line value customer currency and the Consignment fields General Costs Cost Centers PO and Costs PO Number
98. percent it will be considered as having 804 line as supplied been supplied Page 318 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 wx 7 A MATIX 805 PO code prefix First part of the Purchase Order number 806 Default file format for order Default file format for Order 807 Auto PO Day What day to generate the automatic PO 808 Auto PO Time What time to generate the automatic PO 809 Default Site Key Default Site Key for New Order Percent from the Minimum stock quantity that determines the critical stock level This value is used only for Advanced Stock Shortage reports Stock below minimum but above this percent is considered as Non Critical shortage Stock below minimum and below this 810 Critical Minimum Stock Percent percent is considered as Critical shortage Show Item Code and In printed order show Item Code and Description of 811 Description of Supplier Supplier The next automatic order will have this code It is 812 Auto PO Code incremented automatically Average Usage can be an arithmetic average FLAT or 900 Average usage calculation type a Moving Weighted Average MWA The factor used to make the weighting of the MWA 901 MWA factor average Please use values in range of 0 1 The percentage of extreme cases between 0 0 99 when the lead time was very short or too long The Percent of Extreme lead time Monthly Process will ignore them when calculating
99. recorded along with the date In the Status field the status of the transaction is recorded In the lower part of the screen there are three subject tabs General Costs and Cost Center available only for Issue transactions Maintenance screen for any transaction type except ISSUE Page 186 of 432 MATRIX v bo CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 HS Transaction Maintenance Transaction Key oe tt it tS ltem Code 5505421 ltem Description Demo IDI 0295 SG IC Transaction Type Recere Bin Code Demol 01 01 13 Cabinet Demot Demot Update ae admin creator speta Uez admin creator Create Date a ap007 Update Date 72007 Status Active General Costs Transaction Quantity Date 11 12 2007 an Transaction quantity Bo User admin creator Quantity before Transaction ge 00 Issued for Remarks eS Maintenance screen for ISSUE transaction fe Transaction Maintenance Transaction Key O36 Item Code 502154 ltem Description Demo TPGH 2 2 L IC Transaction Type sue Bin Code Remol 01 01 06 Cabinet Deniaiitamal Update Create User admin creator Update User admin creator Create Date 20 11 2007 Update Date 20 11 2007 Status Active General Costs Cost Centers Transaction Quantity Date ponto Ba Transaction quantity hoo OS User admin creator Quantity before Transaction Bo Issued for admin cr
100. records to display in search 205 Number of Records to display screens 206 Default Unit of Measure Default unit of measure for new items 207 No of days to keep Log Number of days to keep Log 208 Bar Code font Bar code font for reports Activate job that automatically creates the Scheduled 209 Create Scheduled Reports reports 210 Display records on Search Displays records when opening search screen 211 Report Footer Text for Report Footer 212 Report Header Text for Report Header Number of months with no Number of months with no activities on Item Bin for 213 Item Bin activity defining them as Dead for the reports The default value for the Lead Time of Item Supplier and 300 Default Lead Time also for the Monthly Average Lead Time calculation How many months to use for calculating the Average Number of months for Average Usage Frequency and Lead time during the monthly 301 calculations process Last month in format MMYY that was fully processed 303 Last Monthly Process and updated automatically by the Monthly Process The day to run the Monthly Process end of month 304 End of Month Day process The time to run the Monthly Process end of month 305 End of Month Time process Page 317 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 BRR T Sete MATRIX Qf Fe 400 Item Pictures path Path for the ITEM picture files 401 Reports path Path for automatically
101. report open Menu Reports gt Items gt Kits Report Page 221 of 432 El Kits Report Kit Key Item Type Additional Item Code Found 17 Records Coo e Kit Code E H ltem Key Po ltem Description E E o x E o Kit Description o E n ltem Code 2 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 Durable 3 3101694 Demo HM90 E90A 1 0 30 00 2 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 Durable 4 3102566 Demo HM90 E90A 1 0 86 30 2 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 Durable 5 3101745 Demo HM90 E90A 1 0 75 30 Ei 2 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 Durable 7 3101749 MRE kit Maintenance 57 40 2 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 Reworkable 21 5530123 Demo PICAR tem Maintenance 1 00 2 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 Expendable 1 5605179 Demo AP 20 00 2 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 Expendable 6 5605180 Demo APKT 1003P 1 0 6 00 gt 68 8080802 KIT item assembled se Durable 3 3101694 Demo HM90 ESOA 2 1 30 00 68 8080802 KIT item assembled se Expendable 1 5605179 Demo APKT 1003P 4 2 20 00 68 8080802 KIT item assembled se Reworkable 21 5530123 Demo PICCO L MF 6 3 1 00 69 8080803 KIT item separated only Durable 37 4550257 Demo BHF MB63 63 3 1 1 00 69 8080803 KIT item separated only Expendable 13 5501822 Demo TNMS 431 12 5 2 1 00 69 8080803 KIT item se
102. screen Error Cannot perform operation on System Int32 and System String Possible reason You tried to import alpha numerical data into field of numerical type or the opposite Solution Use the matching input type Follow the tables that describe the field types in Chapter D Import Data section 22 GE4004 Error import result Conversion from type DBNull to type Integer is not valid Page 429 of 432 3 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Problem After the import is completed get the following error message in the result screen Conversion from type DBNull to type Integer is not valid Possible reason You tried to import an empty value into a field of numerical type Solution Use the matching input type Follow the tables that describe the field types in Chapter D Import Data section 22 GE4005 Result message notifies about success but no data seems to be imported Problem get result message that the import data succeeded but see no data records when opening Search screens Possible reason Perhaps there was input missing for mandatory fields marked as Required in the import project The records were actually imported but they cannot be displayed because of missing data Solution In Chapter D Import Data section 22 follow the section which describes the format of input file GE4006 General import errors Problem Different errors in importing data Possible re
103. software with faulty settings after which the Settings editor is opened Solution Check that the settings to the database are correct and check that the SQL Server and Agent are running See also solution for GE2001 GE3005 Error message 90009 Port Is Not Open Problem got the error message 90009 Page 427 of 432 RR CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eee MATRIX Possible reason The COM Port defined in the Manage Cabinet Maintenance screen 1 Does not exist at all or 2 Is used by another device like On screen keyboard Solution Check the COM Port field in the Cabinet Maintenance screen GE3006 Error message 90010 No Answer from remote connection Problem got the error message 90010 Possible reason The COM Port defined in the Cabinet Maintenance screen exists but there is no access to it not available busy with something else or disconnected Solution Check the cable connections GE3007 Error message 90013 Port is not available Problem got the error message 90013 Possible reason The port defined in Manage in the COM Port field in the Cabinet Maintenance screen does not exist Solution Correct the port definition in Manage GE3008 The cabinet opens wrong drawer Problem When trying to open a bin the system sends open command to wrong drawer Possible reason Perhaps the controller plug in height definition the controllers relative plug in position on
104. suppliers later and then create a link between them For separated import follow these steps 1 Edit for input the data of Items and Item Suppliers in one table or in two separate tables 2 Create import project with ENT_ITEM_MASTER table for importing only Items and import the data At this stage Items should be added with no supplier definitions to the view Menu Main gt Item gt Search Item 3 Create import project with ENT_ITEM_SUPPLIERS table for importing Suppliers for the items that were already imported and then import the data At this stage Supplier s will be added to the ltem Maintenance screen on tab Supplier Information 4 Import again the ENT_ITEM_MASTER table only with the SUPPLIER_KEY field for Primary Supplier value This value cannot be imported correctly before carrying out the previous step 3 Page 362 of 432 ees T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 P Meta MATRIX 22 1 5 Import Cost Centers This section describes Import of Cost centers by table TVL_COST_CENTER_DETAILS and Import of Cost Centers Links by table TVL_COST_CENTER_LINKS These tables cannot be imported independently See the note Note In order to import Cost Centers and the links between them you must first add manually Cost Center Headers as described in Chapter D Add Cost Center Header section 19 1 Import Cost centers by TVL_COST_CENTER_DETAILS This table allows you to add Cost Centers to the view
105. tab and the Build Drawer option to add drawers of the previously customized configurations All the rest of the definitions such as connecting items to bins etc will be identical to the definitions with a MATRIX cabinet The difference will be in the TOUCH module when activating a command for opening bins depending on the cabinet type Kardex The command will be sent to Kardex controller and will automatically bring the tray forward without the need to request it on the Kardex control panel When finished the user presses the button for closing the tray on the Touch interface and the shelf returns automatically to its original position Non Automatic Instead of sending a command for opening bins the same command will be executed virtually simulating the open and close of a bin Page 418 of 432 MATRIX S22 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 For Kardex and Non Automatic the popup window will display the drawer mapping to easily locate the desired bin as on the screenshot below Drawer Mapping Click Close EE AA ee aE AA alal a 26 7 How to Add Images for Items and Item Groups The Matrix software supports displaying images of items and item groups The system option 204 Picture File Type 400 Item Pictures path and 404 Group Pictures path are responsible for displaying the images on the Manage and Touch modules Follow the instructions that are in Chapter B Add Im
106. text for remarks Of the above the stock management level cabinet type and site fields are mandatory The cabinet s creation date date of update and the user who performed the last update will be automatically saved by the system and displayed at the bottom of the page 5 2 1 2 Tab Cabinet Units This tab displays the coordinates for each unit in the cabinet from which the bins are compiled Some bins are compiled from one unit for example bins in Drawer Type 1 or known as D100 1 D50 1 etc in the MATRIX cabinet And some bins are compiled of two or more units such as bins in Drawer Type D 2 known also as D100 2 D50 2 etc The coordinates are part of the instruction which is sent to open a certain bin In MATRIX Cabinet the X Y Z coordinates of the unit which also has YES value for Sent field usually represent the location of the latch which opens the bin Page 76 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 In other cabinets usually the drawers will look like open trays or shelves therefore the field Sent will have NO as its value In order to add these Cabinet Units to the list usually you will need to use lt Build Drawer gt button for automatic generation of the Bin Units according to the cabinet type and drawer type Please follow the next instructions for automatic and manual adding Figure 1 Cabinet type MATRIX ee Cabinet Maintenance x Key p Code Demot Name MatrixDemo1
107. the MANAGE Module Operations gt Transaction Close the drawer Continue with the Receive process at the cabinet which created the Internal Order 3 3 9 Transactions A user who has authority to use this option can correct the quantity of an issue transaction The option displays all the Issue transactions and allows filtering the list by the user who issued the items To correct an Issue transaction 1 2 3 Press on the lt Transactions gt icon Search for a transaction by item barcode or and by user and select it Select the bin and set the quantity for return up to the issued quantity or the bin capacity Open the bin following the instructions written at the top of the screen in RED and return the item Close the drawer At this point a reversal Issue transaction with negative Transaction quantity will be created with the date time and user of the original transaction Check this transaction in the MANAGE Module Operations gt Transaction 3 3 10 Receive without Order A user who has authority to use this option can receive items to stock according to the orders created in an ERP system The option displays all the items of the current Touch station that have free storage space To receive without order to stock 1 Press on the lt Receive without Order gt icon Page 49 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Search for an item and select it If References screen is displ
108. the key and one for the item This is a very efficient and economical solution for large items management 5 4 6 1 Defining a Key Item 1 Goto Menu Main gt Item 2 Create a new item choose Key for Item Type field and save This will create all standard tabs and an additional tab called Connected Bins RE Item Maintenance k l0 x ltem Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type j2 KD3101694 Key To 3101694 in Non Auto Key es inks Orders Cost Centers Connected Bins Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions Additional Item Code DO ltem Long Description Do gt Barcode DO stizCSzr amp gt ltem Auth Group O H Unit of Measure General Units x fea GS ltem Groun E I an 3 Locate the key in MATRIX cabinet bin s by the Locations tab or by opening the Search Bins screen Page 123 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 amp gt fl Item Maintenance mali ltem Key litem Code ltem Description Item Type p2 K03101694 s Key To 3101694 in Non Auto i Key Links Orders Cost Centers Connected Bins General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions Demo4 Demo4 01 01 01 3 00 4 Open the Bin Maintenance screen of the bin in which you have just located the key and mark the Used Item field This is required in order t
109. the side board connections is not correct Solution Check the Y position on the Cabinet Maintenance screen gt tab Cabinet Units as also described in Chapter B Tab Cabinet Units section 5 2 1 2 Page 428 of 432 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 27 4 Troubleshoot Import of Data GE4001 Error from Microsoft Jet database engine when trying to import data Problem When click the lt Import gt button on the import project get the following message The Microsoft Jet database engine cannot open the file It is already opened exclusively by another user or you need permission to view its data Possible reason The import file is not available for import Solution Close the import file and run lt Import gt again GE4002 Error import result Column BIN_CODE does not belong to table Table Problem After the import is completed in the result screen get an error message that the column does not belong to table Table for example Column BIN_CODE does not belong to table Table Possible reason The Column Name that was defined in the import project was not found in the input file Solution Verify that the column appears in the Excel file with the exact name even if it is empty GE4003 Error import result Error Cannot perform operation on System nt32 and System String Problem After the import is completed get the following error message in the result
110. the system Supplier home page Supplier contact person that will be copied automatically to purchase orders The currency that supplier uses The shipping method that supplier uses Select Email to send the automatic purchase orders to the current supplier by email or select Print to print the orders Sign the box if the purchase orders of the current suppliers should be sent by default to ERP General remarks Page 71 of 432 ED RER g T MS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 D MATRIX Fat Note The details which are maintained on the supplier level will be used in the Items and Purchase orders therefore it is recommended to maintain as much detail as possible in this screen Further explanations regarding those issues can be found in Chapter B Items section 5 4 and Chapter B Orders section 7 Adding a supplier 1 Select Menu Main gt Supplier in the system s main menu 2 Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar Enter the mandatory and regular fields according to description above 4 Click the c lt Save gt button on the Menu bar Important Please note that the view of suppliers already includes a supplier called Internal Supplier This supplier is automatically added when creating a new database or updating the database to version 4 The system uses this supplier for Internal Orders and prohibits deleting his record It is also not recommended to edit its data 5
111. this value already exists in the database For example when importing items verify that the Item Groups or Unit of Measure that you use for import in import file or in import project as a Default Value is already exist in the database If not it must be added manually or imported beforehand 9 Verify that there is no mismatch between the input type and the expected input type such as avoiding importing alpha numerical value when numeric value is expected Page 374 of 432 BEX MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gGaereise Z 22 3 Creating Import project 1 Follow the menu Menu Administration gt Import Data A Search screen will be displayed enabling search for previously created import projects Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar The following screen will then be displayed l 3 Import Data Import Import Project Key fF Project Name Project Properties Result File Name DO O E3 a With Head T Tables Properties On the Import tab 3 4 Insert in the field Project Name the name for the new project Select the import file of xls or txt type by clicking the browse lt gt button If you have chosen Excel format Sheet Name edit box will be displayed Type the exact sheet name you want to import f you have chosen Text format Separator combo box will be displayed Select the same separator that is used in the file
112. to Import tab 21 Click the lt Save gt button to save all the changes 22 Click the lt Import gt button You will be notified about import operation on the message control below In case of successful import the message will describe the number of updated rows and number of imported rows In case of failure the message will describe the reason for failure Page 378 of 432 GRID re T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 xO MATRIX 22 6 Loading Import project Once you have created Import Project it is saved in the list You can load the project edit the data and run the import again 23 Follow the menu Menu Administration gt Import Data A Search screen will be displayed enabling search for previously created import projects 24 In the Search Import Data screen search for the saved projects use the fields by clicking the lt Search gt button on the Menu bar Select the project from the list and click the z lt Update gt button on the Menu bar or double click on the line The selected project with its parameters will be loaded into Import Data screen Please notice that you can also delete an unwanted project by selecting the project line in the search screen and clicking the cj lt Delete gt button on the Menu bar Page 379 of 432 RS Ro CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eras MAT 23 Report Scheduler The Report Scheduler allows the user to create reports
113. to the Menu Administration gt Settings e Use the Windows Start Menu gt Programs gt MATRIX TM gt MATRIX TM Tools gt MATRIX TM Settings 15 1 Settings configuration The Settings screen Page 296 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 te ei General Server IP lich o User ID Itm Password Language Enin o Log File No Application TouchForm Touch Mode Machine x Server IP Is the server name where the database of MATRIX is located If the database is running on the same computer where the MATRIX is installed then put in this field the name local User ID This is the user ID which is used to access the database Initially will be ITM Password This is the password which is used to access the database Initially will be ITM Database Name This is a combo box that lets you chose a database from the list Language This combo includes all the installed languages Choose one Log File The system will be able to create logs on the selected level You can find those logs in the directory Logs under the installation directory Select a log level No No error logs will be written Page 297 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Minimum Logs will be written only on selected events Maximum Extensive logs will be written Touch Mode Select the mode to run Touch application Machine working with cabinet machine Virtual working virtually w
114. which was not yet related to any other bin code 8 Repeat the same steps for creating more Bin Codes filling the whole or part of the grid 9 Save the Drawer Configuration by clicking the E lt Save gt button on the Menu bar Now this drawer type will be available for use in the Cabinet Maintenance screen on the Cabinet Units tab 5 3 Bin The bin is the basic stock management unit Each bin is associated with the item it stores A bin that is not associated with an item is regarded as an inactive bin The bin screen displays the bins details and allows updating existing bins or adding new ones Located at the top of the page are the general constant bin details Bin Key The bin s unique identifier an automatic number that uniquely identifies the bin and cannot be updated Each bin receives this ID from the database Bin Code Describes the bin s location in the cabinet For example the code B 01 02 03 describes a bin which is located in cabinet B first drawer and the second row and third column of bins in that drawer Notice that this is our recommendation for managing MATRIX type cabinets You can choose any other scheme of bin codes but be sure to make it consistent with the structure of your cabinet or warehouse Cabinet Code The bin s cabinet code Item Code amp Description The stored item s code This code can be selected from the available codes list which is displayed when clicking the button A bin can be
115. will help you get ready and react before a delivery problem happens Page 214 of 432 Pa or T MS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 xO MATRIX To run the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Shortage gt Early Warning Report 9 6 Stock Valuation Reports The valuation reports allow the user to view the monetary value of the current stock The value is calculated by Average Cost of the item Quantity Note This section describes basic reports for valuation of the stock To build an advanced report for stock valuation use Advanced Stock Report where you can see the value information as well Read more in Chapter B Advanced Stock Report section 9 3 1 9 6 1 Valuation by Bin report This report displays in generic view all the bins that have item definition and their stock value The stock value is expressed in Total Value Total Value Average Cost of the item Quantity in the current bin For the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Valuation Report gt Valuation by Bin Report 9 6 2 Valuation by Item report This report displays in generic view all the items in the system and their stock value The stock value is expressed in Total Value Total Value Average Cost of the item Quantity of the item For the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Valuation Report gt Valuation by Item Report Page 215 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 9 6 3 Valuation by
116. working with keyboard shortcut keys on the next screens Generic search screens CTRL N gt Create a new record CTRL O gt Open the selected record for update CTRL Delete gt Delete the selected record CTRL F5 gt Clear the current search parameters F5 gt Refresh the search list CTRL P gt Export the list to excel for print Maintenance screens Alt Up arrow gt Open the maintenance of previous record Alt Down arrow gt Open the maintenance of next record CTRL S gt Save the current record CTRL Enter gt Save and close current record Page 67 of 432 R CITMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 s RID MATRIX 4 4 Definition of Common Terms Desktop The system s main screen frame which contains the fixed features in the system menus tools command buttons and shortcuts to commonly used applications Parameter Field s in the search screen which can be used to sort or filter records Command Buttons Buttons Buttons such as lt Search gt lt Save gt and lt Clear gt as well as operation buttons Update Add Delete and shortcut buttons which appear in the system s menus and cause certain actions Record Collection of fields usually a line in the database which describes a specific entity for example a cabinet a bin a supplier a transaction etc The records appear as rows in the grid in the lower section of the search screen or as a collection of fields in the Update screen
117. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 pay Page 112 of 432 SE CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 guefrisa 5 4 1 7 Tab Transaction This tab displays all the transactions for the Item RE Item Maintenance ltem Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type p2 5505421 Demo 101 0295 56 1C908 Expendable gt e3 General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Location Usage Transaction Links 30 a 0 50 0 0 n Demo1 01 01 13 01 02 2006 Active Demo2 01 04 03 01 02 2006 Active Demo1 01 01 13 01 02 2006 Active Demo2 01 04 03 01 02 2006 Active Demo1 01 01 13 01 02 2006 Active Demo2 01 04 03 01 02 2006 Active Demot1 01 01 13 01 02 2006 Active Demo2 01 04 03 01 02 2006 Active Demot1 01 01 13 01 02 2006 Active Dermo2 01 04 03 01 02 2006 Active Demot1 01 01 13 01 02 2006 Active Demo2 01 04 03 01 02 2006 Active Demot1 01 01 13 01 01 2006 Active Demo2 01 04 03 01 01 2006 Active Demo1 01 01 13 01 01 2006 Active Demo2 01 04 03 01 01 2006 Active Demot1 01 01 13 01 01 2006 Active Demo2 01 04 03 01 01 2006 5 4 1 8 Tab Links This tab displays a list of links associated with the item Page 113 of 432 S Item Maintenance p i 10 xi ltem Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type f22 5505421 Demo D1 0295 56 ic908 Expendable gt General Supplier Information
118. 0 Records Non Autom NADemo1 02 02 05 Non Autorm NADemo1 02 01 06 5501622 Demo TNMS 431 12 Non Autom NADemo1 02 02 06 Non Autom NADemo1 02 01 07 Non Autom NADemo1 02 02 07 Non Autom NADemo1 02 01 08 5530123 Demo PICCO L MF T60 Non Autom NADemo1 02 02 08 Non Autom NADemo1 02 01 09 5530123 Demo PICCO L MFT60 Non Autom NADemo1 02 02 09 Non Autom NADemo1 02 01 10 5530123 Demo PICCO L MF T60 Non Autom NADemo1 02 02 10 nin cn EAE on on an on n on eee eee ES Se NINN BB 9 9 Additional Fields Report The additional fields report allows the user to view the values of the additional customized fields added for the system entities Bin Item Purchase Order Purchase Order Line In order to add the customized fields to the entities see Chapter B Additional Fields section 5 5 9 9 1 Basic Additional Fields Report This report displays in a generic view the entities that have additional fields and the values of these fields The possible entities are Bin Item Purchase Order Purchase Order Line The entities that do not have additional fields are not displayed in the report The information is displayed for viewing To open the entity for changes select the record and click the right mouse button In order to add the fields to the entities see Chapter B Additional Fields section 5 5 Page 218 of 432
119. 030606 gif 2 Put the image file in the folder defined in the System Option 400 Files selections by Manage interface 1 Open the Item Maintenance screen of the item that you wish to set the image 2 Click the Cc browse button and select image file This will automatically copy the selected file into the folder as defined in System Option 400 and will rename the file using Item Code as a file name with extension as defined in System Option 204 Massive transfer of picture files If you have a folder with a lot of item image files that are named by Item Code or by Additional Item Code or by Supplier Code you can transfer them together into the folder defined in System Option 400 For more details read Chapter E Utilities section 25 11 Page 122 of 432 xe CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 4 Recommendation Locate the image files in one folder shared to all the Matrix users and set respectively the system option 400 for example pcname Matrix lmages This will prevent unnecessary copies of files and maintenance for each folder separately 5 4 6 Key Management MATRIX TM lets you manage Keys Keys are stored in MATRIX cabinet and external lockers defined as bins of a Non Automatic cabinet connected to the key Key Connected when issuing an item located in an external cabinet or locker the MATRIX cabinet will actually issue the key for the locker and create separate transactions one for
120. 07 2008 15 13 40 Activate Job Succeeded Utilities SQL script running Matrix TM Agent e Process History SERErSSheEemm a mnsan ob f Local Information You can delete the selected job by clicking lt Delete Job gt button and recreating it if needed Please use this option carefully 3 Since the jobs are automatically activated while being created and they will mostly run automatically by the operating system at the scheduled time there is no need to activate them manually If you still need to run the job manually at a specific time click the lt Activate Job gt button f Q You can email the detailed results of each step by clicking on the email button This will concentrate all the results into one text and will transfer it to the screen that enables sending email as described in Chapter E Send Logs by Email section 25 8 Use this option when you are asked to send the results to support Page 401 of 432 t CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Important It is strongly recommended to delete the unnecessary jobs it might send emails with orders and reports if the jobs are set to create them 25 4 Reset SQL User Password Use this option in order to Change the Server Password or create a Server User and Password This user is used to access the server for installation IE Database Administration Connection Reset SQL User Password Server Name local Data Base li
121. 09 2006 2 Fill in the required fields to filter the search or leave all fields blank to search all records Click the la lt Search gt button on the Menu bar 3 Mark the bin record you wish to update and click the lt Update gt button on the Menu bar or double click the record The Update Stock Count screen will appear as follow Page 182 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eae ioix ltem Code 5502149 tem Description P Bin Code Demo1 01 04 01 In Stock 60 00 30 Counting User admin creator Counted Quantity 4 Select Counting User from the list In the Counted Quantity field fill in the quantity that was counted Note The counted quantity cannot exceed the defined capacity for the counted bin unless the bin was assigned with the Allow Over Capacity check box 5 Click the lt Save gt button on the Menu bar The new stock quantity will be updated and the Last Count Date in the search screen will also be updated for the specific bin counted A Stock Count transaction will be recorded in the transactions list In the Bin Maintenance screen in the General Tab the Last Count Date will be updated for each record even where the actual quantity of items counted has not changed Last Count Date Page 183 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 8 7 STOCK TRANSFER This screen enables you to transfer items from bin to
122. 1009 The scheduled reports are not received by Email Problem The scheduled reports are not received by Email Possible reason The system options from Email group for sending emails are not set properly or there is no email defined for the user that is supposed to receive the email Solution Check the system options 701 703 705 707 Check that the user who is defined in the User Name field on the Report Scheduler has an email address defined in his User Maintenance screen Page 423 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Z MATIX w 27 2 Troubleshoot Load of the Software This section describes problems that might occur in loading MATRIX TM Software GE2001 Error message when trying to load Manage Problem When trying to load Manage get the Settings program with the error message Problem with Connection on the top as on the attached screenshot aax Server P User ID Password Database Name Language Log File Problem with Connection Application TouchForm Jpcname iTm2005 ITMDemover40 si English X No Touch Mode Machine OO K Coed Aw Possible reason The connection to the database was lost or the connection details are not correct Solution Follow the instructions in Chapter E SQL Server Service Manager section 25 3 2 to reestablish connection to the database Check the setting as described in Chapter A Conne
123. 14 Common Problems 14 1 Machine problems Problems caused by hardware or system failures of the MATRIX cabinet In the case of a problem e Consult the Hardware Manual Troubleshooting if a hardware problem and e Contact your support hotline and e Send the error log by printing it or sending it by e mail How to send the log 1 Inthe Manage system go to Menu Administration gt Touch Machine gt Cabinet Log 2 In the parameter search choose the date of the problem in the Date field Click the IQ lt Search gt button 3 Click the lt Print gt button on the Menu bar An excel file will be opened You can send it by mail or print it Page 293 of 432 CITMS 14 2 Error Message Descriptions MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 fe Py ae LLP MATRI Ww aL Error Error Message Error description amp solution message number 90001 Wrong Row Id The system manager must correct Z value in the Bin Units of the cabinet 90002 Wrong Solenoid Id The system manager must correct X value in the Bin Units of the cabinet 90004 Wrong Cabinet Id Trying to open a cabinet that does not exist in the system Call system manager technician 90005 Command Is Already In queue Close the drawers Device Is Busy 90006 Unable to open compartment Requested bin lid does not open Call support 90007 No connection to Cabinet Drawer No connection with requested cabinet
124. 2 3 Edit the data according to the expected data format 4 Use one of the separators or TAB to separate between the columns Page 353 of 432 aay Sores CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eR 22 1 Tables for Import CR SD This section describes the tables that can be used for importing data into the database detailing the fields for each table and the accepted input format Follow this section for creating appropriate input data and use the tips described in Chapter D Tips for Preparing Input Data section 22 2 Note When using Excel you can add more that one sheet to the file but import the data from each sheet separately Important Some of the tables can be imported independently and import of some tables will be based on the prior import of other tables The order of tables for import indicated here is the recommended order for import into your database 22 1 1 Import Users This section describes Import of Users by table USER_PROFILES This table can be imported independently however it is recommended to manually add the User Groups as described in Chapter D Group of Users section 18 1 in order to enable the import of User Group definition as well see in table GROUP_NAME field USER_NAME User Name Free text up to 10 characters Required Unique USER_PASSWORD defined as Password Free text up to 50 characters PASSWORD Required USER
125. 2 Cabinet As previously mentioned the main component in the system is the MATRIX cabinet which is divided into drawers which are themselves divided into bins of different sizes In case there are no bins in the drawer the entire drawer functions as 1 bin The Cabinet Maintenance screen can be used to enter new cabinets to the system or update existing ones It contains the cabinet s code name and key fields as well as an indexed tab which consists of two tabs General and Cabinet Units Page 72 of 432 Ser CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 5 x RE Cabinet Maintenance Key el Code Demo Name MatrixDem i General Cabinet Units Cabinet Type a SSSSCSCS S me Site Demoste H Stock Management Level Miom Management Level zJ Show Ctrl Error Ner o Cabinet sequence ooo IT Choose Bin on FIFO Rule COM Port ooo M Issue Any Quantity M Show Drawer M Open all bins I Is Internal Order Alert E Mail ftoolsadministrator company com Remarks Pn Update Create User admin creator Update User admin creator Create Date S702006 Update Date 05706 2007 5 2 1 Adding a Cabinet 1 Select Menu Main gt Cabinet in the system s main menu Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar Enter the mandatory and regular fields according to the following description Click the lt Save gt button on the Menu bar Enter the rest of the information regarding the cabinet and save a
126. 2 Eee Import Items and their Suppliers This section describes Import of Items by table ENT_ITEM_MASTER and Import of Items suppliers by table ENT_ITEM_SUPPLIERS These tables cannot be imported independently See the note Note In order to import items and their suppliers definitions the following tables must be first imported or added manually Unit of Measure Item Groups can be imported as described before Item Category Suppliers can be imported as described before Import Items by table ENT_ITEM_MASTER According to this table Items should be added with no supplier definitions to the view Menu Main gt Item gt Search Item ITEM_CODE defined as Item Code Required Unique Item Code Free text up to 30 characters ITEM_DESCRIPTION defined as Description Required Item Description Free text up to 50 characters Item Type One of the following values TYPE_KEY defined as ania te TYPE_CODE Required D Durable K Kit GROUP_KEY defnedas 6m Group oe GROUP_CODE Required Screen PACKET_SIZE Required Pack Size Numerical UM_KEY defined as UNIT_OF_MEASURE_CODE Unit of Measure Unit Measure Code as appears in the Unit of Required Measure Maintenance screen DEFAULT_ISSUE_QTY Default Issue Quantity Numerical Required CRC_KEY defined as CATEGORY_CODE Required Category Category Code as appears in the Item Category Maintenance screen SUPPLIER_KEY defin
127. 26 5 How to Upgrade the Database to the currently installed software 417 26 6 How to Add a cabinet other than MATRIX 0 ccccceceeceeceeeceeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeseesnaeees 418 26 7 How to Add Images for Items and Item Group ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 419 26 8 How to Set Authorizations for TOUCH USers cececcececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseesnaeees 420 27 TROUBLESHOOTING cccceccececseeceeecseeceeeceneeeeeceneeeeesseaeeeesceeeaeesseeeaeessensaeessensaeesseeaeeesseesaees 421 27 1 Troubleshoot Jobs of Automatic Processes ccccceeeseeeeceeceeeeeeeeteseenuneeeeeees 421 27 2 Troubleshoot Load of the Software cccccceceeceeceeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeesessesaeeeeeeees 424 27 3 Troubleshoot Access to the Cabinet Hardware c ceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeees 426 27 4 Troubleshoot Import Of Data cece ce cecceccece cece eeeecae cece eeeeeeeecaaeaeeeeeeesessesineeeeeees 429 27 5 Troubleshoot Access to Data in TOUCH cccccscccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteesessaneeeeeees 430 27 6 Troubleshoot General ISSUCS ececeeceeceeeeeeeeececeaeeeeeeeeeseeeenaeaeeeeeeeseseenieaeeeeees 431 Page 6 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ic Page 7 of 432 SEs CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 a CHAPTER A GETTING STARTED 1 INTRODUCTION In this chapter you will find a short description of the MATRIX Hardware and Software com
128. 399 of 432 S2 2S CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Sd Ox gt gt v 25 3 3 Viewing and Activating Job MATRIX TM shows the jobs in the following screen Be sure that you understand exactly what the functions of a job are prior to running it 1 Select the Activate Jobs option from the Menu The combo box above the grid will display all the existing jobs If you do not find the expected job you can create the job by following the instructions above about the job types and then clicking the lt Refresh Jobs gt button to refresh the list Database Administration 4 2 loj xj Connection Activate Jobs Server Name Database iTMDemod2 Job Status Idle User Name iTm2005 iTMDemoReportsEngine gt ITMDemoEndOfMonthProcess ITMDemoReportsEngine SeminarsMOP42AutoPOSenice Database Tools SeminarsMOP42EndOfMonthProcess Backup SeminarsMOP42ReportsEngine Restore 25 07 2008 09 00 Succeeded Restore ltern Bin 25 07 2008 10 00 Succeeded Activate Jobs 26 07 2008 10 00 Succeeded 00 00 12 Reset SQL User Password o6in7enne 14 0N Surreedad nnn History Data Options Manage Tools Executed as user LORAR SYSTEM The End 25 07 2008 Stock Balance 08 00 120K 25 07 2008 08 00 12 Process Exit Code 0 The Restore Defaults step succeeded Reset Matrix Admin Password ha Logs Next run date 27 07 2008 10 00 00 W Enabled Send by E mail e St Delete Logs Replications
129. 421 rache 5 3 1 7 Tab Orders This tab displays all the orders created for the particular Bin By selecting order line and clicking lt Update gt the Order Maintenance for the selected order line will be displayed Page 95 of 432 oe ton CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 emate Bin Maintenance Bin Key Bin Code Cabinet Code Item Code ltem Description fi3 Demo1 01 01 13 Demat i 5505421 es Demo IDI 0295 SG 1C908 General Stock Management Additional Fields Usage Transactions Orders Bin Units 283 Partial 283 5 3 1 8 Tab Bin Units This tab displays the Current bin location and all its Bins units on the grid of the whole drawer Changes here should be done with extreme care because it will change the bin coordinate definitions and might prevent the bin from opening Page 96 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 g gt Bin Maintenance Sinix Bin Key Bin Code Cabinet Code ltem Code ltem Description 251 Demo1 06 02 02 i Demat i 2201669 Gy DemoDR MF 10L 2 25D 124 05 5 3 2 Deleting a Bin gt To delete a bin select the required bin s record from the bin list and click the lt Delete gt button on the Menu bar Note A bin that has been associated with an item cannot be deleted until the item definition and its stock is removed In this case first adjust t
130. 8 1 1 If only one bin can contain this item this field will be disabled Quantity The original quantity in the order line Received The total quantity received so far for this order line On Route This field is relevant only for Internal Orders It informs how many pieces were issued for transfer and still were not received into the destination cabinet Page 165 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 New Received Insert here the quantity you now want to receive The maximum quantity in the Internal Order line can be up to On Route quantity Reference fields The reference fields are displayed for supporting interface with ERP systems The number of reference fields 0 4 depends on the System Option 111 3 In the Cabinet and Bin fields select the cabinet and bin into which the item will be received If the bin is not assigned with Allow Over Capacity make sure that the current stock Item in Bin field and new stock New Received field together will not exceed the bin s Capacity 4 Enter the received quantity in the New Received field and click the lt Receive Order gt button If the quantity received is less than the quantity ordered a question will appear asking whether to close the order line or not If you want later to receive the remaining quantity click lt No gt Otherwise click lt Yes gt Note It is possible to receive more than the ordered quantity See system optio
131. 80 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ematea 1 Press on the lt Transfer Order gt icon from the Main screen The following screen will be displayed Transfer Order E admin creator TMDemoverso 12207 IES Please enter Item Order lam ice Gomes Internal Su 1ID2300158 Internal Su 1D2300161 Internal Su 6 10 3 3101694 Demo HMS 8 00 This screen displays all the Internal Order lines with the status Open and On Route 2 Search and select the order line for transfer If there is more that one order line in the list the following message will displayed Message Number 1517 A es Do you want to issue all the lines of this order YES Allthe lines NO Only selected line Page 281 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 3 Press on lt Yes gt button to transfer all the order lines or press on lt No gt button to transfer only the selected order line By pressing on lt Yes gt the next screen will display the items from all the lines of the selected order as in the following screen and will allow transferring them together Transfer Order amn creator moemoe ew IS 3101694 Demo HM90 E904 D32 4 VWV 32 C Demo HM90 E90A D32 4 Y32 C Please choose bins and quantity 3101694 Demo HM90 E90A Demo1 9 Demo1 0 17 00 ID2300158 ID2300161 OOOLOOOO gt By pressing on lt No gt the next scree
132. 90 E90A 3201144 Demo CHAMRING 3201154 Demo CHAMRING 3201669 DemoDR MF 10L 2 3201670 DemoDR MF 10R 000a aoa 3201671 DemoDR MF 12L 2 ae 7 Set condition operator Select one of the two options for Condition Operator And Means that only the records that will match all the defined conditions will appear in the report Or Means that all the records that will match at least one of the defined conditions will appear in the report On the Choose Fields tab 8 Select fields Select the fields that you want to include in the report and cancel the check sign for fields to be excluded Page 200 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gq O Note If you want to display a report of Chart design using Report Document the fields selection is not relevant Use arrows a and to change the order in which the fields will be displayed Transactions Report Description Filter And Grouping Choose Fields Month Quarter Item Code Item Description Cabinet Code Bin Code User Name Transaction Type Currency Name Department Work Center Machine Job Number X RA K K A K A KI K K KI K I M Select All 9 Run report There are 2 options for running reports MS Excel file Microsoft Excel file displaying report as a list of records Activated by clicking the lt Search
133. AND INTERNAL 0c scceeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeesecaeeeeeesaeeeeessneseneaaes 131 7 1 Create Manual Orders ccccccceceeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeceeeeeeeseeaeaeceeeeeseteseinaeeeeeeeesteee 134 7 1 1 Tab General ccieciscccaceiyescsecieaceaccdaescecereadeatednasdanastseadacesaactaestaeteadeagaceassisanendeeuresence 136 7 1 2 Tab Details agon aerus anana iaaiiai aaa aa Aaa aaraa 139 7 1 3 Tab Additional Fields i ciccccccaecivcacdercrictvce a aE EAEE EEE 146 7 1 4 Tab LINKS euna E NE EAE EA aE 148 7 1 5 Tab Addres Senan a a EEE ENE AE 149 7 2 Create Automatic Orders siisii ai A EE a AE ANE E EEA 151 7 2 1 Manual User Definitions 0 ccececccceececeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeteeeaeaeeeeeeeeeseeensaneeeeeees 151 7 2 2 Schedule the Automatic OrderS ccccceceeeeeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeesesensaaeeeeeess 157 7 3 Sending an Order to Supplier ccccceeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeceaaeaeceeeeeeeseseiaeeeeeeeteeeees 159 7 4 Order Invoice ENUy ccccernerconipena ia E EE edd eee 160 STOCK TRANSACTIONS aie a E aha E G 163 8 1 RECEIVE HEMS uusinnat ENA EEA E A 163 8 1 1 Receive RUNES ksnara a iNET E AEAN 163 8 1 2 Receive with MATRIX TM Order ccceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseccncaeeeeeeeeeeseseenaneeeeeeens 164 8 1 3 Receive without Order ccccccccceseeeeceeceeeeeeeseeacaeceeceeeeeseseeaeeeeeeeeeseteenineeeeeeess 167 8 2 TRANSFER Internal Order eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeeeee
134. ATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Request Date The requested delivery date for the order Promised Date The date delivery promised by the supplier Receive Date The last date any quantity was received Status The order line status Draft indicates that the order was automatically initiated by the system and needs to be approved Opened a manually initiated order line which is yet to be sent to the supplier This is the default status for new order lines Sent to supplier the item from the line was sent to supplier Partial Receive part of the ordered quantity had already been received Closed the line s status is automatically changed to this option once the entire quantity is received It can also be updated manually when no additional items are expected Cancel a line can be set as cancelled if none of its items were received yet On Route relevant only for Internal Orders Items that were already transfered by Transfer Order option but have not yet been received into the ordering cabinet Page 143 of 432 CTMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eaa The following chart shows the line statuses including the valid transitions between statuses The order line statuses Draft Opened s T Automatic Send Order Process Sent to supplier AUTOMATIC On Receive Partially received Automatic when all QTY Received Page 144 of 432 CITIM
135. ATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 All you need to define to create an Item Authorization Group is the Group Name HE Item Auth Group Maintenance RTE ltem Authorizations Group Name No Value 16 4 2 Linking items to an Item Authorization Group In order to connect an item go to the item maintenance option You will find the Item Authorization Group field You have a combo box that lets you link the group to this item HE Item Maintenance 10l xj Item Key Item Code Item Description ltem Type p 3101686 j Demo HM90 E904 D20 3 W20 C Durable x IBS General Supplier Information Custom Fields Stock Management Location Remarks and links Additional item code ts ltem Long Description Demo HM90 E90A D20 3 W20 C Item Group Miling aS P ltem Authorizations Group d Unit of Measure High Value Low Value Category Barcode Medium Value Pack Size i K cts __ Mann arity Most High Valia Default Issue Quantity T00 Sub Family ltem Price 105 00 item Management Level Primary Supplier fouttee H I Consignment Update Create User admin creator Update User fadmin creator Create Date rozz Update Date 04706 2005 Bamarke 9 An item which is not assigned to a group may be accessed by all users Page 304 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 zia x 16 4 3 Link User Groups with the Item Authorization Group Once the It
136. Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions Links Orders Cost Centers CTMS_Help chm C Program Files MATRIX TM 4 2 helpFiles en AM Links Document Name CTMS_Help chm Path CAProgram Files MATRIX TM 4 2 helpFiles en US Description ee Adding Updating Links Each record is built of a file name and its full path and description 1 Click the lt Add gt or lt Update gt button to update an existing record first mark it in the grid 2 Enter the required values in the Links window below manually or click the lt Insert Update file gt button to select the file from the system 3 Save the record by clicking the lt Save gt button Document Name CTMS_Help chm Path C Program Files MATRIX TM 4 0 helpFilesten US Description o G e oann Page 114 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 amp TEDO 5 4 1 9 Tab Orders This tab displays all the order lines that were created for this item In order to see the order that contains a specific order line select the order line record and click the lt Update gt button ol z fey Item Maintenance ltem Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type 22 5505421 i Demo IDI 0295 5G e908 Expendable i IBS General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions Links Orders Cost Centers 20 00 0 00 24 07 2008 Iscar Open 50 00 sc
137. Average Frequency I Field Descriptions 9 Note All of the display values for the following fields depend on the selected Stock Management Level Item level or Item Cabinet level Page 109 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 In Stock The current quantity in stock Ordered The Quantity in Open orders for the selected stock management level quantity in the cabinet or the entire stock Rework Orders The Quantity in Rework orders for the selected management level quantity in the cabinet or the entire stock Draft The Quantity in Pending orders orders which haven t been approved yet for the selected management level Issued Quantity The issued quantity for the selected stock management level If the item type is Durable it supplies information about the number of items issued that should be returned to stock Internal Order The quantity of items in an Internal Order Average Usage The average issue transaction quantity per month for the selected stock management level Minimum Quantity Indicates the item s minimum quantity For the selected management level If the quantity in stock is less than this quantity a new order will be initiated to renew the stock to its maximal level Maximum Quantity Indicates the item s maximum quantity For the selected management level If the quantity in stock is less than the minimum quantity a new order will be initiated to replenish the stock to its maximal le
138. Bins tab 8 Open the Bin Maintenance screen of the bin which you have just connected to the key and see on the bottom part of the General tab that this bin has now the definition of key that will open this bin in the locker Also instead of following steps 5 7 you can open directly this screen and define the key to which this bin will be connected Connection to Key ltem Code ko3101694 F Manage does not support working with keys when making transactions Transactions with keys are supported only in the Touch module For issuing the item from locker using key please follow Chapter C Issue an Item from Locker section 13 1 2 For using key management in other modules in Touch please follow Chapter C Working with Key to Lockers section 13 9 5 5 Additional Fields Additional Fields are fields that are specifically defined by the user for each of the following entities ITEM BIN Purchase Order and Purchase Order LINE This means that you can add new customized fields for the entities of the system such as color of item etc You will be able to maintain and view those fields later To operate this screen select Menu Administrator gt Additional Fields The following screen will then be displayed Page 125 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATa HE Additional Fields O x Numeric a Aci 2 5 PO LINE Sequence Field Name Comer number 5 Data Type
139. Cabinet report This report displays in generic view all the items by each cabinet in the system and their stock value The stock value is expressed in Total Value Total Value Average Cost of the item Quantity in the current cabinet For the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Valuation Report gt Valuation by Cabinet Report 9 7 Orders Report The orders report allows the user to follow up on all the orders created in the system 9 7 1 Basic Orders Report This report displays all the created order lines for items created by Automatic and Manual orders It details the order which contains the order line the item supplier the item details the status of the order line Cancel Close Draft Open Partial Sent to supplier the order line level Item Item Cabinet Bin the quantities received and remained from the order line the price the dates etc For the report open Menu Reports gt Orders Report gt Basic Orders Report 9 7 2 Advanced Orders Report This screen enables the user to create a customized report for orders based on the records of the basic orders report It also enables the user to save the definitions and run the report at a scheduled time The report displays the order lines by Quantity The quantity of items in the order line Value The total monetary value of the order line taken from Total Price of the order line Unit Price Quantity of the order line Page 216 of 432
140. D Display the virtual keyboard EJ P Hide amp Hide the virtual keyboard Quantity buttons Q Change quantities in selected bin OK C Confirm last operation Cancel cancel Cancel last operation Page 234 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 e mvate Exit e Exit the system Help Run Help file Exit Exit the system in emergency cases 12 3 2 Virtual Keyboard By using the virtual keyboard you can key in data to the screens Operating buttons Numbers Key in the number that appears on the button Letters Key in the letter in the chosen language Tab Moves the cursor to the next data field on the screen Enter Pressing this button initiates a search based on the data keyed in Bksp D Deletes last letter keyed in Shift Pressing this button will activate the upper case content of each button or will switch the keyboard language The virtual keyboard will look as below after pressing on the Shift button Page 235 of 432 Displaying the virtual keyboard Displaying the virtual keyboard in relevant screens is done by pressing on the lt Show gt button Hide the keyboard by pressing on the lt Hide gt button Pressing one of the buttons will make it light up in yellow 12 3 3 Barcode Interface The purpose of this interface is to save time by reading data with barcode The reader will transfer the data to the field where the cur
141. Drawer gt button This will add drawers with bins and bin units to the system Those bins will be available for editing Save the data by clicking the ta lt Save gt button on the Menu bar If you wish to define virtual bins for open drawers bins and bin units will have to be added manually For more details refer to Chapter B Base Entities gt Cabinet section 5 2 and Base Entities gt Bin section 5 3 Bins Bins are added automatically when adding Cabinet and Drawers Bins can also be edited or added manually as described in the next steps 1 Select Menu Main gt Bin 2 To edit an existing bin Click the IQ lt Search gt button on the Menu bar to locate the bin and click the 1 lt Update gt button to open the bin maintenance screen 3 To add a new bin manually a Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar Page 40 of 432 9 ED eee CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 2 b Fill in the Bin Code and Cabinet Code of the cabinet where the bin located and save the data by clicking the E lt Save gt button on the Menu bar The Bin Maintenance screen will display the bin fields to enable the editing Note Chapter B Bin Location section 5 3 3 describes the principles used by the software to name bins in the Bin Code field which are automatically created You can use the same principle for bins defined manually 4 Each bin should be linked to an item stored in it A
142. E Mail Shipping Method DHL Send To ERP M Remarks me SS Create Date rozz Date Last Updated 2170772005 Fields Description The following details should be entered for each supplier Page 70 of 432 D CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Supplier Code Unique supplier code Additional Supplier Code Additional supplier code Supplier Name Unique supplier name Address Supplier address Schedule Type Schedule Day Schedule Time Date Last Updated Order Mode Fax No Phone No E Mail Home Page Contact Person Currency Shipping Method Order Method Send to ERP Remarks The scheduler for creating automatic orders per supplier Specified Personal schedule Default Schedule General schedule that is defined in the System options 807 amp 808 Do not run The system will not create orders for this supplier Day for running automatic orders Time for running automatic orders Updated by the system with the date when the last check for automatic orders was done The orders will not run at the same day defined here therefore keep this field initially empty or with a past date Mode per supplier for creating automatic orders No run Draft Open Send to supplier Supplier contact details Single supplier email or multiple emails separated by sign which are used for receiving automatic and non automatic purchase orders from
143. EATED USER_LAST_MODIFIED DATE_LAST_MODIFIED Example for Excel format The table below lists item data with corresponding suppliers data yellow fields are for Items table green fields for Item Suppliers table Some of the items in the example have more than one supplier definition meaning more than one supplier supplies this item In this case add another row for the same Item Code and fill in only the data for the supplier 2300167 1D2300167 02300167 E 0 1 1 R 10 2300167 2300168 1D2300168 02300168 E 1 10 10 20 2300168 2300168 2300169 1D2300169 02300169 D 2 5 5 G 30 2300170 1D2300170 02300170 D 3 5 5 K 40 2300171 1D2300174 02300171 R 4 10 10 A 50 2300172 1D2300172 02300172 R 5 5 5 60 2300173 1D2300173 02300173 K 6 1 1 70 COntinuation of the table 5 1 1 1 01 8 10 10 5 02 6 20 10 5 10 1 1 2 02 18 10 5 5 03 16 20 5 5 04 14 30 5 5 15 1 1 3 03 28 10 20 10 Page 361 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 20 1 1 4 04 38 20 10 25 1 1 5 05 48 20 10 30 1 0 1 01 58 10 20 10 35 1 0 1 01 68 10 20 10 Import Items and their Suppliers In order to import items together with their suppliers both tables ENT_ITEM_MASTER and ENT_ITEM_SUPPLIERS should be added to one import project and imported at once Otherwise you can import the items first and their
144. ENT Required Unique screen USER_CREATED These fields are not editable and not visible in the DATE_CREATED interface and not recommended for import USER_LAST_MODIFIED DATE_LAST_MODIFIED Example for Excel format This example is for import of cost centers for two headers that were manually created as seen on the attached screen ioixi Cost Center Name Cost Center Label Is Required E z Manual Input Type Found 3 Records pc sa NN ON Machine Machine No Work Center Choose from List 2 Job Number Job Number Numeric Keyboard The header called Work Center is independent and the header called Machine hierarchies cost centers from Work Center header 1 Create manually Cost Center Headers 2 Create data table for the cost centers of Work Center header as in the following table Table 1 Data for table TVL_COST_CENTER_DETAILS COST_CENTER_HEADER COST_CENTER_CODE COST_CENTER_VALUE Work Center WCO01 Tooling Work Center WC02 Milling Work Center WC03 Drilling Work Center WC04 Threading Page 364 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 see gt 3 Create import project for importing the cost centers of Work Center header and import the data as in the following screens Import project header oS Import Data Import Tables Properties Import Project Key B Project Name impor
145. EY defined as Item Code Required Unique Item Code Free text SUPPLIER_KEY defined as SUPPLIER_CODE Required Unique Supplier Code on the Supplier Information tab of the Item Supplier Code as appears in the Supplier Maintenance screen SUPPLIER_PRICE Required Supplier Price Numerical PACKAGE _ SIZE Required Pack Size Numerical UM_KEY defined as UNIT_OF_MEASURE_CODE Required Unit of Measure Unit Measure Code as appears in the Unit of Measure Maintenance screen SUPP_ITEM CODE Supplier Item Code Free text up to 30 characters SUPP_ITEM_DESCRIPTION Supplier Item Description Free text up to 100 characters EXPIRATION_DATE Expire Date Date amp Time MIN ORDER _QTY Minimum Order Quantity Numerical SUPPLIER_DISCOUNT Discount Numerical REMARKS Remarks Free text IS_COST_BREAK Cost Breaks on the Supplier Information tab 0 No or 1 Yes Page 360 of 432 CITMS L Sete MATRIX MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 of the Item LEAD_AV_OVERRIDE Lead Time Override on Numerical the sub tab Usage Information LEAD_AV_AD Lead Average Effective Date amp Time Date IS_AUTO_PURCHASE These fields are not editable or not visible in the interface MIN_LEAD_ TIME and not recommended for import MAX LEAD TIME LEAD AV USER_CREATED DATE_CR
146. Foo Line No B Reference 1 iS Reference 3 SS a Reference 2 E Reference 4 ae Transaction Value haoo ooo System Curr NIS Trans value in System currency hooo 8OC S System Curr NIS l Consignment For issue transactions it is possible to perform two types of updates in this tab 1 To update the value of the transaction in the chosen currency Line value customer currency 0 000 i After modifying the entry click the lt Save gt button This will update both the chosen currency and the default currency and 2 To sign ensign the Consignment check box To confirm this change click the lt Save gt button 8 8 3 Tab Cost Center Page 192 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ae p Note The Cost Centers tab is available only for Issue transactions For ISSUE transaction The tab enables to edit cost centers fields PEE 3 i seveveneneees Department Drilling WC Drilling1 Drilling Machine 12 In this tab you can View Update the cost centers which have been allocated to the selected transaction Every Issue transaction can be debited to a number of cost centers defined in the system according to the hierarchy see Chapter B ISSUE Item section 8 5 In order to modify the cost centers click the lt Update gt button Cost Center x Cost Center Department M Machine Drilling Machine 12 x Work Center we Drilling Job Number C
147. Group combo box choose the group of options that you wish to find The list will be narrowed to your selection Page 314 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 17 2 Update System Option In order to fill in or update the value for the parameter 1 Select the system option you wish to update from the search list and click the a lt Update gt button on the Menu bar A screen like the following will appear fi System Option Maintenance q loj x Option Key 900 Option Name Average usage calculation type Amn el Lal Average Usage can be an arithmetic average FLAT or a Moving Weighted Average MWA Option Value MWA 2 Enter to the Option Value field the requested value Click the lt Save gt button on the Menu bar Page 315 of 432 CITMS 17 3 Table of System Options MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 P OSA MATRIX The following table lists all the system options and their descriptions as they appear in the Manage application 0 Database Version Database Version DoNotChange 1 Installation Path MATRIX TM Installation Path DoNotChange The percentage that determines the Additional quantity of items above the Ordered Quantity that a user can 105 Over Receive Percentage receive in Receive process Issue in FIFO First In First Out order so that the oldest 106 FIFO Bin Selection received bin will be issued first If the budget is activated
148. IS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gee Sub Tab Remark This tab enables entering remarks related to the lines To edit an existing remark select the required line and click the lt Update gt button update the remark and save Line Details Remark Additional Fields Remark This is an order line in the demo order Update Create User admin creator Update User admin creator Create Date 0870272006 Update Date 97g 2006 Sub Tab Additional Fields This tab displays the additional fields defined for the purchase order line and enables updating their values for the order Line Details Remark Additional Fields Field value o Invoice Number Remark O Sub Tab Invoices This tab displays all the invoices for the current order line and enables adding updating and deleting their values Page 145 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ST Line Details Remark Additional Fields Invoices 1 INVY10001 3 24 07 2 INY 10002 7 24 06 2007 3 INY 10003 10 24 06 2007 ape Deleting items from the order In order to delete an item line from the order 1 Select the line in the grid and click the lt Update gt button that is on the right side of the grid or double click the line 2 On the tab Line Details that is bellow the grid change the status of the line to status Cancel 3 While the line is selected in grid click the lt Delete gt button that is o
149. ITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ete a x Transaction quantity 10 00 Quantity to Add Remove ooo Corrected Transaction quantity E Capacity 100 Allow Over Capacity E Current Stock quantity 15 00 Corrected Stock quantity fs 2 Fill in the Quantity to Add Remove field For example if you need to cancel issue of 2 pieces from 10 issued pieces insert 2 The Corrected Transaction quantity and Corrected Stock quantity fields will be automatically updated 3 To confirm the change click the lt Save gt button x4 To cancel click the lt Exit gt button 4 After the update quantity operation the stock in the bin is changed so the physical stock of the bin must be also taken out In order to take out the items or put them back physically into the cabinet use the Adjust Item option or Count Bins option on the cabinet TOUCH module open the bins and take the items out without adjusting quantities Remember The original transaction is not changed a new transaction is created that will reflect the difference in quantity resulting from the change Page 190 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 8 8 2 Tab Costs This tab displays the following data for the transaction PO number Line No Reference fields Transaction value Trans value in System currency Consignment If it is a Receive transaction this field will display the Order
150. IX TM User Guide Version 4 2 File Type Choose the file type XIs Xml Rtf or Report Email Address If E Mail was chosen as a Print Destination then the email address must be entered By default the email of the order supplier will be copied to here Mark Order as Sent Check this option to mark the order as Sent It will also change all order lines to Sent to supplier status Show Closed Orders Check this option to include the closed order lines in the order output file 5 Click the lt Show Order gt button to view the order in the chosen format before sending 6 Click the lt Send Order gt button to execute the order definitions 7 4 Order Invoice Entry MATRIX TM lets you control the approval of supplier invoices by assigning supplier invoices to received order lines MATRIX TM verifies that a received quantity can only be invoiced by the supplier once After a supplier invoice is entered you can print an invoice approval slip for processing actual payment to the supplier Important This function tracks and compares supplier invoices and received orders by quantity only It is not a full supplier invoice approval program In order to handle the payment of the supplier invoices an ERP or accounting system should be used 1 Goto Menu Order gt Order gt Invoices 2 Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar The Invoice Maintenance screen will be displayed Page 160 of 432
151. IX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Import project adjusting columns between Excel and Project details Import Data x Import Tables Properties Table Name TVL_COST_CENTER_LINKS gt Unique remenes Fie yano COST_CENTER_DTL_KEY fv COST_CENTER_CODE_CHILD 1 COST CENTER Famen COST CENTER CODE PARENT DT o E Column Properties Field Name COST_CENTER_DTL_KEY In File Vv Required Yes edt COST_CENTER_CODE_CH Is Unique A Sequence C Default Value fc tts iSCY Links between a cost center and its parent cost center imported by the project H Cost Center Details Maintenance Cost Center Name Manne i Cost Center Code MOA Cost Center Description INTEGREX 300 Cost Center Detail Parent Cost Center Detail Parent Tooling Milling Drilling aie SoSo o o a o Threading Page 369 of 432 RR CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Bo At this point the import of cost center is completed by importing cost centers to two headers and linking them If you need to import cost center to more headers make it in similar way Page 370 of 432 CITMS 22 1 6 Import Bins MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 BOSD MATRIX This section describes Import of Data for Bins by table ENT_BIN_MASTER The purpose of this module is to import easily the Items definitions and Bins properties for a group of bins at once Please notice that this module wi
152. If more than one match is found a filtered list will appear that includes only the relevant records Note Sometimes the Barcode reader adds additional characters to the number for example barcode number 3101749 reads as 03101749 In this case set value for the Barcode field of the item in the MANAGE module exactly as the barcode reader reads it For more information read Chapter B Item section 5 4 Search Order In any search screen where the system expects to get an item or order information the user can read the barcode of the order that matches the PO Code value after which a screen with a filtered list will appear that includes only the relevant order line s For example Receive and Transfer processes Search Bin in the Count Bins process In the search screen of the Count Bins process where the system expects to get a bin or item information the user can read the barcode of the bin that matches fully or partially to the Bin Code value after which a screen will appear with a filtered list that includes only the relevant records Page 237 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 x a gt 12 3 4 Search Screens Through this screen you will be able to search various data that exists in the system Important The quantity displayed in In Stock column includes all the quantities excluding the stock of Reworkable items in bins marked as Used since those items are not availab
153. L Password SQL Login Timeout SQL Query Timeout Run Before Run After Repeat Every On Minute Local replicated database whose replication options are edited Create a new database name not ITMDemo Master MSDB Model and tempdb Mark this to create a new replicated database If a database with the same name already exists it will be replaced Publisher Distributor remote server The published database on the Publisher Distributor to replicate Login name for the published database Login password for the published database The number of seconds before the login times out the default is 15 seconds Do not change this unless you are getting repeated errors replicating The number of seconds before the query times out the default is 30 seconds Do not change this unless you are getting repeated errors replicating Select a program to run before the replication sync starts This is an optional value Select a program to run after the replication sync is completed This is an optional value How frequent the sync occurs On demand every 1 2 hour every 1 hour every 6 hours The minute in each hour that the sync begins Default is random number between 0 and 59 to distribute the load of the publisher but you can also set your own value Note Once replication is saved it is impossible to change the Replication Name Server Name and published Database To do so you will need to create a new su
154. M User Guide Version 4 2 ggtaymise 12 3 6 Item Information This feature enables to display in TOUCH application additional information regarding the item from the MANAGE application In any module in Touch where item image is displayed on top of the window user can press on the image and the system will display Item Information screen Example 1 Open any module select any item and press lt Next gt to get the screen with the item image Issue Item Touch zamn creon moemoe ame 9 el a OMG 4509194 Demo DIN69871 40 ER32 SHORT Demo DIN69871 40 ER32 SHORT Please choose bins and quantity Demo1 09 01 07 Demo1 Page 246 of 432 4 xe CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 2 Press on the image area The Item Information screen will be displayed The buttons on top represent tabs which display the data from these tabs in Manage module General button for general data Supplier button for list of suppliers Additional Fields button for additional fields of the item Location button for all the bins that store the item Cost Centers button in Transactions module only for the cost centers for which the item was issued This data is displayed only for view Item Long Description Demo DIN69871 40 ER32 SHORT Item Type Durable Item Auth Group Unit of Measure Pieces Category Regular Main Family Sub Family Primary Supplier Iscar Item Price 1 00 Ave
155. MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Eee 2 Set report name If you would like to save the report and use it later also enter a name for the report in the Description field Otherwise for one time run it is not mandatory On the Filter and Grouping tab 3 Set report type Select one of the three options for Report Type by the following table Includes only detailed report lines without sub total lines The Group By option is disabled Includes detailed lines and sub total lines grouped by defined field The Group By option is enabled Need to select the field s for grouping the subtotals Includes only sub total report lines without detailed report lines The Group By option is enabled Need to select the field s for grouping the subtotals Chart design report is enabled Chart design report is disabled Chart design report is enabled 4 Set grouping If you selected report type of Listing or Sub Totals Only select the field s by which to group the sub total lines in the Group By frame 5 Set report design Select one of the two options for Design Report Standard The report will be displayed as a list of records both in MS Excel file and Report Document Chart The report will be displayed as a chart according to the selected chart style The availability of chart and its style options depends on the selected Report Type If you
156. Next gt button If the System Option 111 Number of reference fields to use on Receive is set to 1 or more the References screen will appear Page 289 of 432 W References Please input the following data Reference 1 PO Reference 2 Po This screen supports working with interface to ERP systems For example In interface to SAP Reference 1 PO Number Reference 2 PO Line No Edit the reference fields and press on the lt Next gt button For more details see Chapter D Interfaces section 24 If the System Option 111 is set to 0 or none the References screen will be skipped The Receive Item screen will appear as below Page 290 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATE Receive Item aamin maver aw Sodra Demo Demo HM90 E90A D32 4 W32 C ES0A D92 4 W32 C Demo ee E90A D32 4 WW32 C Choose Bin and quantity NADemo1 01 01 04 Non Auto D 8 00 999999 00 Demo4 01 01 07 MxDemo4 0 00 10 00 Demo4 01 01 08 MxDemo4 Demo4 01 01 09 MxDemo4 Demo4 01 01 10 MxDemo4 666666 6 The table displays the bin bins allocated to this item and that have enough space to receive the item in the current TOUCH station Edit the quantities to receive in the Receive field by using the Add Reduce buttons or through the virtual keyboard and press on the lt Receive gt button Open the drawer and put the items to receive
157. Number of the drawer from top to bottom Z 5 Location of bin row from front to back X 2 Location of bin column from left to right Note Physical location is only used when defining special drawer configurations Visual location is used by the system to identify bins Page 98 of 432 Bin latches 4 Drawer 3 horizontal and vertical 2 slots and its relative 4 location Latches location numbering 123 45 67 8 9 10 1112 13 14 For example Cabinet DEMO 3 Drawer from top to bottom located on the 4 Controller from top to bottom Page 99 of 432 ta ey CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 bo MAT 5 4 Item The Items module displays the different items stored in the cabinet s bins and enables handling them adding updating copying deleting The Item Maintenance screen contains the item s general details ID code description and type and the following tabs General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Location Usage Transaction Links and Orders 5 4 1 Adding Items 1 To enter the module select Menu Main gt Items in the system s main menu or click lt Items gt button from the left shortcut menu Click the Ul lt Ada gt button on the Menu bar Enter values for the mandatory and regular fields Item Code Item Description Item Type etc in the screen s header and the fields in the General tab 4 Click the tai lt Save
158. O1 5600224 admin creator Transmitted 22 10 2007 11 16 Receive DEMO1 5600224 admin creator Transmitted 22 10 2007 11 25 Receive DEMO1 5600224 admin creator Transmitted 23 10 2007 08 55 zero SSUB DEMO1 3101749 admin creator Not Transmitted 23 10 2007 08 55 Zero SSUB my test M 3101749 admin creator Not Transmitted 23 10 2007 09 29 Zero SSUB DEMO1 3101749 admin creator Not Transmitted 23 10 2007 09 29 23 10 2007 09 38 Zero Zero admin creator Not Transmitted admin c or Not Trans admin creator Not Transmitted mo o o o o o0 0 o my test M 3101749 DEMO1 3101749 DEMO1 3101749 g 23 10 2007 09 39 zero my test M 3101749 admin creator Not Transmitted 23 10 2007 09 59 zero DEMO1 3101749 admin creator Not Transmitted 23 10 2007 09 59 zero my test M 3101749 admin creator Not Transmitted 23 10 2007 10 05 zero DEMO1 3101749 admin creator Transmitted 23 10 2007 10 05 zero my test M 3101749 admin creator Transmitted 23 10 2007 10 58 Issue DEMO1 1127 admin creator ransmitted 23 10 2007 11 01 Issue DEMO1 1127 admin creator Transmitted 23 10 2007 11 09 Receive DEMO1 DPC1002 admin creator Transmitted 23 10 2007 11 11 Receive DEMO1 DPC1002 admin creator ransmitted 23 10 2007 12 01 Issue DEMO1 1127 admin creator Transmitted 28 10 2007 06 56 Receive DEMO1 5502097 admi
159. PG Expendable TaeguTec 5502128 Demo TPG Expendable TaeguTec eenn44n Nama TNA Timnanninhin TannuTan Item Maintenance Supplier Maintenance 21 11 5911 OS BS 3 c Be 9 10 3 Item Catalog Pictures This report allows the user to build a printed catalog for each item with barcodes and pictures To run the report and build the catalog open Menu Reports gt Items gt Item Catalog Pictures System Tables Administration Help Windows Ba BA ae F Item Catalog Pictures ltem Key m ltem Code Lo Additional Item Code a Item Description sd Item Long Description ti Found 66 Records 5 Ute Demo APKT 1003PDR HM9 Demo APKT 1003PDR HM90 IC928 3101686 Demo HM90 E904 D20 3 W Demo HM90 E904 D20 3 W20 C 3101686 3101694 Demo HM90 E90A4 D32 4 W Demo HM30 E90A D32 4 W32 C 3101694 3102566 Demo HM90 E90A4 D 62 2 C Demo HM90 E90A D 62 2 C 62 LB 3102566 3101746 Demo HM90 E90A4 D 75 3 Demo HM90 E9DA D 75 3 W 75 C 3101746 5605180 Demo APKT 1003PDR HM9 Demo APKT 1003PDR HM90 IC4050 5605180 3101749 Demo HM90 E904 D1 25 3 Demo HM90 E904 D1 25 3 W 75 C 3101749 5600048 Demo APKT 1003PDR HM Demo APKT 1003PDR HM IC635 5600048 5601196 Demo APKT 1003PDTR 76 Demo APKT 1003PDTR 76 IC328 5601196
160. TER HEADER level e The items that will be available for issue are defined on the COST CENTER DETAIL level Page 334 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gq ex E e List of items available for issue can be linked only to cost centers that their header is of input type Choose from List e When there is more than one cost center header of input type Choose from List and they are item limited Item Limit YES If the second header hierarchies cost centers from its parent like in the example Work Center is related to its parent Department it is enough to link items to the cost centers of second header only link Item 1 amp Item 2 directly to cost center WC Grinding 1 Otherwise it will be required to link the items to the cost centers of both headers separately link Item 1 amp Item 2 amp Item 3 to cost center Grinding and then also link Item 1 amp Item 2 to cost center WC Grinding 1 e f under header which is defined to limit items Item Limit YES there is a cost center that has no linked items then selecting this cost center in Touch will display no items like in example cost center WC Grinding 3 19 3 1 Link Cost Centers to ITEM Described here the first and recommended option for making the required definitions This way the user will link cost centers to ITEM using Item Maintenance screen Selecting these cost centers in Touch will display the item The instructions are based on the e
161. TMDema User Name lr User Name rm2005 User New Password User Password ITM Confirm Password Data Base Tools Backup Restore Activate Jobs Reset SQL User Pas Manage Tools Stock Balance Restore Default Reset Matrix Admin Password Logs Send by E mail Delete Logs Replications Utilities SQL script running Process History Use the lt Reset Password gt button to activate the command Page 402 of 432 D T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 25 5 Stock Balance The Stock Balance option is a special error handling and it should be used only after you get advice from system support Important After running this option the changes will be irreversible Activate this option only in special cases where there was a problem detected with stock or an update for stock levels is required This procedure will reconcile all stock levels starting from the Bin summing up to Item Cabinet and then to the Item level for the database displayed in the Connection details as selected in the Settings program Use the lt Stock Balance gt button to activate the command 25 6 Restore Defaults The Restore Defaults option makes the following Restores defaults Restore defaults as following e To restore texts for all the languages supported e To restore default settings to the objects for example search screen definitions sorting and replaced columns etc
162. Y Schedule Day Value from 1 13 by the order appears in the list AUTO_PO_TIME Schedule Time Value from 1 24 by the order appears in the list DATE LAST RUN Date Last Updated The field is not editable in the interface and not recommended for import SCHEDULER_TYPE Schedule Type Value from 1 3 by the order appears in the list 1 Specified 2 Default Schedule 3 Do not run BILL_TO_ADDRESS1 These fields are not in the interface and not recommended for Page 357 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Se P Meta MATRIX wry TI a BILL_TO_ADDRESS2 import BILL_TO_ADDRESS3 BILL_TO_ADDRESS4 DATE_CREATED USER_CREATED DATE_LAST_MODIFIED USER_LAST_MODIFIED Example for Excel format Dizengof st 01 Iscar 0 DHL 0 34 5 TA Israel 02 Outiltec 0 DHL 1 New York USA 03 Ingersoll 0 EXPRESS 0 Hannover Germany 04 TaeguTec 0 EXPRESS 1 Beijing China continuation of the table 972 50 687 000 2 Iscar su ort com www Iscar com Jacob Cohen 972 50 687 000 3 Qutiltec support com www Outiltec com Peter Brosnan 972 50 687 000 4 Ingersoll support com www Ingersoll com Chuck Elder 972 50 687 000 5 TaequTec su ort com www TaeguTec com Jackie Chang Page 358 of 432 CITMS 22 1 4 CRRI MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4
163. _CAPTION defined as Full Name Free text up to 40 characters FULL_NAME Required STR_FIRST_NAME defined as First Name Free text up to 20 characters FIRST NAME Required STR_LAST_NAME defined as Last Name Free text up to 20 characters LAST NAME Required GROUP_NAME User Group User Group as appears in the Required Unique User Group Maintenance screen PHONE NUMBER Phone No Free text up to 50 characters Page 354 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 P OSA MATRIX EMAIL E Mail Free text up to 500 characters USER_LOCKED Locked 0 Not locked or 1 Locked BADGE_NUMBER Badge Number Free text up to 50 characters USER_CODE User Code Free text up to 50 characters INT_LANGUAGE_KEY User s Language Short format like in Texts for example en US de USER_NUMBER STR_PERSON_ID INT_DENY_DELETE USER_CREATED USER_LAST_MODIFIED DATE_LAST_ISSUE DATE_PASSWORD_EXPIRED DATE_LOCKED DATE_CREATED DATE_LAST_MODIFIED These fields are not in the interface and not recommended for import Example for Excel format GrantH 1245 Grant Hackett Grant Hackett Admin lanT 2535 lan Thorpe lan Thorpe Admin GeorgeB 2323 George Bush George Bush Basic HillaryC 6565 Hillary Clinton Hillary Clinton Basic AndrewB 8565 Andrew Benson Andrew Benson Basic GregR 1204 Greg Reid Greg Reid Ba
164. a A ANES 296 15 2 Working with different languages ssesssirariisiinuiiniinaniniin inanin aN NANa 298 1521 Defining TOXtS oireisiin isnin ranana EEE E EER 298 15 22 Search TOXtS asiishi aaa a a aA aa 298 16 SYSTEM TABLES tuctesxtoceeis cotehaviededied E EEEE EAAS A E dialed 300 16 1 DE L L EE E T E V E A T 301 16 2 kem Cate Gory sriisiniiyoii a a EAAS A dienes 301 16 3 item Group Senisi rusenia a a a a a aaa 302 16 3 1 Add Images to Item Groups esinaise anana aN AENEA 302 16 4 Item Auth rizati ns GrOUpai sssi aa ai EENAA EANA 303 16 4 1 Defining Item Authorization GroupS esssessssssseernanssnnsseennannannnneennnaanannaaeennaanannna 303 16 4 2 Linking items to an Item Authorization Group eeessseseesseeersseerrsseserrssrerrsseerrssne 304 16 4 3 Link User Groups with the Item Authorization Group ccceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeees 305 16 4 4 Issue of Items subject to Authorization restrictions eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeee 306 16 5 Shipping Method 0 cceeeeeecee cece cece eeceee asec ee ee eee seceeaaeceeeeeeeseccaeaeeeeeeesesensiceeeeeeeeeeeees 306 16 6 SIRS sciences neha eigen dndendaaganecddghnsusntaedhsesdespasestnetadesdduqaseasnetandedeyyasealith tate conesanicaiaetarcedeveass 306 16 7 Budgets for ISSUC ce eeeeceeeeeeenee erent ee ee eae ee ee eee esse eaeeeeesaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeiaeeeeesnaeeeeeeeaas 307 16 7 1 Budget by Quantity of Items 20 cece eet e erent eee ene eee ee eater eeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaes
165. a sensitive option which has a strong impact on the database and therefore should be used only by the administrator 1 Click the lt Build Drawer gt button on the Cabinet Maintenance screen on the Cabinet Units tab The following screen will appear Figure 4 Cabinet type MATRIX Build Drawer Ex Cabinet Key et RESET existing drawers Page 79 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 A Figure 2 Cabinet type KARDEX or NON AUTOMATIC Build Drawer x Cabinet Key e Build Drawer I RESET existing drawers 2 For each drawer fill in the required parameters MATRIX cabinet type Drawer Position from Top Visual position of the drawer Controller Position Physical position of the drawer controller plug in that can be seen when removing the cabinet side panel Drawer Type Pre defined nine drawer configurations Select the configuration suitable to your cabinet drawer KARDEX or NON AUTOMATIC cabinet type Tray Number Physical position of the tray drawer shelf etc Drawer Type Pre defined Drawer Types For more information see Chapter B Adding Drawer Types section 5 2 3 3 Sign the RESET existing drawers box if you wish to replace the existing drawers with the new definitions 4 Click the lt Build Drawer gt button on this screen This will add drawers with bins and bin units to the Cabinet Units tab which will be
166. ables for Import section 22 1 to ensure successful import of all records Use the top row for describing the column names optional recommended 2 The tables in Chapter D Tables for Import section 22 1 describe the exact format for each field Use them for preparing the data 3 Remove all the empty rows and columns from the file Especially blank rows can cause a failure in importing also normal records 4 Change the format of all the cells in Excel to textual In Excel select all the rows click the right button and select Format Cells from the popup menu In the Number tab select Text option Make sure that the numerical cells are formatted correctly 5 It is recommended to set default values in the import project for all the fields you try to import especially for those marked as Required 6 In Excel insert values for all the fields defined in the import project as Required You can define Default Value for these fields in the import project and the import will use them for the records which miss this data in Excel Otherwise it might import the records but without displaying the imported records in the search screens 7 Many fields in the Field Name in the import project are called with KEY but are actually CODE value required For example for table ENT_BIN_ MASTER for field ITEM_KEY actually ITEM_CODE value is accepted 8 Before using some values for import into CODE fields verify first that
167. ace current stock less bin capacity You can choose to receive the item to a number of bins provided that they are in the same drawer Allocation principle The default quantity will be allocated to bins in the following way Page 271 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 3 e If the first bin has the Allow Over Capacity flag turned on then the entire order quantity will be loaded into this bin e f the capacity of the bin is limited does not allow over capacity then the system will exploit the available space quantity in this bin for loading If some items still remain unallocated the system will check the next bins in the table in the same manner until the entire quantity of the order line is loaded If you selected an order line that was ordered on the Bin or Cabinet levels like described in the previous step and you wish to receive the order to a bin different from the bin cabinet of the order line press on the C stowatsine lt Show All Bins gt button This button will be disabled if you selected order line on the Item line As a result it will display all the bins in the current TOUCH station that hold this item and that have enough space to receive them also bins that their space is zero but marked with Allow Over Capacity sign The lt Show All Bins gt button will then be disabled See the following screen Page 272 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Recei
168. ach stock management level Purchase orders initiated by the automatic process can be saved as either Draft for review and approval before sending to the supplier or a normal order is created and automatically sent to the supplier Page 133 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 7 1 Create Manual Orders 1 To create a standard Order go to Menu Order gt Order gt Orders To create a Rework Order go to Menu Order gt Order gt Rework Orders To create an Internal Order go to Menu Order gt Order gt Internal Orders 2 Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar Enter values for the mandatory fields PO Number Composed of two values a code prefix and an automatic number received automatically when the order is saved PO Code Purchase order code used as an order name Supplier Name The supplier for that order The field Shipping Method will be filled automatically with shipping method of the selected supplier if user has not made any selection yet 9 Important Please note that for an Internal Order Internal Supplier will automatically be defined as the supplier Internal Supplier is automatically added when creating a new database or updating the database to version 4 The system uses Internal supplier for all Internal Orders and prohibits deleting his record and changing the supplier of Internal Orders Shipping Method The shipping method for that order This field will be filled by
169. ader See below the example for the view before changes and after changes Figure 1 displays example for search screen before changes For example open the search screen of Receive without Order option and make the following changes 1 Click the right mouse button to get the popup menu and expand the Columns option This option will display all the columns that can be added removed Check the columns that you wish to display and uncheck those which are not relevant for example Additional Item Code and Additional Item Description Page 243 of 432 Item Code Item Description Additional Item Description L v Group v j Stock Space Additional Item Code 2 Enlarge column width by dragging with mouse for example Item Description and Space column 3 Relocate column to different position by dragging it with mouse for example relocate Group column after Item Description 4 Sort the view by clicking the column header for example Item Code header 5 Click the right mouse button to get the popup menu and click the Save option to save all the changes done Next time that you will open this screen it will be loaded by the saved definitions Page 244 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 se r Figure 1 Search screen before changes Receive Item admin ITMDemo42 27 07 2008 Please enter Item Order
170. aeeeeeeeaas 210 9 3 7 Min CompariSOn ccecececcee cece eeeeeeceneaeceeeeeeeeeecaeaaeaeeeeeeeseeecaeeeeeeeeeseesenaneeeeeeees 211 9 3 8 Max Comparison cccecececceeceeeeeeeeeceneaeceeeeeeeeeeceaaeaeeeeeeesececaeeeeeeeeesessenueeeeeeees 211 9 4 Usage Reports eccceecteeeeeeeneee eee ne eee e ene eee eeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesneeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeeseaas 211 9 4 1 Basic Usage Repott cccceecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeseeneeeeeenneeeeeaes 211 9 4 2 Advanced Usage Repott cccccccccceeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenaeeeseeaeeesenneeeeeeanees 212 9 5 LOCK SNORAS N danstieeetaiegedenece 213 9 5 1 stock Shortage Report s cccceseccticeestectapeateceedecceibes SKEE E TEE A KEETA 213 9 5 2 Advanced Stock Shortage eccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeees 214 9 5 3 Early Warning Rapor essesi ren ea E ban gctvaeedensap teed 214 9 6 Stock Valuation Reports cccccceesecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeseceaeaeeeeeeeseseccaaeeeeeeeeeneee 215 9 6 1 Valuation by Bin report sesioen eee ausin in EEREN VEREER A NEPARA A teaser teeeeeeaa 215 9 6 2 Valuation by Item reporl ocassion nisin in AEri NE SNEEN EANA SA KEENER 215 9 6 3 Valuation by Cabinet report siese isir nuskrnin dinatnan Eene A AREPA A ARARSA RANNER NASAAN 216 9 7 Orders Report isens enuei aiana aia AE aV AEA AAEREN Aa 216 9 7 1 Basic Orders RepOrt nsis annsan aiai aae aa aaa e iaaa aia aaa 216 9 7 2 Advanced Orders R
171. ages to Items section 5 4 5 Chapter D Add Images to Item Groups section 16 3 1 Chapter E Utilities section 25 11 Page 419 of 432 T MS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 PX rata MATRIX 26 8 How to Set Authorizations for TOUCH Users Each module on the Touch can be controlled by authorizations given per User Group To enable disable hide modules on the Main Menu like Issue Return etc make the following steps 1 In MANAGE open Authorization Manager by Menu Administration gt Users and Authorizations gt Authorization Manager 2 Select the user group for which you want to set the authorizations and select the Controls Authorization tab 3 Expand the option TOUCH SYSTEM and click Main Menu This will list all the modules in TOUCH including lt Exit gt button that exits the user to the operating system 4 Make the changes and save them For more details about Authorization Manager screen read the Chapter D Controls Authorization section 18 3 2 Page 420 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 27 Troubleshooting 27 1 Troubleshoot Jobs of Automatic Processes The system supports five types of jobs which are responsible for the automatic processes DBName EndOfMonthProcess DBName ReportsEngine DBName AutoPOService DBName AutoBackup and Replication Job This section describes potential problems working with automatic processes and jobs and
172. all the other fields that you want to edit Page 377 of 432 D T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Important All the records will be imported according to Is Unique value meaning that if there is already a record in the database that has the same value for unique field as the record for import then no row will be imported but only updated with other fields Otherwise the record will be imported 22 5 Add additional table fields Here you can add additional optional fields that were not added to the list by default and make definitions for them 16 Click the a lt Add gt button on the right side of the fields grid A new row will be added to the grid listing all the additional available fields for import 17 Select in the Field Name control the name of the field that you want to add and make the same definitions as for the existed fields Delete additional table fields In case there is a field which is not required see Required column in the grid and is optional it can be removed from the list of import 18 Select the row of the optional field The button lt Delete gt is added to the right side of the field s grid 19 Click the ts lt Delete gt button and confirm the deletion Now the row is removed from the grid Importing the data After making all the adjustments between import file and Manage Import Data screen for all the fields in the table and saving the changes 20 Go
173. ally calculated values Page 92 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 RS FISD If the Override column has input and the Effective Until date has not expired the Automatic Purchase order process will create orders according to the input Otherwise it will create the orders according to the data in the Calculated column For more information see Chapter D Monthly Process section 21 1 and Chapter D Automatic PO Process section 21 2 5 3 1 4 Tab Additional Fields This tab displays the additional fields of types Numeric Text Boolean and Date that were defined for the Bin entity in the Additional Fields screen This screen only allows you to edit the fields that were already added For instructions how to add more fields to the entity see Chapter B Additional Fields section 5 5 ES Bin Maintenance as lol xj Bin Key Bin Code Cabinet Code Item Code Item Description E Demo1 01 01 13 i Demo1 gt 5505421 EJ Demo IDI 0295 5G 1C908 General Stock Management Additional Fields Usage Transaction Fie p Value ves F 5 3 1 5 Tab Usage Page 93 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 amp E D This tab displays the average usage data and issues frequency related to the Bin for previous months The usage screen gives a good indication for the activity of the Bin User can track in this tab the Usage Average Usage and Frequency or issues for the Bin p
174. alue of the difference in the Saving column To run the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Reports gt Max Comparison 9 4 Usage Reports The usage reports allow you to track the usage of items on each stock management level Bin Item Cabinet and Item levels by month 9 4 1 Basic Usage Report This report displays in generic view the history of every monthly usage per Bin per Item Cabinet and per Item for all managed cabinets For the report open Menu Reports gt Usage Report gt Basic Usage Report Page 211 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 E 9 4 2 Advanced Usage Report This screen enables the user to create a customized report based on the records of the basic usage report It also enables the user to save the definitions and run the report at a scheduled time The report displays the items by Usage The quantity of items used issued To run the report open Menu Reports gt Usage Report gt Advanced Usage Report Advanced Usage Report loj x Siete le Demo report for Usage Chart type amp Filter and Grouping Choose Fields Report Type Group By Design Report al fa C Standard Chart Listing No Subtotals Quarter E Listing Subtotals ae X Filg Quarter z Subtotals Only Y Field lusse lt I Chart Color Style Default Condition operator All conditions At least one condition I Simp
175. ample open the cost center Department Grinding 3 Click the J lt Add gt button on the right side of the grid This will display the list of items Page 341 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Sto fe Search Item 0 x ltem Key ltem Code D Group a ltem Type o H Additional Item Code o Category o y Item Description Poo ltem Long Description ss Main Family y Primary Supplier E ltem Auth Group 0 H Sub Family E y EJ Found 79 Records Search Select Regular Milling 5605179 Derno APKT 1003PDR H Expendable Demo APKT 1003P Regular Milling 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 Durable Demo HM90 ES0A D Regular Milling 3101694 Demo HM90 E90A D32 Durable Demo HM90 E90A D Regular Milling 3102566 Demo HM90 E90A D 62 Durable Demo HM90 E90A D Regular Milling 3101745 Demo HM90 E90A D 75 Durable Demo HM90 E90A D Regular Milling 6605180 Derno APKT 1003PDR H Durable Demo APKT 1003P Regular Milling 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 2 Durable Demo HM90 E90A D Regular Milling 6600048 Demo APKT 1003PDR H Expendable Demo APKT 1003P Damular Milline SeNIIaG Narn ADIIT 1NNAODNToO Evnandahla Narn ADIT 10N2D v 4 Select the items that should be available for issue for this cost center and click the lt Select gt button You can select multiple items by holding the CTRL key and selecting th
176. and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal releni and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Cancel lt Back L Next gt 10 Fill in the data on the following screen and click lt Next gt to continue Page 27 of 432 SE CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 AATE inixi Select Installation Database Name Database Name ITM User Name Password a New Database C Update Database Cancel lt Back Next gt Database Name To create a new database type a new name recommended to change the default ITM to different name To update an existing database type the name of the database to be updated User Name Type user name for the database default is sa Password Type password default is empty New Database Choose this option if it is the first installation or if you want to replace the current database with an empty database bearing the same name Update Database Choose this option if it is not the first installation and you want to update the existing database The database will be updated with the new features but your data will be saved 9 Important The ITMDemo database is always replaced 11 If you chose to install New Database in the previous step and a database with the same name already exists you will get the following messa
177. anhadeveces 331 19 1 Add Cost Center Header ccccccccceceeeececeeeeeeeceeeaeeaeceeeeeeesecaeaeceeeeeseeensieeeneeess 331 19 2 Add Cost Center Detail ccccccceeececeecnece cece ee eeceeeaeeaeeeeeeeeesecaaeaeeeeeeeseeennieeeneeess 332 19 3 Define Items per Cost Center c ccccccceesecnececeeeeeteceaeaeeeeeeeeeesedeanaeeeeeeeeesessnnaeees 334 19 3 1 Link Cost Centers to ITEM ccccecccccceece cece eeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeceseanaeeeeeeesesensaneeeeeeess 335 19 3 2 Link Items to COST CENTER wwii caneeli iia dated denen 339 20 USER COST CENTERS Gienia a ativ ives le tee ives Mande nn hae ie hd ai ke 345 21 MANUAL PROGESSES auiii EE A ndeh ev E ei a ed eas 347 21 1 Monthly Process cid cence aeh wee hal eh nk ae a 347 21 2 Automatic PO ProGess vise acesidavcveeda cas veevuanededcasageiaveneiantetb avs sate avedte a aae ners 351 22 IMPORTDA Aini E ademas tee de oe ee ees eee 353 22 1 Tables for IMPO saraaa E AEE 354 22 1 1 Import USES nerone ninu E ETN Hata 354 22 12 Import Item Groups ninnisi a NEEE ate eae ate are 356 221 3 import Suppliers setia aa a aa a AEA 357 22 1 4 Import Items and their Suppliers ccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeecaecaeeeeeeeeesecnnaeeeeees 359 22 19 Import Cost Centers sisne a aa a a a aa aa 363 221 0 mMpornt BINS enian ea aaa r a n R 371 Page 5 of 432 Sots CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See S C6 0 amp sad MATA 22 1 7 Import Stock Manageme
178. arts to run Set this value when initiating the database and before first Monthly Process starts to run This parameter must use sign for decimal value according to your regional settings For example for European settings use 901 MWA factor coma and for US settings use dot Set this value when initiating the database and before first Monthly Process starts to run This parameter must use sign for decimal value according to Percent of Extreme lead time your regional settings For example for European settings use 902 cases coma and for US settings use dot 903 Stock Management level This system option is important for creating automatic orders This system option is important to be set when initiating the Item from Reworked bin good database since it influences on the functionality of the system 904 as New stock calculation Receive module This system option is important to be set when initiating the Item from Used bin good as database since it influences on the functionality of the system 905 New stock calculation Receive amp Return modules Set this system option when initiating the database in order to 1007 Login Time out give enough time for users until logout To enable use of the barcode reader set this system option 1012 Barcode Reader prefix accordingly to the prefix of the device Page 323 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 18 Managing users and authorizations Defining
179. ason Probably the format used for input does not match the accepted format Solution Follow the Chapter D Tables for Import section 22 1 and the Chapter D Tips for Preparing Input Data section 22 2 to verify that you used the correct format in the input file 27 5 Troubleshoot Access to Data in TOUCH GE5001 Expected item is not displayed on the Search screens Problem When opening a search screen on Touch could not find an item expected to find Possible reason Perhaps 1 This item was not assigned to any bin or 2 This item was assigned to the bin of a cabinet which is not connected to this Touch station 3 The bin to which the item was assigned does not have bin units Page 430 of 432 3 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Solution 1 Assign the item to a bin 2 Check the touch definitions as described in Chapter A Set TOUCH definitions section 3 2 6 3 In MANAGE check if the bins containing this item have bin units by Cabinet Maintenance screen gt Cabinet Units tab or by Bin Maintenance screen gt Bin Units tab or by Bin Units Report If not add the bin units as described in Chapter B Tab Cabinet Units section 5 2 1 2 and check the results on the TOUCH module GE5002 No bins are displayed or the expected bin does not appear Problem When select an item to perform an operation on Touch no bins are displayed or the expected bin is not displayed Possible reason It may happen if 1
180. ave differences in their available options but most of the modules in the system work by the same principles therefore they are described here fully only once Toolbar Buttons for Add Update Buttons for Print to Delete Save Search Excel Send by Email MATRIX TM Manage Main Operations ggder Reports System Tables Administration Help Windows ae J e Oue E parte g es 3 ltem Long Description Loo E Main Family E Primary Supplier y ltem Auth Group n g Sub Family E y Regular Drilling 3202030 DemoDR MF 14R 2 25 Ingersoll Durable DemoDR MF I 14R Transaction i Regular Drilling 3202031 DemoDR MF I 16R 2 25 Ingersoll Durable DemoDR MF I 16R l Drilling 3299216 hil 2MODR MF O8R 2 56 tequila Drilling 3 69 emo n LiemoDR MF 10L 2 Drilling 01670 DemoDR MF 10R 2 25D emoDR MF 10R 2 H a m Maintenance ee JL Change seoron sgn to aa roek Eron e ia g 1 or gt or lt or lt gt 7 26D Durable DemoDR MF 14L 2 Dri DemoDR MF 16L 2 25D able ___NemnNP Me 16 Pop up menu after right mouse click on the record Return Search record by partial text and Orders K Search Completed Records Found TTMDemover42 admin creator Page 61 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Search for a record To follow the example above
181. ay the regular window where you will be required to fill in the quantities for issue In this case there is no need to continue with the following steps but proceed to execute a regular issue operation Or No for Separated Items Select lt No gt to issue the kit s component items from its own separate bin A series of steps will be initiated In this case please continue to the next step Note Receiving this message means that the system was set to allow selection between two options for issuing a kit In order to limit issuing kit components only from separate bins and thus avoiding this message set System Option 1014 The following window will pop up requesting the user to enter the quantity of kits to issue Kit quantity E x ITMDemo 11 07 2007 P Wi Kit quantity noj Enter quantity and press lt Next gt to proceed to the next step If some items in the kit are not in stock or not enough the following message notifying about the shortage will appear Page 259 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gees System Message Message Number 1511 A Item s quantity is not enough Do you want to continue If you choose lt No gt the issue process will be canceled If you choose lt Yes gt the system will continue the issue process like described in the next step considering the remained stock of the kit component items 7 A list of the kits comp
182. ayed insert references to the ERP order and confirm 4 Select the bin and set the quantity for receive up to the free storage space and press lt Receive gt button 5 Open the bin following the instructions written at the top of the screen in RED and receive the item into the bin 6 Close the drawer At this point a Receive transaction will be created with the date time and user You can view this transaction in the MANAGE Module Operations gt Transaction Page 50 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 3 4 SEX PX xO MATRIX Important Tips System Options Notice that the user can change MATRIX TM configuration and customize the system for more convenient use In order to learn about the options read Chapter D System Options section 17 and see options table System Tables Notice that MATRIX TM has system tables that enable the user to add general data records such as different currencies cabinet types etc It is recommended to learn about these tables for more convenient use of the system In order to learn more about these options read Chapter D System Tables section 16 Help and Technical Support Notice that MATRIX TM MANAGE module has an option to get help and support on line directly from its screen such as a Open help on a particular topic b Send email for support with logs included c To send the data which is connected to a support issue you can create an email with a re
183. bin by the following instructions 1 Go to Menu Operations gt Stock Transfer The screen will display a list of bins with item definition that have not reached their full capacity or the bins assigned with Allow Over Capacity 2 Select the destination bin to receive stock from another bin with the same item definition and click the J lt Update gt button or double click the line The following screen will be displayed lolx ltem Code p522 ltem Description Demo TPMR 221 Ic70 Source Destination Bin Code Demo1 01 02 06 1 amp Bin Code Demo1 01 01 10 Stock Capacity porz Stock Capacity 63 760 Transfer Quantity i Used Item E Maximum Quantity 20 Allow Over Capacity v Comments Transfer j i Cancel The item bin that you have selected are displayed on the Destination side The bin s from which you can transfer the item are displayed on the Source side in the Bin Code list If there are no bins from which to transfer the displayed list will be empty and the lt Transfer gt button will be disabled Select from the Source side the bin from which to transfer the item either from the combo box or by using either the Gs lt gt button Fill in the quantity and click the lt Transfer gt button This will create two Transfer transactions under the logged in user name one for source bin and the other for the destination bin Make the physical transfe
184. bin without an item is defined as an inactive bin Define Item Code of the item that will be linked to the bin fill in the Capacity and save the data Important If you need to add bins manually and to access them through TOUCH you also have to manually create the bin units Without bin units you cannot access those bins in the Touch module See more details in Chapter B Base Entities gt Bin section S3 Note In order to work in a more advanced mode and be able to plan your purchasing you need to fill in the different parameters of the bin For more instructions follow Chapter B Base Entities gt Bin section 5 3 3 2 6 Set TOUCH Definitions In order to work on the TOUCH module with the cabinets defined in the database the user must first create TOUCH definitions in MATRIX TM MANAGE A PC work station can control one Master cabinet and a number of Add on cabinets The Master cabinet houses the PC and touch screen The User must create TOUCH station definition in the database by assigning it a TOUCH Name and Computer Name of the PC located in the Master cabinet Once a TOUCH station is defined the Add on cabinets must be defined For example Page 41 of 432 MATRI ni SEs CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 z In the diagram below two TOUCH Stations the first with 1 cabinet the second with 3 cabinets are defined in the Server Database Touch screen in ae CabinetB1 CabinetB2 CabinetB3
185. ble 446 Demo2 01 07 01 MatrixDemo2 5530123 Reworkable 3 00 449 Demo2 01 07 02 MatrixDemo2 5530123 Reworkable 5 00 Important System Options 904 and 905 allow you to choose whether to include Reworked and Used items when the system calculates stock quantities for Item Cabinet or Item levels For more details see the table in the following section Page 129 of 432 re T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 LLP MATRIX 6 2 Stock ROLL UP by System Options 904 amp 905 The following table describes the cases when the stock in the bin is rolled up up to the Item Cabinet and Item levels If System Option 904 is set to YES then a bin with a reworked item of Durable Kit or Reworkable item type will be treated like a new bin meaning that the stock from this bin will be rolled up up to the Item Cabinet and Item levels If System Option 905 is set to YES then a bin with a used item of Durable or Kit item type will be treated like a new bin meaning that the stock from this bin will be rolled up up to the Item Cabinet and Item levels Parameter Parameter Roll up Stock Quantities by Item type 904 905 Roll up Roll up reworked used not used durable kit item item Vi N Please read more information about the influence of system options 904 and 905 in Chapter B ITEM Life Cycle section 5 4 4 Page 130 of
186. bscription overwriting the current one Page 407 of 432 YY CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 z Ox gt gt v Use the lt Initialize gt button to start the replication Switch to the Activate Jobs section Find a new job containing the new database name and activate it When the job ends run the Settings program and set it to the new database Now you are ready to run the Matrix TM applications 25 11 Utilities Network These utilities are used in order to define the ports used for client and server For the creation of replication the client network program is needed These utilities will be needed only in special cases If unclear consult support regarding when these utilities are needed Database Administration 4 0 Connection Utilities Serer Name Database liTMDemo User Name iTm2005 User Password E Add Pictures by Items Database Tools Folder Path Backup C Program Files MATRIX TM 4 0 lmages ItemPicture Restore Restore ltem Bin By Item Code Activate Jobs C By Additional Item Code Reset SQL User Password Manage Tools Stock Balance Restore Defaults I Overwrite Pictures Reset Matrix Admin Password Logs Send by E mail Delete Logs Replications SQL script running Process History By Supplier Item Code Page 408 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CR Add Pictures by Items Another utility available i
187. ce the supplier is selected the following tabs will appear at the lower part of the screen Sub Tab General This tab contains information for orders regarding the supplier of the item General Cost Break Usage Information Supplier Item Code o Supplier ltem Description a Unit of Measure Pieces o z Expire Date H Minimum Order Quantity ooo Update User admin creator Discount a Update Date roe Supplier Price 5 50 Create User admin creator Pack Size i i is szr Create Date rozz Remarks a H Supplier Item Code The supplier s reference to the item Supplier Item Description The item s description used by the supplier Expire date The item s price expiration date for this specific supplier Minimum Order Quantity Minimum order quantity from this supplier Discount The supplier s discount for this item Page 105 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 N Supplier Price The supplier s price for this item When creating an order by default this price will be copied into the Unit Price field in the order Pack Size The size of the package used by the supplier for this item In an automatic order the ordered quantity will be rounded up to this value Unit of Measure Indicates the supplier s base order unit The system does not deal with unit of measure conversions Update User Update Date Create User Create Date Filled automatically by the system an
188. cee a a AN E NEEN 265 13 1 3 Issue items by Cost Centers cne aided 268 13 2 RECEIVE HOI ennaii a A A avelidaashl MUG veladsdavelutes 268 13 3 RETURN HET aSa E a a ASAA aA E 275 13 4 ADJUST ITEM oeii ai aaa E a AA hid dina atind 277 13 5 COUNT BINS onien aaa naa E a a a aa a EA 279 Page 4 of 432 HLL Ex Sots CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See MATA 13 6 TRANSFER ORDER 0 cccccceceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeteneaeeeseneaeeeseneaeeeseeaeeesenanees 280 13 7 TRANSACTIONS 0 ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneee ee eeneeeeeeeneaeeeeeeneeeeeseeeaeeeseneaeeeseneaeeeseeeaeeeeeeaaees 284 13 8 RECEIVE without ORDER c cc ceeeeceeeee een eeeeeene eect eter ee eeaaeeeeesaeeesesaeeeeesnaeeeeeenaes 288 13 9 Working with Key to Lockers ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseneaeeeseeaeeeeneaeees 291 14 COMMON PROBLENG 00 ccceceeceeecsneeececeneeececeeeeeeceaeeeeeceaeeeeeseaeeeeessaeeeessneeeessneeeeseeseeeees 293 14 1 Machine problems ccccccceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeseeeeaaecaeeeeeeesesecaeaeeeeeeeseeseceeeeeeeeeseeseaeeas 293 14 2 Error Message Descriptions 0 cccceeeeeeeeeee entree ee enneeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeseeneeeeeeaes 294 CHAPTER D SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION ccessseeeceseeneeeeseeneeeeseeeeeeesecneeesaseeneeeaseeneeeaseneeenaes 295 15 SETTING Garean E a sat guetotestees a bacgieue sna dee uves Coeaendia dace aver caesar 296 15 1 SEMINGS CONTIQUATION oies ea aa
189. ch the current header inherits cost centers Minimal length for input value Not relevant for list type Maximal length for input value Not relevant for list type If marked the items for issue in Touch module will be filtered according to selected cost center For more details see Chapter D Define Items per Cost Center section 19 3 Free text 3 Fill in the data and click the EJ lt Save gt button on the Menu Bar 19 2 Add Cost Center Detail Here you can Add Update Delete the Cost Center Details connected to the header and maintain the definitions of the cost center lines 1 Go to Menu Administration gt Cost Center Details 2 Click the lt Add gt button and the following screen will appear Page 332 of 432 aH Cost Center Details Maintenance Cost Center Name TTR AE Work Center Cost Center Code wmo Cost Center Description WC Grinding3 3 Cost Center Detail Parent U Grinding Fields description Cost Center Name A list with all the cost center headers defined Cost Center Code Cost center code Cost Center Description Cost center description Cost Center Detail Parent Displays in the grid a list of cost centers of the parent cost center Marking cost centers here will link them to the parent cost center In the Cost Center Name field select the header for which you wish to add cost centers insert the data for the Cost Center Code and Cost Center Description
190. cheduleServices exe from that folder cannot run Solution Run the jobs on the server where the database is located or Set the system option 1 Installation Path to the path of the Matrix installation on the server using server name for example server name program files matrix tm ServerSetup GE1004 Cannot run Automatic Backup of the Database Problem The job DBName AutoBackup failed to run Possible reason Perhaps the folder defined for the backup does not exist Solution Check the system option 602 for Database Auto Backup folder GE1005 Cannot delete jobs by Database Administration Problem When trying to delete jobs by Database Administration general error message is displayed or message that jobs cannot be deleted because there is more than one job with the same name Possible reason The jobs are created per computer name Perhaps the computer name was changed while there were jobs existing under a previous computer name and now it cannot delete update them Solution Select the option SQL script running in the Database Administration tool and run the script from the installation folder Matrix Installation folder DBAdmin Sq Script DelltmJobs sql This script will force the removal of all the MATRIX TM jobs not including the replication job Recommendation If the computer name was indeed changed in order to avoid this problem in the future it is recommended to remove the existing jobs prior to changing the
191. ck and the required stock and creates the automatic orders if any stock shortage was found There are two ways to run the process that creates automatic orders 1 By manual run and or 2 By setting a time in the system for scheduling the run For both ways first you need to set manual definitions described in the following section Chapter B Manual User Definitions section 7 2 1 Note Once an automatic order is generated by the system it includes AUTO PURCHASE as a remark and can be updated exactly like a manual order See additional instructions below 7 2 1 Manual User Definitions 1 Goto Menu Administration gt System Options Use information described in Chapter D System Options section 17 for parameters search The system options relevant for automatic orders 2 Search for Parameter 802 Auto purchase and select the desired value Page 151 of 432 i ZRH MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ox Option Key B02 Option Name Auto purchase Option Description How to run auto purchase Option Value Create purchase Orders and Send to supplier No run Create purchase Draft recommended Create purchase Orders Create purchase Orders and Send to supplier No run The system will not create orders automatically Create purchase Draft The system will create orders in Draft status In order to send those orders user will have to set the status to Open and send the orders
192. created without an associated item The main part of the page is the tab index which includes the following entries General Stock Management Additional Fields Usage Transactions Orders and Bin Units Page 86 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ee 5 3 1 Adding a Bin Bins are usually added automatically when adding Cabinet and Drawers In some cases we would like to add them manually for example when using MATRIX drawer type D 0 with no physical bins In this case we need to divide the drawer into virtual bins the pre allocated position of the item within the drawer or shelf For manual bin creation follow the instructions below 1 Select Menu Main gt Bin in the system s main menu 2 Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar Enter values for the mandatory Bin Code Enter a name for the bin Cabinet Code Select the cabinet that the bin belongs to Note The Chapter B Bin Location section 5 3 3 describes the principles used by the software to name bins in the Bin Code field which are automatically created You can use the same principle for bins defined manually 4 Save the bin by clicking the al lt Save gt button At this point the other tabs will become available for update Recommendation To save time on setting values for the fields you can set default values that will be loaded when creating new bins For more information see Chapter B Defaults List section 5 6
193. ct to the Database section 3 1 Page 424 of 432 RR CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 sete MATRIX Apply for System Administrator assistance if the database is located on the network and not on the local PC GE2002 Error message when trying to load Touch Problem When trying to load Touch get the following error message An error has occurred while establishing a connection to the server When connecting Default Eror Message anon 17162428 An error has occurred while establishing a connection to the server When connecting to SQL Server 2005 this failure may be caused by the fact that under the default settings SQL Server does not allow remote connections provider Named Pipes Provider error 40 Could not open a connection to SQL Server Possible reason The connection to the database was lost or the connection details are not correct Solution Follow the instructions in Chapter E SQL Server Service Manager section 25 3 2 to reestablish connection to the database Check the setting as described in Chapter A Connect to the Database section 3 1 Apply for System Administrator assistance if the database is located on the network and not on the local PC GE2003 Database error message when trying to load Manage or Touch Problem When trying to load Manage or Touch get the following error message The Database version is different from the application version x The
194. d are not changeable manually Sub Tab Cost Break 45 00 150 00 135 00 This tab contains a grid where we can define special prices and discounts of the supplier for different order sizes To define a new record click the lt Add gt button fill in the fields in the open window and click the lt Save gt button In order to update or to delete a record mark the required record in the grid and click the a lt Update gt button or the lt Delete gt button Page 106 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Fields description Quantity If the ordered quantity is greater or equal to this quantity the special price or discount will apply Price Indicates the price for the specified quantity Discount Indicates the discount for the specified quantity Expire date The date the pricing for this quantity expires Remarks General remarks for this quantity pricing Sub Tab Usage Information Min Lead Time Max Lead Time i a Average Lead Time B Lead time override Effective Only If Effective Date Is Valid Lead Average effective date This tab contains statistical information of the item s supplier record This information is calculated at each month end process and is used in the ordering process Fields description Min Lead Time The supplier s minimum lead time calculated at the end of each month Max Lead Time The supplier s maximum lead time
195. d the bin latch pops up the item will be considered as issued 1 2 3 Press on the lt lssue gt icon Search for an item by barcode or from the list and select an item Open the bin following the instructions written at the top of the screen in RED and issue the item At this point an Issue transaction with the logged in user will be created Check this transaction in the MANAGE Module Operations gt Transaction Close the drawer Page 46 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 3 3 4 Receive A user who has authority to receive an ordered item can re stock the item by placing it into the linked bin In the MANAGE Module an order must first have been created It will be in Open status The order will contain the line items which can be received 1 Press on the lt Receive gt icon 2 Search for an item by barcode or from the list and select the item 3 Open the bin following the instructions and put the item into the bin 4 Close the drawer At this point a Receive transaction with the logged in user name will be created 3 3 5 Return A user who has authority to return an item can place a used item into a bin This item can be issued again if it is a Durable Kit item or can be sent to regrind if it is a Reworkable item the items of type Durable Kit can be also sent to regrind if necessary In order to be able to return an item it must be linked to a bin that was defined as Used Item
196. d which displays a list of system defined classifications for Sub Family Only those classifications to which an item has been linked will be displayed The list of Sub Family classifications is filtered according to the selected Main Family Page 242 of 432 3 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Additional Fields are added to the Item entity in the Manage module as described in Chapter B Additional Fields section 5 5 In this example Item entity has four additional fields of different types added by the Manage module The field Size numeric type will display a list of used values and numeric keyboard for input the field Color text type will display a list of used values and alpha numeric keyboard the field Tested boolean type and the field Test Date date type will display the list of used values 2 Insert the data for filtering the items on the search screen and press on the C lt OK gt button In order to cancel the filter open the Advanced window again and press on the lt Cancel gt button 12 3 5 Adjust Search Screens This feature enables to adjust the search screens and grids per database The following operations are available for change and for save e Adding Removing columns to the view by the right click popup menu e Reducing Enlarging columns width by dragging e Relocating the columns to different position by dragging e Sorting the data by selected column by pressing the column he
197. de Version 4 2 definitions can be saved Sort of screen Column position Column size Window size and Search parameters 8 EJ Save This button has the same functionality as the lt Save amp Close gt button but the current window will not be closed 9 ed Clear By clicking the lt Clear gt button the content of the displayed fields in a search details or queries screen will be cleared 10 la Search By clicking the lt Search gt button a list of records that meet the criteria defined in the top section of the page will be displayed on screen 11 22 Heip Displays a help screen regarding the current option in use 12 E Mail Creates an email for the technical support by attaching a report as a file 13 Print Exports query results or basic reports to an Excel file Page 60 of 432 MATRIX CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 4 3 Operational Principles The MANAGE module uses a generic search screen as a starting point for working with the records In order to update any record in the database first you need to open its generic search screen from the menu and then select it for update The top section of the search screen contains search parameters in order to filter the records which are shown in the bottom section in list format The functions available related to data in the search screens include View Add Update Delete Search etc Some generic screens h
198. de Version 4 2 g ST fe Item Maintenance o x Item Key ltem Code ltem Description Item Type ae ino o General Supplier Information Custom Fields Stock Management Location Remarks and links Kit Items 5502222 Demo TPMR 221 IC70 3102566 Demo HM90 E90A D 62 2 C 62 2 Demo 16EL A 55 Item Code ltem Description Demo 16EL A 55 Quantity Remarks Sequence 5 4 4 ITEM Life Cycle The stock operations available for an item depend on the Item Type Bin Type and on System Options 904 and 905 The system uses Four types of Items Expendable Durable Reworkable and Kit Three types of Bins definitions on the Bin Maintenance screen Used signed with Used Item Reworked signed with Reworked and New no sign Each of system options 904 and 905 has 2 available values YES or NO Expendable item Can be issued only once must be located in a new bin and without option to return This item type is not influenced by system options 904 and 905 Page 118 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Durable Kit Reworkable It is a multiple use item that can be located in any type of bin and can be returned to the cabinet therefore it can be issued many times This item type is influenced by the system option 905 Option 905 Used Durable Kit Bin good as New If 905 NO Receive Durable Kit new item to New bins If 905 YES Receive and Return Durable Kit new ite
199. ders Page 91 of 432 OK CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 RE Bin Maintenance 10 x Bin Key Bin Code Cabinet Code ltem Code Item Description E Demo1 01 01 13 j Demo1 15505421 Ce Demo IDI 0295 SG IC908 General dditional Fields Usage Transactions Orders Bin Units Calculated Override Effective Until Av Monthly Usage P50 i fainza0o7 z Minimum Quantity bs Boon Maximum Quantity Be pooo Frequency Class Issues per month E0525 cem x fsinza007 x Average Frequency D Average Usage The average issue transaction quantity per month for this item Minimum Quantity Indicates the item s minimum quantity If the stock level in this bin is less than this quantity a new order will be initiated to renew the stock to its maximum level Maximum Quantity Indicates the item s maximum quantity If the stock level in this bin is less than the minimum quantity a new order will be initiated to replenish the stock to its maximum level Frequency Class Issue transactions per month The average frequencies are classified by groups Group A a most active bin measured in number of issue transactions per month and Group B a less active bin Average Frequency The average number of orders per month for this bin The column Calculated displays automatically calculated values as a result of running Monthly Usage Process The column Override enables overriding the automatic
200. ding Items Run MATRIX TM MANAGE and follow these steps 1 Select Menu Main gt Item Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar Fill tem Code Item Description Item Type durable expendable reworkable kit key and all the required fields for a new item Save the data by clicking the ta lt Save gt button on the Menu bar For more details refer to Chapter B Base Entities gt Item section 5 4 Note For advanced use of the software a user with administrative authorities can add items with the Import module For more instructions follow Chapter D Import Data section 22 Page 39 of 432 BOLL Ex RZ CITMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See MATA 3 2 5 Adding Cabinets Drawers and Bins Run MATRIX TM MANAGE and follow these steps Cabinet and Drawers 1 Select Menu Main gt Cabinet 2 Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar 3 Fill Cabinet Code Cabinet Name Type Sequence and all the required fields for a new cabinet Save the data by clicking the lt Save gt button on the Menu bar 4 Go to tab Cabinet Units and click the lt Build Drawer gt button Select from the list the Drawer Position from Top visual position of the drawer Controller Position physical controller position of the drawer that can be seen when removing the cabinet side panel and Drawer Type that are compatible to the drawer and its bins configuration and click the lt Build
201. drawer Call support 90008 Problem with Connection No connection with the machine Call support 90009 Port Is Not Open Problem with connection port Call support 90011 Wrong Drawer Id The system manager must correct Y value in the Bin Units of the cabinet 90012 Buffer Is Full Exit and Re Enter the system 90013 Port Is Not Available Connection port not available Call technician Page 294 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CHAPTER D SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Introduction This Chapter of the Guide is intended for the use of the system manager The system manager is a Super User that is permitted to create users and manage general data in the system In order to be familiar with the whole system you must read the entire User Guide and follow the technical directions mentioned in Chapter B Operational Principles section 4 3 The administration screens are used for the following purposes e Managing and maintaning the system tables e Defining users groups of users and authorizations e Support of system language and texts e Maintenance of the system parameters which affect the way the system will perform Page 295 of 432 5 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 oSA MATRI 15 Settings Defining the basic setting of the system In order to set the following parameters you need to use the Setting program There are two ways to get to the Setting program e Inthe Main menu go
202. e Page 386 of 432 T SEX 5 T MS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 PX gt d K2 MATIX Date Last Updated This field is automatically updated with the date of the last run scheduler 3 Click the E lt Save gt button on the Menu bar Note To ensure that the scheduler will be activated verify that System Option 209 is set to YES and that the DBName ReportsEngine job exists 24 2 Creating transactions In order to test the correctness of the interface definitions make transactions on the MANAGE or TOUCH modules This section describes the changes done in the Transactions screens in order to support interfaces 24 2 1 TOUCH Module RECEIVE option The following screen appears after the user selects the item to receive and before selecting the received quantities This screen will appear only if system option 111 is set to display reference fields Page 387 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Se Reference admin creator ITMDemover40 Input Cost Centers enone O Reference 1 PO556434 Reference 2 BA 24 2 2 MANAGE Module Receive screen This screen displays additional reference fields according to system option 111 Page 388 of 432 HM Receive Order PO Number Item Code Supplier Code Cabinet Quantity po Received po Ct S On Route New Received o Remarks Reference Reference 1 Reference 2 Kardex Ein B Line fte
203. e item Quantity Page 207 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Av Monthly Usage The average quantity of items used issued per month calculated by Monthly Process To run the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Reports gt Advanced Stock Report Advanced Stock Report _ 5 x Description Demo report for Stock Chart type i Filter and Grouping Choose Fields Report Type Group By Design Report C Standard X Field item Code gt Y Field Quantity gt Sa Chart Quantity Av Monthly Usage Ascend B Ml scena Ascend a z Please refer to Chapter B Advanced Reports section 9 1 for instructions how to build and run an Advanced Report 9 3 2 Dead Items Report This report displays all the items that were not in use and considered as Dead according to the following conditions There is stock for the item but There are no transactions for the item OR There is no Issue Receive date OR Last time that the item was Issued Received was more than X months ago Page 208 of 432 MATRIX CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 The number of months is defined by System Option 213 Number of months with no Item Bin activity To run the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Reports gt Dead Items Report H Dead Items Report Brel x Item Key
204. e 416 of 432 Pa T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 4 Open the Settings program and set the connection to the database as also described in Chapter A Connect to the Database section 3 1 Note If running the program causes the installation program to run cancel the step and run it again Now you are ready to run a new version of Matrix TM software with an upgraded database Continue with the installation on the Manage stations On the Manage workstations 1 Remove the existing Matrix software installation 2 Install the Matrix TM software as described in Chapter A Install MATRIX TM Setup section 2 4 with only Manage module 3 Open the Settings program and set the connection to the database as also described in Chapter A Connect to the Database section 3 1 26 5 How to Upgrade the Database to the currently installed software If you have installed a new software version but the database was not upgraded you be will notified with an error message when trying to run the Manage or Touch software To upgrade the database follow the next steps 1 Make sure that you have installed the new and relevant software version 2 Make sure that the ITMDemo database is compatible with the software version If you can successfully run Manage program with this database and login then the database is compatible to the software You can also check the System Option 0 Database Version 3 Open the Setting
205. e records ou Cost Center Details Maintenance Cost Center Name Department x Cost Center Code DI Cost Center Description Grinding Cost Center Detail Parent Cost Center Detail Parent Sten 3101686 Demo HM90 ESDA Demo HM90 E90A Milling Regular 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A Demo HM90 E90A Milling Page 342 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 5 6 MATRIX v Click the lt Save gt button on the main toolbar Open the report that displays the linked item to cost centers by Menu Reports gt Items gt Items Cost Centers The screen will display results as following lol x ltem Key o Item Code E Poo ltem Description Poo Cost Center Name 0 H Found 2 Records 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 Department D1 Grinding Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 Department io Items Cost Centers These two items will be available for cost center Department Grinding Repeat the steps 2 5 and select the same two items for cost centers Work Center WC Grinding 1 Work Center WC Grinding 2 Repeat the step 6 for displaying the report The screen will display results as following el Items Cost Centers ltem Key ss ltem Code ltem Description Po Cost Center Name E o g Found 6 Records 3101686 Demo HM90 E9S04 D20 Department Grinding 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 Department Grinding 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 3 W W
206. e the field Sent will have a NO as value 2 Define the required parameters XYZ coordinates These fields indicate the location of the cabinet unit also called bin unit which is the smallest component in the bin definition X Location of bin unit from left to right Y In MATRIX cabinet type number of the drawer controller plug in from top to bottom Otherwise tray number Z Location of bin unit from front to back Sent In MATRIX cabinet type if this bin unit has a latch that opens the bin this value should be set to YES in order to indicate that this bin unit should be sent to the machine to enable opening of the bin Otherwise it should be set to NO Page 82 of 432 5 T MS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 SEX PX xO MATRIX Bin Code The Bin Code from the bins list Each Bin Code comprises a number of bin units Drawer Position from Top In MATRIX cabinet type number of the drawer from top to bottom Otherwise tray number Note The exact same base unit with specific XYZ values can only be defined once But the same Bin Code can be defined for two or more bin units because bins can be comprised of more than one bin unit For more information it is important to read Chapter A Bin Location section 5 3 3 3 To save the bin Unit click the E lt Save gt button Cabinet Units Deleting Bin unit In order to delete a cabinet s base unit 1 Mark the requi
207. e the Main Menu screen jain Menu admin ITMDemo42 24 07 2008 Select an Option Issue Receive Return 3 Adjust Item Count Bins Transfer Order Receive without Order Press on the required operation button Issue Issue items Receive Enter orders from vendor into the cabinet restocking Return Return goods back into the cabinet Transactions Allows authorized users to correct issue transaction quantities per User Adjust Item Adjust stock quantities of items Count Bins Stock counting of the cabinet Transfer Order Transfer items to another cabinet against an internal order Receive without Order Enables to receive an item without having priory created purchase order in Manage module Page 233 of 432 CITMS Important The system will only display the user s authorized options In order to set the MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 AR P ASAA MATE TI authorizations read Chapter D Controls Authorization section 18 3 2 12 3 Operating Principles 12 3 1 Basic System Operating Buttons Option name Button Description Main Menu C Mainmenu Return to main menu Next ne D Go to next screen Back Q vax Return to previous screen Browse e00 Choose from adjacent list Clear ED Clear data Search searen Start searching data Advanced Advance Advanced search by item classifications Group Group Search Item by Group Show
208. eator Remarks o Note Compared to the Transaction Maintenance screen of the other transaction types on the screen of Issue transactions some of the fields are enabled in order to allow the user to modify the transaction details Also the lt Update Quantity gt button and the Cost Centers tab become activated Page 187 of 432 lt lt T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Note Updating a transaction especially the quantity must be carried out carefully e Updating the Transaction data in following fields Issued for Remarks Transaction Value Consignment and Cost Centers will cancel the original transaction and create a new active and updated transaction The new transaction will include in the relevant field a code for the canceled transaction for tracking purposes e Updating the Quantity of the transaction will create a new active transaction with the amount which was added or subtracted from the previous quantity The new transaction will include in the relevant field a code for the previous transaction which is also active for tracking purposes e Updating transaction data including modifications to quantities will create two new transactions Transaction with the updated parameters without updating the amount so that the original record is canceled Transaction with the updated parameters and the amount added or subtracted e Changing an Issue transaction quantity will change t
209. ection describes Import of Suppliers by table ENT_SUPPLIER_MASTER This table can be imported independently but before this Units of Measure and Currencies must be added manually SUPPLIER_CODE Required Unique Supplier Code Free text up to 10 characters SUPPLIER_NAME Supplier Name Free text up to 50 characters Required CURRENCY_KEY Currency Currency key Required SHIPPING_METHOD_KEY Shipping Method Shipping Method Name as defined as appears in the Shipping SHIPPING_METHOD_NAME Method Maintenance screen Required ADD_SUPPLIER_CODE Additional Supplier Code Free text up to 50 characters SHIP_TO_ADDRESS1 Address first line Free text up to 45 characters SHIP_TO_ADDRESS2 Address second line Free text up to 45 characters SHIP_TO_ADDRESS3 SHIP_TO_ADDRESS4 Address third line Address fourth line Free text up to 45 characters Free text up to 45 characters SUPPLIER_PHONE Phone No Free text up to 20 characters SUPPLIER_FAX Fax No Free text up to 20 characters SUPPLIER_EMAIL E Mail Free text up to 100 characters HOME_PAGE Home Page Free text up to 200 characters CONTACT_PERSON Contact Person Free text up to 50 characters ORDER_METHOD_KEY Order Method Order Method by the next options 2 Email 3 Print 4 No Sending REMARKS Remarks Free text up to 500 characters SEND_ERP Send To ERP 0 Not to send or 1 To send AUTO_PO_DA
210. ed Quantity Received Quantity Unit Price Sum of Invoices Fill in the fields Purchase order line key Purchase order key Line number in the order The item code from the order line The item description from the order line The additional item code from the order line The original ordered quantity from the order line The received quantity from the total ordered quantity The item price from the order line The sum of quantity of the invoices which have been already assigned to this order line Invoice Number The number of the supplier invoice Invoice Quantity The quantity charged in the invoice line It is possible to add a quantity which does not exceed the received quantity less the previously approved invoiced quantities Reference Invoice Date A place to add an additional reference e g an accounting number A date associated with the invoice that can be used for invoice issue or payment date 6 Click the es lt Save amp Close gt button on the Menu bar After all the invoice lines have been input select the invoice and choose the 6 lt Print gt button to print an Invoice Approval Slip Page 162 of 432 ee T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 oSA MATRIX 8 Stock Transactions This chapter describes the transaction types which change stock quantities 8 1 RECEIVE Items Receive occurs when the ordered items are available to be received into stock Th
211. ed as SUPPLIER_CODE Primary Supplier Supplier Code as appears in the Supplier Maintenance screen Please notice that this field cannot be updated by import before importing Item Page 359 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Cioe P OSA MATRIX Suppliers ADDITIONAL_ITEM_CODE Additional Item Code Free text up to 30 characters ITEM_LONG_DESCRIPTION Item Long Description Free text up to 100 characters ITEM_PRICE Item Price Numerical UPC Barcode Free text up to 50 characters IS_CALC_ LEVEL Item Management Level 0 No or 1 Yes IS_CONSIGNMENT Consignment 0 No or 1 Yes REMARKS Remarks Free text MAIN_FAMILY_KEY Main Family SUB_FAMILY_KEY Sub Family ITEM_AUTH_GROUP_KEY Item Auth Group Item Authorizations Group Key as appears in the Item Auth Group Maintenance screen Average Cost Numerical These fields are MENCE Oot not editable in the interface REWORK_PRICE Price of Reworked Numerical ITEM_WEIGHT Item Weight Numerical USER_CREATED DATE_CREATED USER_LAST_MODIFIED DATE_LAST_MODIFIED These fields are not editable in the interface and not recommended for import Import Items suppliers by ENT_ITEM_ SUPPLIERS According to this table Supplier s should be added to the Item Maintenance screen on tab Supplier Information ITEM_K
212. eeaeeeseeaeeesneaeees 168 8 3 RETURN Order to Supplier scirent aaa aaa aaa aada ia 170 8 4 RETURN Items tO Stock isnon anaa aa aaa aa 172 8 4 1 Return RUIS S neneiia n aat a ea paantel Mast a aust 172 8 4 2 Return Item to Cabinet ciiciiencctisaaettcassescdacnpeteceaanescddaanandddesavndendanabe censanedacdanandedees 173 8 5 ISSUE tem sissies vetsancnabhcadeaya a a a a aa a a aaa 175 8 5 1 ISSUS Kitni ra eaaa aeaa aa aaah ea aa aaia wee 178 8 6 STOCK COUNT eteina naaa a a a aa a a A aN aa 182 8 7 STOCK TRANSFER arferai aa e a aa aaa a a AS 184 8 8 Recorded Stock Transactions cccccceccecseseeceeeceeeeececcaeeeeeeeeeesesenceeeeeeeeeseeseaeees 185 8 8 1 Tab General ccccccccccce cece cece eeaeeeeeee eee eeeaaaneeeeeeeesageaaaneeeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneanes 188 8 8 2 Tab COSIS a tee recep nra E e E oA cle E EE E AE contd ane E E 191 8 8 3 Tab Cost Center cccccccecccesecceceeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeaeeeeeeesensccueeeeeeeeeteesnsaeees 192 8 9 PRICES of Items and Transactions c ccccceceeeeeceecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeseaeees 194 PREPOR US arsed ts prasad oe sga eee essed vedanta dane cet ahaa nes ode wee tere 195 9 1 Advanced Reports ccccccceeeeecceeceeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeesececeaeceeeeeeeseccaeaeeeeeeesesecsiaeeeeeees 195 9 1 1 Creating a MEW report ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeee eee ente ee ee ete eter eaeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesiaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaes 196 9 1 2 SAVING a REPO eect
213. eee eee etter ee eee eee ee eee e ee eeeieee ee eaeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 203 9 1 3 Finding a Saved REPOSt ee eeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeecaeeeseenaeeeseeneeeeneaes 204 9 2 Transactions Reports ccccccccccceeeeeseceeaeceeeeeeeseeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeseeecaeaeeeeeeesessnsaeeeeeees 204 9 2 1 Basic Transactions Repott ccececceceeceeeceeeeecencaeceeeeeeeesececaaeaeeeeeeeseesenasaeeeeees 205 9 2 2 Advanced Transactions Report cccccccceeeecceceeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeesenenaeeeeeeeeeenees 205 9 2 3 Issue Return Comparison ccccceceeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeececnceaeceeeeeeeseneucaeeeeeeeeeneees 206 9 3 SOCK REPOMS vis ccsri sweet cavessacsneetadesanacnaseneseadachan cacduanweseds ENa a a a Ea a 207 9 3 1 Advanced Stock Report cccccccecseccececeeeeeeeceaeaeeeeeeeeeesececaeeeeeeeeeseneaaeeeeeeeeeteees 207 9 3 2 Dead Items RED OMt ws cnccaaceciszavadanccaadecsgnedasnadcnacecsssunascateactesavianedcanddedepanncnateandhederss 208 Page 3 of 432 HLL Sots CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See MATEIX 9 3 3 Dead Bins Report cecccceccececeeeeeceneae cece ee eeseeeeeaaeaeeeeeeesececeaeaeeeeeeesessnsuaeeeeees 209 9 3 4 Stock by Bin ce 210 9 3 5 Stock by Cabinet seeesseseesserusseerrettttuetttt tnst eee tnnt truant EEEn Attn unnt En unat nnna atenua nenene 210 9 3 6 Stock by Hem o oo ee eee eee erent e ere ee errr eee erent eee eneaeeeeenaaeeeeeeaeeeeee
214. eeeeeeeeseneeecseaneeseeeeneeeeseeneeseeeens 229 11 REQUIRED PRE DEFINITIONS FOR TOUCH SYSTEM 2 0cceceeeeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeetecennnieeeeeeees 230 11 1 Define the Touch definition for COMpUtEN ccccceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeteeeseaeees 230 11 2 Define the Touch Cabinet definition for Computer cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeseneees 230 12 TOUCH INTERFACE AND INITIAL OPERATIONS 22 2 ececceeeeeeeseceeeaeeeeeeeeeseceaeaaeeeeeeeenteeseaeees 232 12 1 Login to the TOUCH Module 0 eeececeeeceneeeeeeeneeeeeecneeeeeeaeeeeeeceeeeeenaeeeeesneeeeeeaes 232 12 2 Main TOUCH Men seic nasaian a aa aa ia ia E aa a a A Ea 233 12 3 Operating Principles aaan iaraa i aaa aaa aaa 234 12 3 1 Basic System Operating Buttons aesseeeseeeerneserrrnerirreetirresrrirnaserrnneninnaetannenns 234 1232 Virtual KeybOard csser ia E EEO 235 12 3 3 Barcode Intenace a icceic icceretieatis rience shearseiden EEE EA AANE 236 12 34 Search SCHEGINS v2 ciciceceisecviavaocivead avec N cuded oath Geeta inde NE 238 12 35 Adjust Search Screens viccieccici ended edie ahd EE 243 12 3 6 gt Item INFORMATION 2 isisen cade dec viavuncivecd avec vie AEA E Ea ts 246 13 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 3 costed si coiteedt suena EAE EE EAEE eid Bikini 250 13 1 ISSUE teminen EAEE ENEE E ten aves Heda ees 250 13 1 1 Issue a Kit annsin ea caaice wea teas Ceti dicet esheets eeadev a EENE EE 257 13 1 2 Issue an Item from LOCKE ccc ceeecec
215. een will appear lolx Category Key Category Code bp Category Name General Category 3 Fill in the data Category Code Category Name Page 301 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Sten 4 Click the EJ lt Save gt button 16 3 Item Group In order to define a new item group follow the next steps 1 Go to Menu System Tables gt Item Group 2 Click the lt Add gt button and the following screen will appear EB item Group Maintenance T Group Key Group Code p Key 7 0 Group Description NoGroup 3 Fill in the data Group Code Group Description 4 Click the ta lt Save gt button 16 3 1 Add Images to Item Groups The item Group image can be displayed in the Manage and Touch modules To use this feature the folder defined in System Option 404 Group Pictures path must contain all the files with the extension as defined in System Option 204 Picture File Type When displaying item Groups in Touch the system will try to find the compatible image and to display it If no matching file is found then No Image will be displayed In Manage the image of item Groups will be displayed for Items that do not have their own image 1 Rename the image file using Item Group Code value and extension such as defined in the System Option 204 jpg gif bmp For example the image name of group with Group Code 10 will be 10 gif 2 Put the image file in the f
216. efine new users and new groups of users according to your needs see Chapter D Managing Users and Authorizations section 18 Carefully plan the required user groups It is a good idea to limit the number of user groups for easy maintenance Note For advanced use of the software a user with administrative authorities can add users with the Import module For more instructions follow Chapter D Import Data section 22 3 2 3 Adding Suppliers Run MATRIX TM MANAGE and follow these steps 1 2 Select Menu Main gt Supplier Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar Fill in Supplier Code Supplier Name and all the required fields for a new supplier Save the data by clicking the a lt Save gt button on the Menu bar For more details refer to Chapter B Base Entities gt Suppliers section 5 1 Page 38 of 432 D SEs CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Important Please note that the list of suppliers already includes a supplier called Internal Supplier This supplier is automatically added when creating a new database or updating the database to version 4 The system uses this supplier for Internal Orders and prohibits deleting his record It is also not recommended to edit its data Note For advanced use of the software a user with administrative authorities can add suppliers with the Import module For more instructions follow Chapter D Import Data section 22 3 2 4 Ad
217. eld is calculated automatically by the received orders and cannot be edited manually The value is influenced only by Receive transactions of Standard Orders Every time an item is received into the system it takes the received quantity and the value from Unit Price field from the order and calculates the average between the price in the order and the previous average cost The purpose of this field is to calculate the average cost of an item from all the purchases done for the item during the whole period of working with the system The average cost later will be used for stock transaction values such as Return Adjust Item Transfer and Count Bin and for stock valuation reports Price of Reworked The price of an item after rework regrind process If the bin is flagged with Reworked then the value of an Issue transaction from that bin will be calculated with this price Primary Supplier States the item s default supplier who will be selected as the supplier in automatic orders Item Management Level If checked the automatic order process will be managed at the item level i e there will be a Min and Max for the Item taking into account the total quantity of this item in all bins Consignment If checked the Consignment field for bins associated with this item will also be checked Create User Create Date Update User Update Date Filled automatically by the system and is cannot be changed manually 5 4 1 2
218. em Authorization Groups are defined you need to link them to User groups This means that the chosen User Group is authorized to issue items from the chosen Item Authorization Group 1 Goto Administration gt Users and Authorizations gt Authorization Manager 2 In the Authorization Manager choose the Item Authorization Group tab Here you can connect the User Group to the Item Authorization Group In order to connect a new user group simply click on the lt Add gt button and from the combo list chose the group you desire HE Authorization Manager 15 x User Group Bac evncevcanerscensaneusvees secenecvensscasenssassasenecsneoneassnsssscosssnerees ooo Low Value Medium Value No Value High Value Item Authorizations Group Name x Choose Group Hignvae ttststs i Page 305 of 432 GRD Kos CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eee MATRIX 16 4 4 Issue of Items subject to Authorization restrictions The issue option in Manage and Touch will restrict you to choose items that you are authorized to issue Such items are part of an item authorization group which is defined for the User Group allocated to the specific user Please notice an item with no group is available for all users 16 5 Shipping Method In order to define a new shipping method follow the next steps 1 Go to Menu System Tables gt Shipping Method 2 Click the a lt Add gt
219. em Codes only For example If you selected the Additional Item Code option then the program will take the Additional Item Code of item and will search for an image file with the compatible name If a match was found the file will be copied and respectively renamed by Item Code of that item 25 12SQL Script Running The SQL script running option enables editing SQL commands in order to execute them on the databases Use this command to run SQL script Page 409 of 432 t CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 By clicking the lt Open Script gt button you can find script files installed together with the software or browse for any other script Please use this command carefully as it might massively change the database IE Database Administration 4 0 Connection Server Name l Database ITMDemo User Name iTm2005 User Password E Database Tools Backup Restore Restore Itern Bin Activate Jobs Reset SQL User Password Manage Tools Stock Balance Restore Defaults Reset Matrix Admin Password Logs Send by E mail Delete Logs Replications Utilities SQL script running Process History SQL script running UPDATE ENT_ITEM_MASTER SET ITEM_COST SELECT SUPPLIER_PRICE FROM ENT_ITEM SUPPLIERS WHERE ITEM_SUPP_KEY ENT_ITEM_MASTER SUPPLIER_KEY WHERE ITEM_COST IS NULL Use the lt Execute gt button to activate the command 25 13Process
220. em bin will be updated with the received quantity and Receive transaction will be added to the list of transactions The reference fields if entered will show in the transaction 8 2 TRANSFER Internal Order This module enables transferring items from a cabinet to the receiving ordering cabinet It requires an open Internal Order that contains a list of items and quantities that need to be transferred For more information see Chapter B Orders Purchase Rework and Internal section 7 1 Open Menu Order gt Transfer Order 2 Select the order line of item that you need to issue and click the J lt Update gt button or double click the line The screen as following will appear Page 168 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 see HE Transfer Order i 5 x PO Number ae 0 0 FOOC S Line i ltem Code 3101694 item Description hemo HM90 E90A Da2 4 W32 C Source Destination Bin Code MatrixMKT 06 04 03 Ga Cabinet Code Dem In Stock 19 00 Bin Code Used Item E Used Item E Reworked E Reworked E Ordered Quantity 18 00 Received b On Route 300 Transfer Quantity Ool Maximum Quantity 6 Transfer Order Cancel The Destination frame in the above screen displays data regarding the cabinet and bin for which the order line was created and which is going to receive the item The Source frame displays data regarding the bins from which the
221. em is stored You can update bin data and link the item to additional bins To link an item to additional bin 1 Click the lt Add gt button on the right side of the grid This will display the list of bins that are not linked to an item FE Bins List Bin Code Demo2 04 07 02 el Page 111 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 amp w EE 2 Select a bin from the list and click the lt Save gt button This bin will be added to the list in the grid Continue to update data of the bin like Capacity Items in Bin etc To update data of the bin By marking a certain record in the grid and clicking the lt Update gt button the Bin Maintenance screen will appear displaying the details of the selected bin and allowing the updating of the bin For further details regarding updating a bin see Chapter B Bin section 5 3 5 4 1 6 Tab Usage This tab displays the usage data by month related to the Item The usage screen gives a good indication for the activity of the Item User can track in this tab the Usage Average Usage and Frequency or issues for the Item per month EE Item Maintenance ltem Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type p2 5505421 Demo IDI 0295 SG Icg08 Expendable F B 2006 11 0 00 0 0 000 245 898 141 283 98 977 141 397 99 139 90 199 94 570 77 243 63 205 90 293 105 419 69 170 58 100 83 000 80 000 o 0 0 0
222. eport c ccccccccceceeeeeeeenaneeeeeeeeeeesesacaeceeeeeeesennaeaeeeeeeeeneeees 216 9 8 BIN Units Report ireua aaae a a Eaa TEE ERa NEEN EE neds EERE T 217 9 9 Additional Fields RE pOttisatcc vicceceendiaes Havuetieaetdarrietavertet th a a aE 218 9 9 1 Basic Additional Fields Repott cccccceceseeeeceeceeeeeeesecencaaeeeeeeeeesetsnnueaeeeeees 218 9 9 2 Additional Fields Advanced Items Report ccccsecceceeeeeeeeseeneceeeeeeeeeteees 219 9 9 3 Additional Fields Advanced Bins Report c ccccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 220 9 9 4 Additional Fields Advanced Orders Lines Report cccccseesecceeeeeeeeeteees 221 9 10 tems RE POMS acisre naa N E a teh ats ata vine oe Ea 221 9 10 1 KitSsREPOM iascaire AE AEE REN E EE EAE A EEA dears 221 9 10 2 Item S pplier Repoft sssini aE aaa E E 222 9 10 3 item Catalog PiCtUrEs cesccicccirietieiii tiiir antin ENEE EEEE 223 910 4 Items Cost Centers i surucu EN a a Ea Ea 224 10 HELP AND TECHNICAL SUPPORT 0 cccscseeceeeesneeececseeececeaeeeeecaeeeeeecsaeeeesssateesesseeeeessiteseseaes 225 10 1 MANAGE Help Documentation cccccceeceecececeeeeecenaeeeeeeeeeesecseaeeeeeeeeeseesenaeess 225 10 2 Sending Logs from MATRIX TM ssssessrssssrnsssennanssnnnseennannannantennnnanannnaeennaanannaneennaana 226 10 3 Create an Email Report innsinn ain aai a a a aa aiaa 228 CHAPTER C MATRIX TM TOUCH MODULE 2s ecceccceseeeeeee
223. er If you run the process manually the last monthly process cannot be last month since in this case nothing will happen In order to run last month you need to Page 348 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 P USA MATRIX change it to one month before After changing any system option you need to exit the system to activate the change This is a list of the system options which affect the Monthly Process The default value for the Lead Time of Item Supplier and also Default Lead Time for the Monthly Lead Time calculation Number of months for How many months to use for calculating the Average Usage 301 Average calculations Frequency and Lead time during monthly process Last month in format MMYY that was fully processed and 303 Last Monthly Process updated automatically by the Monthly Process 304 End of Month Day What day to run the Monthly Process end of month process What time to run the Monthly Process end of month 305 End of Month Time process Average usage Average Usage can be an arithmetic average FLAT or a 900 calculation type Moving Weighted Average MWA The factor used to make the weighting of the MWA average 901 MWA factor Please use values in range of 0 1 The percentage of extreme cases between 0 0 99 when the lead time was very short or too long The Monthly Percent of Extreme Process will ignore them when calculating the average lead 902 lead time ca
224. er month ES Bin Maintenance 10 x Bin Key Bin Code Cabinet Code ltem Code ltem Description E Demo1 01 01 13 Demat i 5505421 G Demo ID10235 SG 10908 0 00 0 000 122 710 70 301 49 002 70 003 48 577 43 682 45 260 36 801 31 145 44 493 52 848 32 640 25 200 36 000 30 000 HO VOODOO DN DN Vol mM O o gm O OIMIMOsOM O O 9 V o o mM oO pay 5 3 1 6 Tab Transactions This tab displays all the transactions for the Bin Page 94 of 432 S Bin Maintenance Bin Key Bin Code Cabinet Code Item Code Item Description E Demo1 01 01 13 g Demat 5505421 gt EJ Demo IDI 0295 SG Ic908 General Stock Management Additional Fields Usage Transactions Orders Bin Units 07 1 2 admin creator 25 11 2007 1 l J 5505421 admin creator Transfer 19 07 2007 1 l 5505421 admin creator Transfer 19 07 2007 1 l l 5505421 admin creator ssue 01 02 2006 i 5505421 rachelr ssue 01 02 2006 i 1 5505421 rachelr ssue 01 02 2006 j 5505421 rachelr ssue 01 02 2006 i 5505421 rachelr ssue 01 02 2006 j 5505421 rachelr sue 01 02 2006 i 5505421 rachelr ssue 01 01 2006 5505421 rachelr r r r r r r ssue 01 01 2006 i 5505421 rache ssue 01 01 2006 j 5505421 rache ssue 01 11 2005 l 5505421 rache ssue 01 11 2005 5505421 rache ssue 01 11 2005 5505421 rache ssue 01 11 2005 j 5505
225. er e Change the Server Password or create a Server Password e Run stock balance procedures which reconcile all stock levels e Restore Database defaults from the last version installed e Reset Admin Password e Send or Delete Logs e Create replications with all needed parameters e Run important Utilities e Run SQL scripts e Display the process history which was recently run Page 392 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 amp D Entering Database Administration Go to Start Menu gt MATRIX TM gt MATRIX TM Tools gt Database Administration Programs gt an Accessories gt BOSaNOvA TCP IP gt Documents gt Michal gt Settings an Microsoft Office I Startup gt Search gt JB MSN Messenger 7 0 Gh MATRIX TM 4 Eb Matrix TM Manage Ha Le eek ROMS c Matrix TM License rtf AY Matrix TM Touch Matrix TM Settings SH Matrix TM Uninstall ase Administration HE H Ho s Ea S 4 A Once you get to the User and Password screen insert the same password and user code Log Off d you received for downloading MATRIX TM from the web Activating a command e Click the mouse on the desired option in the menu e Inthe Option parameter area fill the missing data e Activate the option button to activate the option Database Administration lei ks Connection Server Name local Data Base iTMDemo User Name iTm2005 m User Password ITM
226. ers by scheduled time The primary condition is to set manual definitions described in the previous section Chapter B Manual User Definitions section 7 2 1 1 Goto Menu Administration gt System Options Use information described in Chapter D System Options section 17 for parameters search 2 Define in the system options when to run the automatic orders process Search for Parameter 807 Auto PO Day and select the date to generate the Automatic Purchase Orders Search for Parameter 808 Auto PO Time and select the time to generate the Automatic Purchase Orders Setting these parameters will automatically create a job for the database under the name DBname AutoPOService At the scheduled time this job will automatically be executed Page 157 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 and will run the Automatic Orders process When changing the parameters the job will be recreated In order to view the status and the history of the job you can login to the Database Administration program on the computer where the database is located and view the Activate Jobs option For more information see Chapter E Activate Jobs section 24 3 Note If you have chosen in the manual definitions to create automatically Draft order you will need to edit the draft in order to convert it to an active order and then send the order manually If you have chosen to create automatically Orders with Send to Supplier the
227. es to a user to issue items from the cabinet Press on the lt Issue gt icon on the Main Menu The following operations have to be performed as a part of the issue process e Choose cost center s e Choose item e Choose bins and quantities to be issued e Execute the Issue transaction e Stock Shortage Choose cost center Page 250 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 In the Issue process before the user selects items the user must select the cost centers to which the desired items will be issued However the system administrator can configure the system in the way that cost center information will not be mandatory The number of cost center headers their names input types Choose from list Numeric keyboard Alpha Numeric keyboard or BarCode possible and default values and hierarchy between them and more options like required fields or not changeable or not are configured by the MANAGE module For more information read Chapter D Define Cost Centers section 19 and Chapter D User Cost Centers section 20 Example The following screen shows a sample configuration of four cost center headers Cost Centers STE admin ITMDemo 1007 2007 P Gi Input Cost Centers Department Drilling Work Center WC Drilling Job Number 236799 mw po Machine ES nn m C eD OOOOOOSO QK Page 251 of 432 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2
228. etails screen is displayed by clicking the lt Add gt button an update page will be displayed in an insert mode enabling the user to insert a new record by filling the necessary fields and saving them J Update When a search or details page is displayed and a certain record is selected by clicking the lt Update gt button an update page will be displayed enabling the user to update the selected record ic Delete When a search or details screen is displayed and a certain record is selected by clicking the lt Delete gt button the selected record will be deleted lS Refresh By clicking the lt Refresh gt button _the current record s data will be refreshed updated a Back By clicking the lt Back gt button the previous record from a search list will be opened for maintenance Next By clicking the lt Next gt button the next record from a search list will be opened for maintenance es Save amp Close On the maintenance screen By clicking the lt Save amp Close gt button any modification made to the selected record will be updated in the database and the current window will be closed On the search screen By clicking the lt Save amp Close gt button the definitions of search screen will be saved and the window will be closed Next time you open the same search screen it will load according to the saved definitions The followin Page 59 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Gui
229. f the Description field The screen Saved Report Parameters as following will appear Hax Saved Query Key E Query Name Create User z Application Name Transactions Repor gt Search Select Found 9 Records TR Report 2 Listing Only Chart design Y fiel Transactions Report TR Report 3 Listing Only Chart design Y fiel Transactions Report TR Report 4 Listing amp Subtotals Standard de Transactions Report TR Report 5 Subtotals Only Standard design Transactions Report TR Report 6 Subtotals Only Chart design Y f Transactions Report In this screen you can search for saved reports by filling in any of the fields in the top part of the screen If you don t fill in the fields all saved reports will be shown To access the saved reports which match the selected fields click the la lt Search gt button Then select the line that contains the saved report that you wish to view and click the lt Select gt button or double click on the line This will return you to the previous screen with the saved report parameters You can modify the parameters if you wish and then run the report by clicking the la lt Search gt button You can also delete an unwanted report 9 2 Transactions Reports Transaction reports allow you to follow each stock operation performed in the system by either the TOUCH or MANAGE module Page 204
230. file The file will be sent by email or will remain on the hard drive accordingly to your selection For using a periodic report that will run every day or week be sure that the date range in the report also matches the periodic selections like yesterday last week or last month Page 381 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 23 2 Activate the reports In order to enable the reports to run fully automatically there should a job DBName ReportsEngine for Reports on the server This job is activated by the operating system To create the job 1 Set the system option 209 to YES to create the job if itis already YES then change to NO and back to YES 2 Login to the Database Administration and check the existence of the job by the Activate Jobs option The job will run automatically by the operating system at the scheduled time You should also verify that the SQL Server Services are started See more details regarding Jobs and SQL Server Services in Chapter E Activate Jobs section 25 24 Interfaces This section describes the screens that support interface with ERP systems for example SAP Please follow the instructions below for creating the required definitions 24 1 Settings Login to the MANAGE application and follow these instructions 24 1 1 System Options 1 Open Menu Administration gt System Options 2 Set the following parameters System Option 111 Number of reference fie
231. g for example cost center WC Grinding 3 there will be no items displayed for issue because this cost center was not linked to any item and its header Work Center was marked to limit items 20 User cost centers This option defines default cost centers per User When the User goes to issue items the cost centers assigned to this User will be displayed This can save time and prevent mistakes The User is allowed to change the default cost centers if authorized to do so Page 345 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 1 Goto Menu Administration gt Users and Authorizations gt User Cost Centers HE User Cost Center Maintenance User Name admin Cost Center Name Department z Default Value Is Changeable Fields description User Name Lists all the users defined in the system Cost Center Name Cost center headers defined in the system Default Value List of cost centers belonging to the selected Cost Center Name Is Changeable Authorizes the user to modify the default cost center 2 Inthe User Name field select the user for whom you wish to define the cost centers Then select the Cost Center Name and the default cost center in the Default Value field Finally Mark Is Changeable field vV if the User is authorized to modify the default cost centers 3 Click the lt Save gt button 4 Repeat the same steps for each Cost Center Name Page 346 of 432
232. g TOUCH the system will log that User in automatically and will not 1008 User for Automatic login log him out after timeout 1010 Show Keyboard on Item Search Show virtual keyboard when opening search screen 1011 Show Additional Item Code Show the additional Item Code Description on grid 1012 Barcode Reader prefix Prefix that Barcode Reader adds to the scanned code Waiting time in minutes from opening drawer until Waiting time until Forcing considering the ISSUE or RETURN transaction as 1013 transactions completed if the drawer was not closed Display options for issuing KIT as Assembly or as Separate Items If unchecked kit will be issued as 1014 Display options for issuing KIT Separate Items Page 320 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Ss L Sete MATRIX Qf See 17 4 Special System Options This section explains about system options that require special attention and described here with more details since wrong values for these options might cause different processes in the system not to work as expected A lot of the system options influence automatic processes therefore it is recommended to set them when initiating the database and before the processes will start to run Database Version This parameter must use sign for decimal value according to your regional settings For example for European settings use coma and for US settings use dot Installation Path
233. g a Bin ee eee 87 5 3 2 Deleting a Bin oo eececee cence ee eeeeeeeeeeeee eee eaeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeseenaeeeesenaaees 97 5 3 3 Bin Location cccceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeee eee aeaeceeeeeeeeeedeaaaeeeeeeeeeseeceaaeeeeeeeeesetsncieeeeeeeeeeenes 98 5 4 SI ee ees Sone E EAE teat causa eee rates Sateen pap ves tate AEE E O 100 5 4 1 Adding ItOMS eee cece ee eeneee ee eeee ener eene eee eeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeneeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeesenaeeeeeeeaaees 100 5 4 2 Copying an Re ee 115 5 4 3 Kit Management eeeecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeteeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 117 5 4 4 ITEM Life Cycle 0 2 2 cc cececccccceceeeceeec cee ener ee eececeaaeaeceeeeeeeseeanaeceeeeeseseneaeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 118 5 4 5 Add Images to ItGMS s 2 5cc ss2 cibeevencceeisaeesdessededenssaeyesivisageedeiaedecenssaetheesaaacaeviaasaedens 122 5 4 6 Key Management oces seir EE AE es 123 5 5 Additional Fields 4 icicccrvescccclancaauatveccaccsaivades tes cctecenaaccntsadencsuawinadesseceacadsaaeacentaaedecsa 125 5 6 Defaults List a cess occecessescecchsedencctiesddccstehoee ania aaa nai a E aia taa aa Eiaa ih 127 STOCK MANAGEMENT LEVELS sesririricinrtenkt di iRANrEEAARNA ANA RERNA AK ARARKAERA RARA ANNA REENA AR ANEN RE AAKRE AXXAAEEN KRK 128 6 1 Stock Levels iiaae aina rri aa Ein ia aaa Aa aa aaa aaa aiaa 128 6 2 Stock ROLL UP by System Options 904 amp 905 ussesssseserssesrrsserrssrerrrssrernssrerrssne 130 ORDERS STANDARD REWORK
234. g permissions with the System Administrator GE6002 No images of the Items and or Groups are displayed on TOUCH Problem No images of the Items and or Groups are displayed on Touch Possible reason This may happen if the system options for the image files are not properly defined or the current user does not have reading permissions Solution Check if the folders defined in system options 404 and 404 contain images If yes check the writing permissions with the System Administrator Page 432 of 432
235. g screen will appear ioj Cost Center Name Work Center i Cost Center Label Work Center Cost Center Sequence Booo Manual Input Type Choose from List gt Is Required rA Cost Center Parent Department Min Length 6 Max Length to Remarks ooo ltem Limitation ro Fields description Cost Center Name Cost center name Cost Center Label Cost center label Cost Center Sequence The location of this header in the hierarchy of all the cost center headers The software supports displaying up to four cost center headers Manual Input Type Four options are available Choose from List User will select cost center from a list To see a list add the cost center details to the header Numeric Keyboard User will input value manually inserting only numerical characters In Touch a virtual numerical keyboard will be displayed Page 331 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Is Required Cost Center Parent Min Length Max Length Item Limitation Remarks Alpha Numeric Keyboard User will input value manually by inserting any character In Touch a virtual alpha numerical keyboard will be displayed BarCode User will input value using barcode reader only In Touch no virtual alpha numerical keyboard will be displayed If marked user will have to insert value for the cost center header Otherwise he will not be able to continue the operation Cost center header from whi
236. gain 5 2 1 1 Tab General Page 73 of 432 GRD ee CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eee MATEIX alol x HE Cabinet Maintenance Key PM Coe Name MatixDemot ooo General Cabinet Units Cabinet Type Matrix g Site DemoSite i Stock Management Level item Management Level gt Show Ctrl Error Never Cabinet sequence fi I Choose Bin on FIFO Rule COM Port fi M Issue Any Quantity M Open all bins M Show Drawer PM Is Internal Order Alert E Mail toolsadministraton company com Remarks Update Create User admin creator Update User admin creator Create Date 7022005 Update Date 06 06 2007 Fields Description This tab contains general details regarding the cabinet Code A code for the cabinet which is used for generating bins for the drawers Name A name for the cabinet Cabinet Type MATRIX KARDEX or NON AUTOMATIC types are available MATRIX A cabinet that has drawers with predefined bin configurations User will be able to build bins and bin units automatically by selecting the matching drawer type from a list of nine available configurations You can also create the matching drawer types manually for more information see Chapter B Adding Drawer Types section 5 2 3 KARDEX A warehouse called Kardex Shuttle which contains open trays for storing large tools This cabinet type can be connected by data cable to the MATRIX machine and activated through the
237. ge Page 28 of 432 Attention x Database with name ITM exists Do you want to replace it e Click lt Yes gt to overwrite the existing database with the database from the new installation e Click lt No gt to return to the previous window 12 Click the lt Close gt button to finish the installation x e o t eK MATRIX v MATRIX TM has been successfully installed Click Close to exit Please use Windows Update to check for any critical updates to the NET Framework Cancel lt Back i 9 Note If you included Touch module in the installation then after the installation is complete the TOUCH module will be inserted into the Startup programs and will run automatically when the PC starts In order to cancel the automatic run go to Start gt Programs gt Startup and delete the TOUCH shortcut Page 29 of 432 MATRIX SE CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 z 2 5 Install MATRIX Tools MATRIX Tools will install a simulator which allows MATRIX TOUCH to simulate a MATRIX cabinet This simulator is used for demonstration purposes where you want to show how the TOUCH works without the need for a cabinet Note If you plan to work with physical cabinet then you do not need to install this tool and you can skip to the next instruction 1 Click on the VmDemoSetup msi file in order to check the Hardware iz Matrix Tools Welcome to the Matrix Tools Setup Wizard The ins
238. ge Page 398 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 o gt A eme lt O sol 14 37 The screen as following will be displayed Fo SOL Server Service Manager PTEI Server LIORAR hd SOL Server z Distributed Transaction Coordinator Services SOL Server Agent Start Continue i Pause yo JV Auto start service when OS starts Stopped LIORAR MSSOLServer Select the server name in Server field Check the box Auto start service when OS starts to ensure that jobs will continue to be active also if the server is restarted This should locate the link to Service Manager in the Windows Startup menu as on the following screen Sees Nene e sie Command Prom F ZENworks for Desktops 4 5 nager All Programs S Adobe Reader 7 0 2 Adobe Acrobat Speed Launt cation C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server 80 Tools Binn Internet Explorer aY Touch we msn 4 Inthe Services field select SQL Server If the service was not activated yet click on the Start Continue arrow to activate the service and wait until it is ready 5 Inthe Services field select SQL Server Agent If the service was not activated yet click on the Start Continue arrow to activate the service and wait until it is ready 6 Close the program The icon of the services on the Taskbar will have a green arrow If so the services will be active and the jobs will automatically run Page
239. ge Main Operations Order Repori System Tables Bee EAEg aa aes CITMIS Se oO in Transaction G Issue Return Order K Search fompleted Records Found ITMDemo admin Shortcuts Note If a user has limited authorizations the system will only display the authorized options after login After successful login to the Manage module you are ready to start working with the software by adding your data to the database The recommended steps are described in the following sections Page 37 of 432 ene CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See S 6 6 0 amp A sad MATA 3 2 2 Adding Users After installing the software the database will include one user called admin with administrator authorities We recommend that you create your own administrator user and login with a new user name 1 2 Run MATRIX TM MANAGE and login with admin user Select Menu Administration gt Users and Authorizations gt Users Glicicthe B sagas butonon the Wenubar Fill in User Name Password and all the required fields for a new user Save the data by clicking the lt Save gt button on the Menu bar For this user define the User Group with administrative authorities Save the data and logout by closing the application For more details refer to Chapter D Managing Users and Authorizations section 18 Run MATRIX TM MANAGE again and login with the new added user D
240. groups of users helps to manage the authorization level of each user A large number of users can be connected up to one group or one user can be connected to a number of groups 18 1 Group of Users In order to define a new group only the name of the group must be entered 1 In the main menu go to Menu Administration gt Users and Authorizations gt User Groups Click the lt Add gt button on the Menu bar The following screen will appear ioixi G Is Budget User Group Basie SSOSOSC S s Budge Vv Budget Amount for Issue fioo00 Number Of Days 100 Fill in the fields for a new User Group User Group User group name The following fields are relevant only in case you want to restrict issue for this user roup see also Chapter D Budget by Amount section 16 7 2 Is Budget Check the box if the group has a budget limitation for issuing Budget Amount for Issue Fill in the budget limit amount The amount currency is the System Currency System Option 203 Number of Days Fill in the number of days for the budget check 4 Click the c lt Save gt button on the Menu bar Page 324 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 All the authorizations of the system are described in the authorization management see Chapter D Authorization Manager section 18 3 Connection of a user name to a group is done through the definition of users see Chapter D Users section 18
241. gt Choose an Item admin ITMDemo 41 07 2007 P Enter an Item searen lt 3 Advanced C aroun 5 Demo HM90 E90A D20 3 W20 C Milling Demo HM90 E90A D32 4 WW32 C Milling Demo HM90 E90A D 75 3 W 75 C Milling 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 W 75 C Milling Demo HM90 E90A D 62 2 C 62 LB Milling Demo CHAMRING 110 WN32 09 Drilling Demo CHAMRING 080 WN20 06 Drilling DemoDR MF 10L 2 25D 12A4 05 Drilling DemoDR MF 10R 2 25D 12A 05 Demo TNMS 431 12 IC20 Demo TPGH 2 2 L IC70 Note If the desired item has a stock shortage meaning the quantity in stock is zero you can select the item in order to send an alert about the shortage For instructions read the Stock Shortage paragraph below Choose bins and quantities to be Issued If you select an item of KIT type for instructions please read the Issue a Kit paragraph below Otherwise the following screen will appear Page 253 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gme Issue Item Touch admin ITMDemo 19 11 2006 3101749 Demo HMS0 E90A D1 25 3 VV 75 C Demo HM90 E904 D1 25 3 VY 75 C Demo1 g Demo1 09 01 04 OOLOOOOOO The top part of the screen displays the selected item s data and picture Beneath the item data a table appears containing a record of all bins that are associated with the chosen item Note In the line marked in red displayed an ex
242. gt System Options The following screen will appear Eel Search System Options Group Option Key Option Name l Option Description l Found 47 Records Customer E mail Ad E mail Mail From address for outgoing mail ryanai iscar co il Mail server E mail SMTP mail Server name or address iscarexch Mail subject E mail Mail From Subject for outgoing mail New mail from Matrix Auto purchase Print Purchase Auto purchase Print Destination E Mail Auto purchase Purchase How to run auto purchase O No run 1 Make P Recommendation Quantity percent to Purchase When calculating lead time if an order was sup PO code prefix Purchase First part of the PO number Default file format fo Purchase Default file format for Order Auto PO Day Purchase What day to generate the automatic PO Auto PO Time Purchase What time to generate the automatic PO Default Site Key Purchase Default Site Key for New Order Average usage calc Planning Average Usage can be an arithmetic average MWA factor Planning This is the factor used to make the weighting of 0 3 Percent of extreme Planning This is the percentage of extreme cases were 0 1 Stock Management I Planning Stock manage level used for the automatic ord All levels Requires password Touch Does the user have to input password after ba No 2 At the top part of the screen in the
243. h parameter value in the example Item Key is more than 52 3 Click the la lt Search gt button on the toolbar Page 62 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 The grid in the lower part of the screen will display the records that match the defined criteria The number of found records will be displayed above the grid in the example Found 9 Records 4 If the desired record was found mark it in the list and select the desired operation on the toolbar Otherwise make another search Important In all search fields where the user manually types the value to be searched you can type a partial value and then use the sign It will display all the records that include the partial value For example if you are searching for all the Bins that their Bin Code starts with Demo1 01 type Demo1 01 and search Note For performance reasons the number of records which are displayed in the search screen is limited This limitation can be changed by the administrator in System Option 205 Number of Rows to Display To change the value open Menu Administration gt System Options gt parameter 205 normally set to 2000 Change search view A User can now change the view of generic search screens These changes can be saved Available operations e Sort the list Click the column header in order to sort the list in ascending or descending order e Resize window Click the search screen corner and
244. hange the cost centers and confirm the change by clicking the lt Save gt button To cancel click the lt Exit gt button Page 193 of 432 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 8 9 PRICES of Items and Transactions When a stock transaction is created in the system the system calculates the value of the transaction depending on the transaction type the transaction quantity and source of the price The following descriptions describe all the price fields and their influence in the system Prices fields in MANAGE module Issue Price Bin Maintenance not mandatory field Item Price Item Maintenance not mandatory field Supplier Price Item Maintenance gt Item Supplier mandatory field Average Cost Item Maintenance not editable field Price of Reworked Item Maintenance not mandatory field Unit Price Order Maintenance In the Order If the supplier of the order does not supply the item that is in the order the price for the item in the order for field Unit Price will be taken by default from Item Price If the supplier of the order supplies the item that is in the order the price for the item in the order for field Unit Price will be taken by default from Supplier Price In Receive transaction The transaction value will always take the price from the Unit Price field of the received order line In Issue transaction If Issue Price field has a value the transaction value first wi
245. he definitions the basic screen enables you to save this report template and to schedule its running Therefore a system user for example can receive by email the dynamic results of a report run at scheduled time For more information see Chapter D Report Scheduler section 23 Page 195 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 San The available advanced reports Transactions report Issue Return Comparison Orders report Usage report Stock report Stock Shortage report Item Additional Fields report Bin Additional Fields report Order Additional Fields report 9 1 1 Creating a new report 1 Open the relevant advanced report screen For example Advanced Transactions Report E Transactions Report lol xi iption Dedede DEMO Transactions report i Filter And Grouping Choose Fields Report Type Group By Design Report E _ C Standard Chart I Listing No Subtotals Quarter xl I Listing Subtotals User Name X Field Quarter T Subtotals Only Y Field fouantity Chart Bar 3D Color Style Confetti Condition operator All conditions At least one condition I Simple Title Transaction Ty EA a end H ER E Adjust Bin Quantity Receive Return To Cabinet Transfer zero Issue Stock Count Updated Yaa lt 0 0 7 ag al s loal alsloly amp Page 196 of 432 CITMS oe ee
246. he next paragraphs 3 Click the 5 lt Save gt button on the Menu bar Page 383 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 amp gt The following screen will be displayed HE Interface Maintenance 10 x Interface Key ir Interface Ba Interface Type Transaction Interface Name linterfacetoSAP Remarks 4 Online m Server Name iscarexch User admin Password jaial Client Where ANSACTION_TYPE_KEY number 3 5 Cost Center code Department System Number Logical System Matrix Value ae RRANSACTION_TYPE_KEYenumbers C Remarks o This screen enables you to set the connection definitions between Matrix and Interface By selecting a field line in the grid the Value and Remarks fields will be displayed according to the input type textual list search by browse 4 Select line by line to set the values for fields Select the Where field to set the conditions for transactions that need to be transferred Click the browse button to open the following screen Page 384 of 432 TRANSACTION _TYPE_KEY TRANSACTION TYPE KERR TRANSACTION _TYPE_NAt The combo list displays all the relevant fields regarding transactions Use the lt Add gt button on the right side of the grid to add a new condition and set a condition value for it or update delete the existing lines J lt Update gt lt Delete gt Click the button to change its sign
247. he stock in the bin to zero remove the value from the Item Code field by selecting the first empty value from the list and then delete the bin Page 97 of 432 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 5 3 3 Bin Location Each bin has its physical location known as Bin Units and visual location known as the Bin Code Physical location The physical location of the bin is defined by the location of the bin latch relative to the drawer slots The physical location of the bin is used for defining the X Y Z coordinates for creating the bin unit in order to communicate with the cabinet For example the physical location of the blue bin from the diagram below will be Y 3 Number of the drawer controller socket on the side board from top to bottom Z 5 Location of bin latch from front to back X 4 Location of bin latch from left to right This location is stored in the Cabinet Units in the cabinet For this follow Main gt Cabinet select a Cabinet and then tab Cabinet Units For more information follow Chapter B Tab Cabinet units section 5 2 1 2 As seen when removing side panel Visual location The visual location of a bin is defined by the location of the bin relative to the left front corner The visual location of the bin is used for the name of the bin called a Bin Code in the MATRIX TM software modules For example the visual location of the blue bin from the diagram below will be Drawer 2
248. he stock of the bin therefore the physical stock in the bin must be also taken out 8 8 1 Tab General This tab displays the general transaction details date and time of the transaction etc For any transaction type except ISSUE The tab does not enable to edit fields Page 188 of 432 CITMS General Costs m Transaction MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Date 11712 2007 17 40 User admin creator Issued for Quantity Transaction quantity Quantity before Transaction ge 00 3 00 Remarks PO For ISSUE transaction The tab enables to edit Issue for field the name of the person to whom an item was issued Remarks field and to Update transaction quantity by lt Update Quantity gt button General Costs Cost Centers Transaction Date j2oni2007 13 50 User admin creator Issued for admin creator Quantity Transaction quantity Quantity before Transaction 25 00 Update Quantity 10 00 Remarks To update fields edit value and click the lt Save gt button on the Menu Bar Update Quantity On the right hand side of the General tab appears the Transaction Quantity To modify this follow the next steps 9 Note Only Issue transactions support changing the quantity 1 Click the lt Update Quantity gt button The Adjustment Quantity screen below will then appear Page 189 of 432 9 C
249. hed to one master cabinet with the Touch screen The master cabinet sequence must be 1 and the other chained cabinets must be numerated by sequence The COM port used by the TOUCH application to communicate with the cabinet If selected when the auto purchase process is executed it will create internal orders instead of purchase orders Page 75 of 432 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Internal orders facilitate transferring stock to this cabinet from other cabinets Site Location site of the cabinet This can be the factory where the cabinet is located Show CTRL Error Mode for displaying error messages on the TOUCH module if there is a problem opening bins Never Always Only in Issue or Only in Issue amp Receive mode Choose Bin on FIFO Rule If selected the item that in the cabinet bins will be suggested for issue by First In First Out rule This means that the bin filled with the item first will be suggested for issue first This parameter is not active Issue Any Quantity If selected user will have no limit to issue any desired quantity Otherwise the user will be able to issue only all of the quantity that is in the bin Show Drawer If selected when opening the drawer a Drawer Mapping window will be displayed on the TOUCH module Alert E Mail E Mail address of person who is responsible for the stock in order to alert him about a Zero Issue transaction stock out Remarks Free
250. here are 3 cases where an item can be returned 1 Item type is defined as Durable and the bin type is defined Used 2 Item type is defined as Kit and the bin type is defined Used 3 Item type is defined as Reworkable and the bin type is defined Used and Do not Issue Return item Press on the lt Return gt icon from the Main screen 1 Search and choose the item you request to return 2 The Return Tools screen will then appear 9 Note The text in red above the table describes the next operation to be performed Page 275 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATRIK admin ITMDemo 24 12 2006 5502149 Durable Demo TPGH 2 1 XL 1C70 Demo TPGH 2 1 XL IC70 Choose Bin and quantity Demo1 1 Demo1 01 01 05 NO 0 00 1 OOOOOOOOO N 3 Input the quantity to be returned in the Return field Items may be returned to multiple bins at the same time if they are located in the same drawer The quantities can be updated by using the virtual keyboard or Add Reduce buttons Press on the lt Return gt button Open the lit up drawer and return the item s to the bin s Close the drawer N OQU e The quantities will be updated when the drawer closes Note You can return a quantity of items that exceeds the bin capacity if the bin is defined as Allow Over Capacity otherwise you can return only up to the bin capacity limit Page 276 of 432
251. his item these fields will be disabled 3 Inthe Cabinet Code and Bin Code select the cabinet and bin from which you want to return the items 4 Fill in the quantity that you want to return up to the Maximum Quantity the lesser of the stock in the bin and the quantity previously received the return reason in the remark field and click the lt Return to Supplier gt button Page 171 of 432 RJ re T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 oSA MATRIX Qj PE EE 8 4 RETURN Items to Stock This screen allows you to return used items to the cabinet for reuse 8 4 1 Return Rules The RETURN option for item depends on the Item Type Bin Type System Option 905 and the combination between them In the following table see the cases when the Return option is available and when it is not RETURN option by Item type System Option 905 Summary The Item Types that can be returned all except Expendable The Bin Types that can accept those items for return Used bin can accept Durable Kit Reworkable item type with no other condition New and Reworked bins can accept only Durable Kit item type and only if system option 905 Yes See more information in Chapter B ITEM Life Cycle section 5 4 4 Page 172 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATRO 8 4 2 Return Item to Cabinet In order to return a used item to stock follow the next steps 1 Open Menu
252. ields Advanced Bins Report This screen enables the user to create a customized report for values of additional fields of BIN entities based on the records of the basic additional fields report It also enables the user to save the definitions and run the report at scheduled time To run the report open Menu Reports gt Additional Fields Report gt Additional Fields Advanced Bins Report Please refer to Chapter B Advanced Reports section 9 1 for instructions how to build and run an Advanced Report Page 220 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 9 9 4 Additional Fields Advanced Orders Lines Report This screen enables the user to create a customized report for values of additional fields of PURCHASE ORDER based on the records of the basic additional fields report It also enables the user to save the definitions and run the report at scheduled time To run the report open Menu Reports gt Additional Fields Report gt Additional Fields Advanced Orders Lines Report Please refer to Chapter B Advanced Reports section 9 1 for instructions how to build and run an Advanced Report 9 10 Items Reports 9 10 1 Kits Report This report displays all the kits in the system It details for each kit the component items and their quantities in the kit The information is displayed for viewing To change a kit or its component items select the record and click the right mouse button For the
253. ill allow inserting a number of items in the bin which exceeds the specified capacity Default value checked Default Issue Quantity The default number of items that will be issued per one Issue Price Do not Issue Items in Bin Issued Quantity Ordered Quantity Rework Orders Draft issue This value can be modified The item s price used for the Issue transactions If no price exists the price will be taken from the Item Price If checked the system will not allow issuing items from this bin Default value not checked The current stock quantity of items in the bin When this number is modified a stock adjustment will take place see additional details below The issued quantity from this bin if the associated item type is Durable Supplies information about the number of items issued that should be returned to stock The quantity of ordered items for this bin The quantity of items sent to regrind process from this bin The quantity of items in Draft status for this bin Page 89 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Internal Order The quantity of items in an Internal Order Last Count Day The date of the most recent stocktaking Return item options In the table below you will find an explanation as to how the item types connect to the different bin flags This is our recommendation it is possible also to work differently Bin Flags Item Type
254. ilter Press on the Sea lt Search gt button to display all records and scroll down to the desired record 12 3 4 2 Search by Barcode reader Set the focus on the location line and scan the barcode The barcode will be entered into location line and only the relevant records will be displayed in the list See more information in Chapter C Barcode Interface section 12 3 3 Enter an Item p e 12 3 4 3 Search by Virtual keyboard Page 239 of 432 MAT i lt v CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 3 Press on the shows button on the bottom part of the screen in order to display virtual keyboard Enter item code item description or part of them and press on the seo lt Search gt button 12 3 4 4 Search by Group or by Item Image This search allows you to locate an item by its Group or Image 1 Press on the orm lt Group gt button in the Choose an Item screen The following screen will appear Item selection No Group Drilling Iso Turn Tooling Milling Turn Groove Threading 2 Select the appropriate product group and Page 240 of 432 2 SS cw T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATRIZD 3 To view all the items of the selected group as a LIST press on the A lt Item List gt button In order to return to the full list open the window again and press on the lt Cancel gt button 4 To view all the items of the selected group as IMAGES press o
255. ink contains the following details the file s name its full path type and description fe Internal Order Maintenance E 15 o x PO Number PO Code Supplier Supplier Name Shipping Method pox E intemal oo internal Supplier D HL 3 CC General Details Additional Fields Links Address Document Name a Path DE Description OO CB orem Adding Updating Links 1 Click the J lt Add gt or L lt Update gt button before updating select the required row in the grid The following screen will appear Page 148 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Links x Document Name ETMS Help chm Path C Program Files MATRIX TM 4 0 helpFiles en US Description 2 If you need to attach a file to the order click the lt Insert Update file gt button select file and the Name Path fields will be filled automatically Otherwise type the fields manually 3 Click the lt Save gt button to save the record 7 1 5 Tab Address This tab displays addresses and contact information of the ordering site and the supplier Page 149 of 432 LD T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 H Standard Order Maintenance loj x PO Number PO Code Supplier Supplier Name Shipping Method pox B demo j liscar amp D HL SendOrder General Details Additional Fields Links Address m Delivery Addresses Contact Person Tim McDavid
256. ins in the depth number of rows Drawer Type Code Insert any drawer code For example K2x6 for drawer of Kardex type with configuration of 2 rows and 6 columns Fill in the values and click the lt Create Drawer Type gt button This will create an empty grid by the defined size which we will use as a base for defining Bin Units Moving a mouse over the grid will display its coordinates Page 84 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 a2 E Create Drawer Type x Drawer Type Key js Drawer Type Code k26 a Cabinet Type Kardex 7 as f es E L Buia Drawer Bin Code 02 04 4 In order to build a bin for each grid division click the lt Build Drawer gt button and it will automatically create all the bin codes Otherwise if you want to create bin codes based on a few divisions continue to the next step for manual definitions 5 Click the D lt Add gt button on this screen in order to add a Bin Code The following screen will be displayed Page 85 of 432 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 6 Insert value for Bin Code for example 01 05 for a bin in the first row and fifth column and click the E lt Save gt button 7 Select on the grid the divisions that you want to use for this Bin Code You can select more than one division from those which are closely linked By default it will select the first available division
257. is module supports receive of all the types of order Standard Order Order of new items from supplier vendor This order type can contain any type of item Durable Kit Reworkable Expendable Rework Order Order to rework regrind items by a regrinding supplier This order can contain Reworkable item type Internal Order Order of items issued from one cabinet by the Transfer Orders option for transfer to another cabinet the ordering cabinet This order can contain any type of item 8 1 1 Receive Rules The RECEIVE option for an order line depends on the Item Type Bin Type System Options 904 amp 905 Order Type and the combination between them In the following tables see the cases where the Receive option is available and when it is not RECEIVE by system option 904 Influence only on Reworkable item type RECEIVE System Option 904 NO Page 163 of 432 RJ g T MS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 oSA MATRIX y y YES N RECEIVE by system option 905 Influence only on Durable Kit item types System Option 905 Summary The item type Expendable can only be new cannot be reworked therefore it is received only from standard order and not influenced by system options The item type Reworkable is influenced only by system option 904 The item types Durable and Kit are influenced only by system option 905 See
258. ist gt Cost Center Parent Department gt Max Length fo Remarks Item Limitation vw Open Touch application and test the results in the Issue module Page 337 of 432 RP Cost Centers admin ITMDemo 21 07 2008 Please input the following data Department Grinding 200 Work Center Grinding 200 Machine Grinding Machine 11 e00 Job Number Po OOLOOOOOO Department Grinding Work Center WC Grinding 1 or WC Grinding 2 And continue Page 338 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ge a ED Item selection a 0 x admin ITMDemo Please select an Item Item Code Group Item Description Additional Item Description 3101749 Milling Demo HM90 E90A D1 2 5 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 The screen of the items will filter the list and will display only the item that was linked to the selected cost centers Note If selecting for example cost center WC Grinding 3 there will be no items displayed for issue because this cost center was not linked to any item and its header Work Center was marked to limit items 19 3 2 Link Items to COST CENTER Described here is the second option for making the required definitions This way the user will link items to COST CENTER using Cost Center Detail Maintenance screen Selecting these cost centers in Touch will display the item The instructions are based on the existing cost centers and items which are part of
259. ith no cabinet machine and no simulator Simulator working virtually with simulator cabinet For more information please refer to Chapter A Connect to the Database section 3 1 15 2 Working with different languages One of the specialties of the system is its ability to work with different languages The MATRIX TM software has a very strong language support You can see what languages are supported by MATRIX if you pull down the Language menu of the Setting Configuration Editor through Menu Administration gt Settings 15 2 1 Defining Texts All existing Texts in the system are saved under the menu Menu Administration gt Texts Each text in the system is defined with a text code For each text there is defined a number of translations to different languages The default language is English en US The system manager adds the translated text for the new language There are 4 types of texts 1 Page Titles Heading of each page 2 User controls Field names within the screens 3 General Texts General texts For example Button names 4 Messages 15 2 2 Search Texts 1 Enter menu Menu Administration gt Texts Page 298 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 x Texts 10 x Text Key m Text Root Key i twtstsi zCY Text Code OoOO Text O f Culture Po Found 3000 Records 4 4 Add Add1 English 5 5
260. k the box of Item Management Level field Select Stock Management tab and choose the following settings Look at the Minimum and Maximum levels which are calculated by the system If they are sufficient you do not need to change any data in this tab If you wish to override those values do the following Select Item row from the grid Page 156 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Fill in the value for Minimum Quantity field Fill in the value for Maximum Quantity field Fill in the date for Expire Date field This date will be effective for creating automatic orders according to minimum and maximum quantities that were inserted manually Override column When this date expires the automatic orders will be created according to the minimum and the maximum quantities that are calculated automatically Calculated column 8 To create the automatic orders based on the manual definitions without scheduling you need to run the manual process The manual process will compare between the current stock and the required stock and will create the automatic orders if any stock shortage will be found For more information read Chapter D Automatic PO Process section 21 2 Otherwise to create the automatic orders by scheduled time please continue to Chapter B Schedule the Automatic Orders section 7 2 2 7 2 2 Schedule the Automatic Orders This section describes the steps for creating automatic ord
261. ke the automatic PO process a scheduled process to run daily or weekly You can schedule this task through the task scheduler You can also run this option manually through the menus 1 Go to Menu Administration gt Manual Process 2 Select the Automatic PO Process option 3 If you want to create orders only for a specific Supplier Cabinet Site select the values from the lists Otherwise if you do not choose any of the values the automatic process will create orders for all the suppliers cabinets and sites by its stock shortage details Please notice that orders will be split for every supplier and every site 4 Click the lt Commit gt button to send the order Page 351 of 432 2 23 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 s Menuai Process x C Monthly Usage Process Automatic PO Process Supplier Name supp1 Cabinet Name Site Commit Following you can find the system options which are related to the automatic PO process 802 Auto purchase How to run auto purchase O No run 1 Create purchase Draft 2 Create purchase Orders 3 Create purchase Orders and Send to supplier 807 Auto PO Day What day to generate the automatic PO 808 Auto PO Time What time to generate the automatic PO 903 Stock Management level Stock manage level used for the automatic order calculation 1 BIN level ordering 2 ITEM CABINET level ordering 3 ITEM level ordering 4 Combination
262. kup will also create a transaction which you can track in the Process History option Use the lt Backup gt button to activate the command 25 2 Restoring the Database The Restore option lets you to restore a database from backup file bak Page 394 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Use this option when there is a need e To create a new and empty MATRIX TM database e To restore a database that was previously backed up into a new or existing database Database Administration 4 0 Connection Server Name local Database liTMDemoverao User Name iTm2005 User Password E Database Tools Backup Restore Item Bin Activate Jobs Reset SQL User Password Manage Tools Stock Balance Restore Defaults Reset Matrix Admin Password Logs Send by E mail Delete Logs Replications Utilities SQL script running Process History To restore database Restore Restore File CAProgram Files MATRIX TM 4 0 ServerSetup DB VIT ee New Database Name CTMS M New 17 12 2007 13 00 31 Restore Succeeded 1 Select Restore option from the Menu 2 Click the lt gt button to open windows browser Page 395 of 432 P RR MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 zi xi Look in E TEMP e a 2 Cicim pics My Recent O Hadasit Documents O The website of Miryam_Files Ka S My Network File name tempmatrix bak gt Places Files of
263. language through Windows Control Panel e It is highly recommended to fully update your windows from Windows Update before installation Note You must have administrative rights on the computer to install MATRIX TM and Database Page 16 of 432 OLY Ex Sos CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See MATA ie 2 2 Decide where to Locate the Server Before making installation of all the required software determine where the database will be located This section includes a review of all the software components and later on describes two options for database location and the software to be installed on each of the destined stations Software components Microsoft Net Framework 2 0 The free software that is required in order to run the Matrix Setup and using the Matrix software run the file Dotnefx dotnetfx exe MSDE SP4 The free software Microsoft SQL Server Database Engine that is required in order to work with databases run the file MSDE install bat as described in Chapter A Install MSDE section 2 3 Matrix TM Matrix Setup includes three modules Server Manage and Touch modules that are selected in the installation process depending on the destined stations purpose run the file SetupAll msi as described in Chapter A Install MATRIX TM Setup section 2 4 2 2 1 SQL Database installed on the Server The Database is located on the external server and is accessed through the network connec
264. lds to use on Receive Number of reference fields to use on Receive for Interfaces If none or 0 in TOUCH the reference fields screen will be skipped Reference 1 PO Number Reference 2 Line No Page 382 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Reference 3 and 4 For future use System Option 112 Type of Reference fields Type of Reference fields for Interfaces Numeric or Text System Option 209 Create Scheduled Reports Activate job that automatically creates the Scheduled reports 24 1 2 Creating Interface and Connection Definitions 1 Open Menu Administration gt Interfaces gt Interfaces 2 Add new interface by clicking the a lt Add gt button on the Menu bar The following screen will be displayed ox Interface Key E Interface SAP z Interface Type Transaction z Interface Name D Remarks Online Oo Fields Description Interface Select interface name SAP supported FTP not supported GAL not supported Interface Type The Transaction interface type will transfer the Matrix transactions to the interface The Stock Transfer type will send the stock quantities to SAP in order to be compared with the SAP stock Interface Name Insert name for the interface Remarks Free text Online Check if you wish to transfer the transactions online Otherwise it can be transferred manually or by scheduler for this continue to t
265. le for use admin ITMDemo 1107 2007 P i ICITIMISH Enter an Item Avanoa Grom lt Demo HM90 ES0A D20 3 W20 C Milling Demo HM90 E90A D32 4 W32 C Milling Demo HM90 E90A D 75 3 W 75 C Milling 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 W 75 C Milling 121 00 Demo HM90 E90A4 D 62 2 C 62 LB Milling Demo CHAMRING 110 WN32 09 Drilling Demo CHAMRING 080 WN20 06 Drilling DemoDR MF 10L 2 25D 12A4 05 Drilling DemoDR MF 10R 2 25D 12A 05 Drilling Demo TNMS 431 12 IC20 Iso Turn Demo TPGH 2 2 L IC70 Iso Turn Search for the record There are a number of methods to search for a record and to get it displayed in the list Use one of the Search methods described bellow Page 238 of 432 Oe coe CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eee MATA Select the record After finding the record by one of the methods mentioned before select the requested record in the list and press on the ma D lt Next gt button or double press on the record in order to continue the process Note The system enables to sort the records and to resize the columns Pressing on the header of the relevant column Item Code Supplier Code PO etc will sort the records in ascending order and another press on will change the sort to descending order Resize the columns by pressing and dragging the separator line between the headers of the columns 12 3 4 1 Search with no f
266. le Title Cabinet Code 4 Demo1 Demo2 E E E MatrxDemo2 I Demo3 MatrixDemo3 M KDemo1 KardexDemo1 M MxDemo MXDemo I NADemo1 Non Automatic De M NADemo2 Non Automatic De Please refer to Chapter B Advanced Reports section 9 1 for instructions how to build and run an Advanced Report Page 212 of 432 oN niga ey CG CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 4 9 5 Stock Shortage The stock shortage reports enables the user to track stock shortages per item for each stock management level Bin Item Cabinet and Item levels detailed 9 5 1 Stock Shortage Report This report displays stock shortages in all three stock management levels It compares the stock to the minimum stock quantity and lists those cases where the stock falls below the minimum It also shows the draft and open orders quantities This is a good control tool as it lets us know where problems in stock levels might occur For the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Reports gt Stock Shortage ltem Key E i lem Code E C ltem Description E M Additional Item Code P Cabinet Name 0 H Bin Key Bin Code OO f Shortage sis Calc Level yH Supplier Name E C E Site E C E Ordered Quantity E Co Ce Found 2 Records Item Maintenance Bin Maintenance Cabinet Maintenance Stock Transfer By clicking the right mouse button a pop up
267. ll be displayed Page 286 of 432 Update Issue Transaction admin creator ITMDemover40 6402508 Demo GIMY 315 IC508 Demo GIMY 315 IC508 Please enter Quantity to Return Matrix 02 02 03 50 00 15 00 OOOLOOOO 5 Set the quantity for return which should not exceed the issued quantity or bin capacity Press on the lt Return gt button 6 Open the bin following the instructions written at the top of the screen in RED and return the items 7 Close the drawer At this point a reversal Issue transaction with negative Transaction quantity will be created with the date time and user of the original transaction Check this transaction in the MANAGE Module Operations gt Transaction Page 287 of 432 or T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ra MATRIX 13 8 RECEIVE without ORDER This module displays all the items that can be stored in the current Touch station and enables to receive an item without having a purchase order This option is needed in the following cases When the purchase orders are created in ERP system without creating them in Matrix system and the items are ready to be received to the stock When there is a receipt and items from unknown source that need to be registered as a part of received stock To use this functionality in Manage application please refer to Chapter B Receive with ERP Order section 8 1 3 To Receive Item without an Order 1 Press on the l
268. ll not import the bins themselves therefore the bins must be created prior to the import and then exported to excel for editing the data for import BIN_CODE Bin Code Bin Code as appears in the Required Unique Bin Maintenance screen ITEM_KEY defined as Item Code Item Code as appears in the ITEM_CODE Required Item Maintenance screen CAPACITY Required Capacity Numerical DEFAULT_ISSUE_QTY Default Issue Quantity Numerical Required BIN STATUS Status Active or 2 Not Active IS_OVER_CAPACITY_ALLO WED Allow Over Capacity 1 0 Unmarked or 1 Marked ISSUE_LEVEL_CODE BIN_TYPE CODE LAST ISSUE DATE LAST_RECEIVE_DATE USER_CREATED DATE_CREATED USER_LAST_MODIFIED DATE_LAST_MODIFIED IS_CONSIGNMENT Consignment 0 Unmarked or 1 Marked IS_CALC_LEVEL Bin Stock Management 0 Unmarked or 1 Marked IS_REWORK Reworked 0 Unmarked or 1 Marked IS_USED Used Item 0 Unmarked or 1 Marked IS_AUTO_ORDERING Automatic Order 0 Unmarked or 1 Marked NO _ ORDER Do not Order 0 Unmarked or 1 Marked NO_ISSUE Do not Issue 0 Unmarked or 1 Marked ISSUE_PRICE Issue Price Numerical REMARKS Remarks LAST_COUNTED_DATE These fields are not in the interface or not editable and ERP_STATUS not recommended for import Page 371 of 432 CITMS Example for Excel format MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 BRS
269. ll take this value If the bin is Reworked it will calculate the transaction value by Price of Reworked field If none of the above and Item Price field has a value it will take this field value Otherwise it will take the Supplier Price value In Return Adjust Item Count Bin and Transfer First it will calculate the transaction value by Average Cost Page 194 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 If there is no value for Average Cost field it will calculate the transaction value by Item Price If there is no value also for Item Price field it will use zero 9 Reports There are two types of reports supported by the MANAGE module Basic reports and Advanced reports 9 1 Advanced Reports The MANAGE module supports building Advanced Reports for different records in the system such as transactions orders usage etc Build report template All the advanced reports have a basic screen to create the reports with full customization such as selecting which fields to include or exclude from the report selecting which records to display by setting conditions and filters selecting level of details Total values only or Detailed list selecting design for report Chart or List and more This section describes in detail how to build and run the advanced transactions reports but these instructions can be used for any type of advanced report Schedule the report run After making all t
270. m tables of data There is no Undo option therefore User Name m2005 please use this command with care User Password E Table name Database Tools e Backup Restore Restore ltem Bin Activate Jobs Reset SQL User Password i Hee ata ean Date until need delete data lt 23 07 2008 x Manage Tools Stock Balance Restore Defaults Reset Matrix Admin Password Logs Send by E mail Delete Logs Replications Interface Utilities SQL script running Matrix TM Agent Process History i Local Information Transaction Order Use the lt Delete gt button to delete the records Page 412 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CHAPTER F Summaries This chapter describes workflows for few common processes troubleshooting in the MATRIX TM system and general instructions for their resolution with references to the full description in this user guide 26 Common Processes To be ready to operate a Matrix cabinet it usually requires creating a new and empty database and then creating the initial data such as cabinet configuration items users etc This section describes a few standard steps that need to be carried out and references to the full descriptions 26 1 How to Create New Database This section describes how to create a new and empty database If you have already installed the Matrix software 1 Login to the Database Administration program
271. m to New or Used bins E g If you wish to Receive and Return New amp Used Durable Kit items in the one bin select YES If you wish to separate New amp Used Durable Kit items into different bins select NO and sign Used Item for bins It is a multiple use item that can be located in any type of bin and can be returned to the cabinet It can be issued many times but only after rework process This item type is influenced by the system option 904 Option 904 Reworked Bin good as New If 904 NO Receive Reworkable new item only to New bins and Reworkable reworked item only to Reworked bins If 904 YES Receive Reworkable item new or reworked item to New or Reworked bins E g If you wish to receive New amp Reworked items in the one bin select YES If you wish to separate New amp Reworked items into different bins select NO and sign Reworked for bins Page 119 of 432 5 T MS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 KSA MATRI The following charts show the life of cycle of the different item types and settings for system options 904 and 905 Please read more information about the influence of system options 904 and 905 in Chapter B Stock Management Levels section 6 Life cycle of DURABLE KIT Items 905 Yes 905 No Order of New items Bin Used No Yes Bin Used Yes Note When 905 Yes and there is a used bin it may still be possible to return to it Page 120 of
272. manually This option is recommended for having control on the orders before sending them to supplier Create purchase Orders The system will create orders in Open status The user will have to send the orders manually Create purchase Orders and Send to supplier The system will create orders in Open status and will send them automatically to suppliers according to the supplier s details using E Mail 9 Important In order to create an automatic order for item the item must have a defined supplier 3 Search for Parameter 806 Default file format for order and select the file format for the automatic order 4 Search for Parameter 903 Stock Management level and select the desired value Use information described in Chapter B Stock Management Levels section 6 for understanding the significance of each level Page 152 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ete lolx Option Key 303 Option Name Stock Management level Option Description Stock manage level used for the automatic order calculation 1 BIN level ordering 2 ITEM CABINET level ordering 3 ITEM level ordering 4 Combination of all levels ordering ha Option Value all levels Bin ltem Cabinet Bin the system will create automatic orders by checking the stock and min max parameters only on the Bin level This is the lowest stock level Item Cabinet the system will create automatic orders by checking the st
273. menu will appear displaying option Stock Transfer for transferring items from bin to bin This option will be opened only if the stock shortage is on the Bin level Page 213 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 S 9 5 2 Advanced Stock Shortage This screen enables the user to create a customized report for stock shortages based on the basic stock shortage report It also enables the user to save the definitions and run the report at a scheduled time The report displays the stock by Shortage The quantity of items missing up to the required minimum quantity To run the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Shortage gt Advanced Stock Shortage f Advanced Stock Shortage ol x Pesenpie Demo report for Stock Shortage Chart type Filter and Grouping Choose Fields Report Type Design Report _ ReportType lt le Standard Chart Listing No Subtotals X Field item Code Y Field Shortage SC Chart Color Style Default 5 Condition operator All conditions At least one condition r Simple Title Please refer to Chapter B Advanced Reports section 9 1 for instructions how to build and run an Advanced Report 9 5 3 Early Warning Report This report displays items and the prognosis for how many days the stock will be sufficient based on the statistics of usage Usage 3 Month Average Lead Time Stock Days This report
274. ms Cabinets Suppliers etc Options to open record There are a few ways to open a record from the search screen e Double click the record or e Click the a lt Update gt button or e Click the right mouse button in order to get Pop up menu not available for all search screens The Pop up menu will usually display an option to open the maintenance screen of the selected record or of the records which are related to the selected record In the example above the Pop up menu on the Search Item screen enables the user to open the selected item maintenance screen or the maintenance screen of the item supplier J emoDR MF iemoDR MF pemoDR MF BemoDR MF DemoDR MF ak Supplier Maintenance Item Maintenance To update a record 1 Open the relevant search screen 2 Search for the relevant record mark it and then open the record using one of the options described above Following the example above and opening the Item Maintenance screen of the selected record the following screen will be displayed Page 65 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Buttons for Refresh Back Next and for Save MATRIX TM Manage Main Operations Order Qepo System Tables Administration Help Windows ltem Key Item Code Item Description Item Type fe 201669 7 DemoDR MF 10L 2 25D 124 05 Durable Links Orders Cost Centers General Supplier Informa
275. n 105 defined in Over Receive Percentage 5 Follow the changes done after confirming the order line update In case of Standard or Rework order types a Receive transaction is added to the list of transactions In case of Internal Order a Transfer transaction is created The stock of item bin is updated with the received quantity Order Maintenance In case of Standard or Rework orders the relevant order line is changed to Partial or Closed status and the ordered quantity is reduced In case of Internal Order the relevant order line is changed to Closed or remains On Route until all the quantity on route is fully received Order Maintenance The received quantity will be added to the Received Quantity in the order line Tab Details and to the bin entity Tab General Remark added to the Remarks field will appear in the Remark tab in the relevant order line Page 166 of 432 BR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 8 1 3 Receive without Order This type of Receive is based on the orders created in ERP system or no orders at all For receive based on order created in MATRIX TM Manage please refer to Chapter B Receive with MATRIX TM Order section 8 1 2 1 Open Menu Order gt Receive without Order The screen Receive without Order will appear displaying all the bins that have free space to store items according to its capacity and according to Receive Rules as described in
276. n Manager The authorizations available in the system are defined per User Group The authorizations management is divided into two parts 1 Menu Authorization authorization to menus in Manage 2 Controls Authorization authorization to options in Touch and controls in Manage 18 3 1 Menu Authorization To set Menu authorizations in the Manage module 1 Open Menu Administration gt Users and Authorizations gt Authorization Manager 2 Inthe User Group field select the group for which you want to set the authorizations 3 Select Menu Authorization tab In this tab you receive a list of all menus and sub menus defined for the Manage iojxi User Group aamin Menu Authorization Controls Authorization ltem Auth Group Budget Auth Group ltem Cabinet Supplier fv Operations Issue Return Stock Count Stock Transfer Transaction der Order Transfer Order Receive Order Invoices Return to Supplier ports Stock Reports Usage Reports Stock Shortage Stock Yaluation Reports gt SIISIISI S o lt ISISISI S KIP KIKIKI i a a a a IKIKK Page 328 of 432 R CITMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 4 Mark all the required menus with V and click the lt Save gt button Login to the system as a Use
277. n creator Transmitted 28 10 2007 06 58 Receive 1019 0 9 9191010 010 915 DEMO1 5530123 admin creator ransmitted Interface Statuses Error in Transmitted E Transmitted C Not Transmitted N The transaction attempted to transmit but failed Check the interface connection definitions The transaction was successfully transmitted or assigned as transmitted by update of database The transaction was not yet transmitted or will not be transmitted at all Page 390 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 e22 Note When the Matrix Database is updated to MATRIX TM version 4 all the existing transactions are updated to status Transmitted in order not to transmit all the old transactions Page 391 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CHAPTER E DATABASE ADMINISTRATION 25 Database Administration MATRIX TM Database Administration is a very powerful yet easy to use tool that lets you do different activities on your database We strongly recommend that this option will be used only by the system administrator who has a good knowledge of MATRIX TM and this application as well as an understanding about databases Following are the activities you can perform with Database Administration e Backup your Database to a file or send it via e mail e Restore a Database Previously backed up e Activate a job which is stored on the serv
278. n the Homimane lt Item Image gt button The screen will display item images and descriptions Item selection aamin creator ITMDemover40 05 09 2007 ria cae SFT SF Demo TPGB 2 1 Demo TPGB 322 60 Demo TPGH 2 1 L a Y Y Demo TNMS 431 12 Demo TPGH 2 24 Demo TPGH 321 R To return to the groups press on the Grou lt Group gt button To select a particular item select the item image and press on the emit lt Item List gt button 12 3 4 5 Search by Advanced This option allows you to search an item by its application and by additional fields 1 Press on the Advance lt Advanced gt button in the Choose an Item screen Page 241 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 The following screen will appear Advanced J x Application Name Milling feco Main Family End Mills eoo STL 90 indexable endmills eee Size m2 PO 00 Color black 00 Tested Yes eo0 oe 2007 03 07 e00 LOOLOOOOO Fields description Application Name This is a constant field that automatically generates a list of applications linked to the Main Family and Sub Family which have been assigned to an Item This list is not seen in Manage Main Family This is a constant field which displays a list of system defined classifications for Main Family Only those classifications to which an item has been linked will be displayed Sub Family This is a constant fiel
279. n the right side of the grid and confirm the deletion message Note If an item line was already partially received status Partial you cannot set the line status to Cancel and therefore the line cannot be deleted from the order 7 1 3 Tab Additional Fields This tab displays additional fields associated to the order s header This screen only allows editing the fields that were already added For instructions how to add more fields to the entity see Chapter B Additional Fields section 5 5 Page 146 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gme ST REl Standard Order Maintenance iol xj PO Number PO Code Supplier Supplier Name Shipping Method Kx f demo order TaeguTec E Ewress aie n General Details Additional Fields Remarks and Links Address Fiet vate o ooo is special sale Field Package type Value In order to update an Additional Field record 1 Select the record and click the lt Update gt button from the right side of the grid The screen as following will appear Additional Fields x Field lis special sale Value gt N 2 Set the value and click the lt Save gt button The value will be updated for the current order Page 147 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ematera 7 1 4 Tab Links Similar to other modules in the system this tab contains remarks and files that can be associated with the order Each l
280. n will display the item from the selected order line and its bin locations as in the following screen Page 282 of 432 Transfer Order admin creator ITMDemover40 3101694 Demo HM30 E90A D32 4 YV32 C Demo HM90 E90A4 D32 4 VY32 C Please choose bins and quantity Demo1 01 05 06 Demo1 09 01 02 Demo1 09 07 05 MatrixMkKT 06 04 03 OOOOOOOO 4 Set the quantities for transfer and press on the lt Issue gt button 5 Follow the instructions displayed in red above the grid to complete the transfer of items 9 Note The text in red above the table describes the next operation to be performed 6 In order to complete the transfer of items continue to Receive process at the cabinet which created the Internal Order Page 283 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 13 7 TRANSACTIONS This module can be accessed by authorized users only It displays all the Issue transactions enables filtering the list by the user who issued each item and allows the user to return any issued item the whole quantity or partial quantity to the stock To correct Issue transactions 1 Press on the lt Transactions gt icon The following screen will be displayed admin creator ITMDemover40 11 12 2007 P Select record to update Seare E fadmin creator eo0 Quantit 14 10 2007 10 58 31016866 Demo HM90 E90A Milling 1 00 Kardex 02 1 2 1 admin creator p
281. nage and remove all the unnecessary jobs using Database Administration Read more in Chapter E Activate Jobs section 25 3 Verify that the Installation Path defined in the System Option 1 in restored database meets with the folder containing the MATRIX TM files If not update the system option in spite of the comment not to change it Make sure that the access to the server is available by Firewall settings in order to allow other Matrix workstations to use the database Firewall settings Open Control Panel gt Windows Firewall gt on the General tab switch OFF the firewall or switch ON and add port number 1433 on the Exceptions tab If you use a cabinet PC as a server you are ready to load TOUCH If you run Database and Touch on different computers then on the cabinet PC install all the required software as well connect to the database server by making definitions on the Settings program and load the TOUCH module Extra settings Page 415 of 432 lt 5 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 9 If you have image files for the Items and Item Groups set the system option 400 Item Pictures path and the system option 404 Group Pictures path and locate respectively the image files Read more in Chapter B Add Images to Items section 5 4 5 Chapter D Add Images to Item Groups section 16 3 1 Chapter E Utilities section 25 11 26 4 How to Upgrade the Software and Database When there is
282. nage module as described in Chapter B Key Management section 5 4 6 Issue a key process 1 Press on the lt Issue gt icon from the Main screen and enter the relevant cost centers as usual 2 In the Item Selection screen select item which is known as stored in locker and continue to the next screen of bins 3 Select the bin which is used as locker and connected to key set the quantity for issue and press on the lt Issue gt button Issue Item Touch admin ITMDemo42 3101694 Demo HM90 E90A D32 4 W32 C Demo HM90 E90A D32 4 W32 C Please choose bins and quantity Demo4 07 02 13 Demo4 Demo4 07 02 14 Dermo4 NADemo1 01 01 04 NADemo1 NADemo1 01 02 01 NADemo1 USED ITEM NADemo1 01 02 02 NADemo1 REWORKED B OOOCCOCCVOCOLOO gt Page 265 of 432 RR CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 BOS MATRIX Pressing on the lt Issue gt button will display Drawer Mapping of Non Automatic cabinet drawer with marking the relevant locker position and at the same time the Matrix drawer will be available for opening the bin with the key You can also print the drawer mapping by pressing the lt print gt key You will be required to issue the key from Matrix bin in order to issue the item from the locker and then to return the key to the bin by lt Return gt option EE irtual Machine Drawer Mapping Please press lt Close gt L x j1 zZ i2 Bin Code NADemo1 01 02 01 e
283. nd Authorizations gt Authorization Manager 10 In the Authorization Manager choose the Budget Authorization Group tab Here you can connect the User Group to the Budget Group In order to connect a new user group click the lt Add gt button and from the combo list chose the group you desire Page 310 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 mS nen HE Authorization Manager User Group jamn o Menu Authorization Controls Authorization Item Auth Group Auth Budget Group High alue Items Average Value Item Authorizations Budget Group Name xj Bims Giai High Value Items High Value Items Average Value ltem Low Value Items Note If there is no Budget group associated with the user group it means that no budget restrictions apply to the users in this User Group 16 7 2 Budget by Amount Issue process with budget restrictions If system option 108 is set and the user s User Group has a defined Budget amount MATRIX TM will allow the item to be issued subject to the following quantity restriction Allowed Quantity Budget amount Amount already issued per User Item Price Page 311 of 432 ree T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Note Amount already issued per User is summed from the value in Issue transactions in the last number of days defined for the user To create budget definitions To restrict issue by amount you will need to activate the budget and to define
284. ne Machine 1 z Work Center Work Center gt Centeri gt Job Number 5501234 In this section you should choose the cost centers to be associated with issuing the item The cost centers are determined in a hierarchical display order Example in screen Department gt Work center gt Machine gt Job number Note The cost centers in the above picture are an example only The system manager can define up to four different cost centers that will appear in the system You can update their names their numbers and the order in which they will appear Search items In this screen the user selects the items and bins from where he wishes to issue Use the following search fields in order to locate the item and bin for issue Item Code Search by edit use value for partial value or by Go browse button Item Description Search by edit use value for partial value Cabinet Search by list Bin Search by list or by browse button Click the la lt Search gt button on the Menu bar Page 176 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 You can also display the item picture by clicking the item Picture lt Item Picture gt button Choose items to be issued Mark the item and click the lt Down gt arrow button This operation will move the items to the bottom table issue list Note If the quantity for issuing is not positive or the item is in a bin marked Not Active then after
285. net Report e Orders Report Basic Orders Report Advanced Orders Report e Bin Units Report e Additional Fields Report Additional Fields Report Additional Fields Advanced Items Report Additional Fields Advanced Bins Report Additional Fields Advanced Orders Report e Items ltem Supplier Report Kits Report Item Catalog Pictures tems Cost Centers 5 System Tables contain the system s support tables e Currency Page 56 of 432 SREP PX SE CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See e Item Category e Item Group e Item Authorizations Group e Shipping Method e Site e Budget Group e Unit of Measure 6 Administration contain system definitions e Users and Authorizations Users User Groups Authorization Manager User Cost Centers e Interfaces Interfaces Interface Scheduler Interface Report e Touch Machine Touch Machine Administration Touch Cabinet Cabinet Log Drawer Type e Cost Center Header e Cost Center Details e Defaults List e Texts e Additional Fields e System Options e Manual Process e Import Data e Scheduling Reports e Settings Page 57 of 432 MATA PSS ee cw I totes CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 4 7 Help e About e Send Email to Support e Help 8 Windows e Close all Windows e Cascading Windows Page 58 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Toolbar 8 ada When a search or d
286. ng of the cabinet Transfer Order Transfer of items to another cabinet against an Internal Order Receive without Order Receive an item without having to create a purchase order Page 45 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Note Touch will only display authorized options If there is authority for one option only then this option will be automatically selected without displaying the main menu first 3 3 2 Checking the Connection to Cabinets After linking at least one bin with an item you can check that your definitions are correct 1 Run TOUCH module and login with the same user name that you have created in the MATRIX TM MANAGE module You will be presented with main screen and the module options such as Issue Receive Return Transactions Adjust Item Count Bins and Transfer Order Press on the lt Count Bins gt option You will be presented with a search screen Press on the lt Search gt button to get a list of all the bins If you see bins in the list with the linked item then it means that you have successfully defined all the data If there are no bins in the list it means that some of the definitions are missing or wrong In this case please verify that you have properly completed the Touch definitions as described in Chapter A Set TOUCH definitions section 3 2 6 3 3 3 Issue A user who has authority to issue an item can remove it from stock Once the user opens the drawer an
287. nnannnannaarenananannaatennannannaa 386 24 2 Creating transactions ssrssccie oniran a EAEan S 387 24 214 TOUCH MOdUIC oa i cccccecccccciesccaccceasceccceaseedcevesercedevaacndcabageedcnnseecdibteeeciddivasadiveandedtes 387 24 2 2 MANAGE Module 0 ccccccccesccececsneeeeecsneeececeaeeeeeeceaeeeeecaeeeeessaeeeessseeeessiieeeesenaes 388 24 3 Interface Results Report ccccccceecceseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeceeeeeseseeaeaeceeeeeseeensaneeeeeees 390 CHAPTER E DATABASE ADMINISTRATION ccssccecesseeceeesseeeeeessseeeeesnseeeeenssneeeenesseeeeness 392 25 DATABASE ADMINISTRATION is avsvscsnsiuvdeneiedvaeliaaveacudivuesdseattuvaanlnaevencnliiuesddnivdd vaauuuseliauueeuiies 392 25 1 Backup of the Database 00 0 ecccceceececeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeee tees ceaeaeeeeeeeseeenaeeeeeeeeeseesnaeees 394 25 2 Restoring the Database cecccececeeeeeeeeeeeee entree ee eaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesesnaeeeeeeaes 394 25 3 Activate Jobs 0 ccececeeccececeeeeeeeceae cece cece ceceeaaaeceeeeeeesecaaaeeeeeeeeeseccaeaeeeeeeeseseeseenieeeeees 397 25 3 1 Jobs IN MATRIX TM ceececcecececsneceeecnneeecesseeeececeaeeeeeeaeeeeessaeeeeesstesesssieesensaes 397 25 3 2 SQL Server Service MANagGel cce eee eeeeeece sence ee eeeeee settee eeeeaeeeeesnaeeeeeeneeeeseaes 398 25 3 3 Viewing and Activating JOD ec ceeeeeeeenee reese esse eneeeeeeeaeeeeeeiaeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 400 25 4 Reset SQL User PaSSword ccccceececeeeeteeeeeeenneeeeee
288. nneeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeesnieeeeeenaes 402 25 5 Stock Balance cccccceceececcee cece eeeeeeccaceeeeeeeeeeecececaaeceeeeeeeseccaeaeeeeeeesesecsicaeeeeeeeeeeeees 403 25 6 Restore Detaults iecicsvsav acess tencivsvcctacecast tasxevadsdabad wacsatvenaehacvataiietes aercdenisascteessceeseiecen 403 25 7 Reset MATRIX Admin PaSSWOMG cccccccececceeeeeeeeecenaeceeeeeeeeseescneeeeeetersessnnaeees 404 25 8 Send Logs by Email 0 cece ener etieee erties ee eieee ee eeeeeeeieeeee teaser eneeeeeeaa 405 25 9 Delete LOGS eraran ie het ys Gecteeieeieaten esi eciei adalat aaa 406 25 10 ROE PIICAUONS incen naaa a aaia a eb aa aa aiaia 406 25 11 E E E E I E E E E A T 408 25 12 SOL Script RUMIN ossia e a E E A ESS 409 25 13 Process Histoires a EN E O 410 25 14 Restore Item BinN asnan anainn ae aa aa iaa aa aia aia aa aaan 411 25 15 History Data ODUONS Aerea onii a aE TE ated eesetnnatendesd 411 CHAPTER F SUMMARIES narran EA ii dee 413 26 COMMON PROCESSES ueia AREEN EA ANASARE NEN AKRA ARENE E 413 26 1 How to Create New Database ccccececeecseceeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeesennaeeeseeeeeeeenenaeees 413 26 2 How to Create Initial Data in the Database 0 0 0 ecececcecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnnaeees 414 26 3 How to Operate the Database cccceceesecscceceeeeeteceneaeceeeeeeeesecnnaeeeeeeeeesesnenaees 415 26 4 How to Upgrade the Software and Database ecceeeeeeeeeneeeeeesnteeeeeeneeeeeeaaes 416
289. nstall MATRIX TM Setup This section describes the steps for installing MATRIX TM server and clients The installation includes Manage Touch and Server modules For proper selection of modules to install please carefully read Chapter A Decide where to Locate the Server section 2 2 Important If the PC that you are using for installation already has installed a previous version of Matrix it is necessary to remove the existing installation before running the new setup To remove the old software go to Windows Start Menu gt Programs gt MATRIX TM gt MATRIX TM Tools gt MATRIX TM Uninstall and select the option Remove during uninstall Start installation Note Please notice that installation of MATRIX TM software requires pre installation of Microsoft Net Framework 2 0 It might be that the PC s operating system already contains this software If not run the Dotnefx dotnetfx exe file To install the MATRIX TM software follow these steps 1 Open MATRIX TM installation CD 2 Run the SetupAll msi file Follow the installation instructions Note If your CD player is set to AutoPlay mode it will automatically run the installation program 3 Click the lt Next gt button on the following screen Page 21 of 432 ais MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 He iis MATRIX TM Page 22 of 432 ais MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 tee 4 Fill in the path to install the program files choose Everyone
290. nt Data 0 ec eeeeeeee ener ee ee tenets eeeeaeeeeeestaeeeetenaeeeeeeaes 372 22 2 Tips for Preparing Input Data cecececceecececeeeeececae cece eeeeeeeseaaeaeeeeeeesesennieeeeeeees 374 22 3 Creating Import project 0 cece entree erent ee erent ee eee tieee ee teeeeeteeeee teases nnne en raant 375 22 4 Adjusting data for import ecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeeeneeeeneaes 376 22 5 Importing the data eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeneeeeeeeaas 378 22 6 Loading Import Project 0 02 cece ee eenee eee eete ee ee ette ee eee taeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 379 23 REPORT SCHEDULER csssccccessscccessssccensesscccusassceceessscacenssscceensaseecensusnceceussnecensssneeceetsaees 380 23 1 Define the reports cccccceceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeseceaaaecaeeeeeeesesecaaeeeeeeeeeseeecceeeeeeeeeseesenaees 380 23 2 Activate the reports ccceecececseeceeeeeeeeececcaeeeeeeeeeececaaaeceeeeeeeseccacaeeeeeeesesensaaeeneees 382 24 INTERFACES seit ncceccavancecianaececctvatedsciviaced savancuedctvededccadeeckddavandicssvaes dctvedeaccveanacddcebdssadserstentes 382 24 1 OO TUINGS is acet tect T A codvibaceusvandesaeestaeden 4 382 24 121 Systemi OpulonS eenen ERE 382 24 1 2 Creating Interface and Connection Definitions eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerreeeeerresrrresrens 383 24 1 3 Creating Interface Scheduler sssessrsesesrrnnssrrssrennnnsannaatn
291. nternal order we select items that the receiving cabinet needs normally items that have fallen below their minimum stock level Select item of any type Durable Expendable Reworkable Kit Note In order to take out the items from the transferring cabinet it is necessary to make lt Transfer Order gt operation See more information in Chapter B TRANSFER Internal Order section 8 2 and Chapter C TRANSFER ORDER section 13 6 4 In order to Receive the items into the system it is not necessary to make lt Send Order gt operation 5 When the items are ready to be received into the ordering cabinet we will receive them as usual to the bins that are associated with the item Two ways to manage orders A purchase order can be added to the system in two ways Manual order a user enters this kind of order manually Automatic order once in a pre defined interval of time day or week subject to the administrator s definition an automatic batch process will occur that will create a purchase order This automatic process produces a list of items and their quantities needed to complete the required stock replenishment It does this by checking the existing Page 132 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 stock levels and the system s parameters specifically the stock management level bin cabinet or item The system will set the order by comparing the current stock with the minimum and maximum levels in e
292. o avoid undesired changes and information loss After reading carefully the explanations above ensure that the desired database is displayed in the Connection details and use the lt Default Restore gt button to activate the command 25 7 Reset MATRIX Admin Password This option resets the password of user admin to the initial password If no such user will be found in the database displayed in Connection details no reset will be done Use the lt Reset Password gt button to activate the command Page 404 of 432 BRR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 STE 25 8 Send Logs by Email Sometimes you need to send the system logs to support This option will attach the logs to an email and send them The following fields should be filled in Server SMTP server which sends the email Port Used port for SMTP usually 25 To To whom you want to send the email From Who is sending the logs Subject Subject of email Message body Free text IE Database Administration ioj x Connection Send By E mail Sever Name loca Send by Outlook o Send by SMTP Data Base liTMDemo a ct be User Name m2005 Server User Password ITM Port To Data Base Tools Backup Fram Restore Activate Jobs Subject Reset SQL User Password Manage Tools Stock Balance Restore Default Reset Matrix Admin Password Logs send by E mail Delete Logs Replications Utilities SQL script running
293. o enable return of the keys to the cabinet E Bin Maintenance Ioj x Bin Key Bin Code Cabinet Code ltem Code ltem Description a4 0 s Demo4 k03101694 Gy Key To 3101694 in Non Auto General Stock Management Additional Fields Usage Transactions Orders Bin Units Status Active E Consignment ltem Type Ky t S O Reworked V Used Item p Replenishment 5 Open the Item Maintenance screen of the key and switch to the tab Connected Bins In this TAB you can add the bins which will be opened by this key a Item Maintenance 10 x Item Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type p2 KD3101694 j Key To 3101694 in Non Auto a Key General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions Links Orders Cost Centers Connected Bins NADemo1 NADemo1 01 02 01 3101694 Demo HM90 E90A NADemo1 NADemo1 01 02 02 3101694 Demo HM90 E90A D32 4 W32 C 6 Click the lt Add gt button that is on the right side of the grid to connect bin to key The opened screen Search Bin will display all the bins in Non Automatic cabinets that were not connected to any key yet Page 124 of 432 SEX Ss T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 xO MATRIX 7 Select bin to connect and click the lt Select gt button You can also make multiple bins select by holding CTRL key and marking the records These bins will be added to the Connected
294. o locker it opens the bin with the key and two transactions are created Issue transaction for the key and Return to Cabinet transaction for the item The Return of the key itself is available in order to place the key back after the operation from the locker was completed Transactions When item issued from locker is selected to be returned it does not open the bin with the key and creates only reversed Issue transaction for the item The return of the key itself is available it opens the bin with the key and creates reversed Issue transaction Adjust Item When item in locker selected to be adjusted it opens the bin with the key and in case quantity is changed two transactions are created Issue transaction for the key and Adjust Bin Quantity transaction for the item The Adjust of the key itself is available Count Bins When item in locker is selected to be counted it does not open the bin with the key and creates only Stock Count transaction for the item The count of the key itself is available it opens the bin with the key and creates Stock Count transaction Page 292 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Transfer Order When item in locker selected to be transferred it opens the bin with the key and two transactions are created Issue transaction for the key and Transfer transaction for the item The Transfer of the key itself is not available It filters the bins marked as Used
295. o soo 2uorrane lear cose e orso Demos 5 4 2 Copying an Item By copying an item the user can add a new item to the system identical to the copied item The copied information is the values of the fields in the General tab with the exception of the item code description which will be set in the Copy Item window and supplier which will not be copied To copy an item 1 Click the lt Copy Item gt button Page 115 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 D RE Item Maintenance loj xi ltem Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type p2 5505421 j Demo IDI 0295 5G ic908 Expendable General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Location Usage Transaction Links Additional Item Code ss ltem Long Description Demo IDI 0295 5G IC908 Item Group Drilling 1 Item Auth Group 0 a Unit of Measure Pieces ee sss i m Category Regar SSSC Y Barcode a Item Code coardas Main Family ipti y P ltem Description This item is copied for demo Sub Family gt ltem Price 1 00 Average Cost Primary Supplier lear o M Update Create User admin creator Dp ser admin creator Create Date 07022006 Update Date 97022006 Remarks 2 Enter item code and description Save the new item by clicking the lt Save gt button Once the new item is created and its details copied the
296. ock and min max parameters only on the Item Cabinet level Item the system will create automatic orders by checking the stock and min max parameters only on the Item level This is the highest stock level All levels the system will create automatic orders by checking the shortage on All the Levels Starting from the bin then going to Item cabinet and finally creating orders for what is left to order on the item level 5 If you decided to include the Bin level for automatic orders Go to the Bin Maintenance screen of the bins that you wish to include for automatic orders e Select General tab and fix the following settings Page 153 of 432 RS Z CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 METERSE HE Bin Maintenance Bin Key Bin Code Cabinet Code Item Code Item Description m Demat 09 07 10 Demot 2101749 CG Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 WV 7 Stock Management Additional Fields Usage information Status Active Consignment Item Type Durable m Reworked p Used Item M Replenishment mV Bin Stock Management jy Automatic Order Do not Order Capacity Capacity 20 YF Allow Over Capacity Issue Default Issue Quantity i Cts Issue Price e545 Il Do not Issue m Current Quantities Items in Bin 500 8 Ordered Quantity boa Draft m Last Count Date Rework Orders pooo Remarks Check the box of Bin S
297. odule The item description that is displayed also on the TOUCH module Item type Expendable Durable Reworkable Kit and Key that determines the functionality of the item For more information see Chapter B ITEM Life Cycle section 5 4 4 An additional catalogue number which can be used in case two different codes are necessary for example supplier s and customer s code In System Option 1011 you can determine whether this field will be displayed in the TOUCH module Item Long Description Additional item description In System Option 1011 you can Barcode determine whether this field will be displayed in the TOUCH module Item bar code that makes it easier to find the items on the TOUCH module by scanning with the barcode reader Page 101 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 3 If this field has no value and the user will use a barcode reader the system will compare the read value to the Item Code and Item Description Notice that the barcode reader is usually configured to scan with a prefix that is also defined in System Option 1012 The value here should be the same as it scanned but without the prefix For more information read Chapter C Barcode Interface section 12 3 3 Item Authorization Group The authorization group which is used to restrict the usage Unit of Measure Item Group Category Main Family Sub Family Item Image Pack Size of the item For more detail
298. of 432 CITMS 9 2 1 Basic Transactions Report MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATRIX w This report displays in a generic view all the recorded stock transactions It details transaction type and quantity the date and time when the transaction was created the user who performed the operation and more To run the report open Menu Operations gt Transactions E Transaction Key o Bin Code Bin Key Issue to Loo o O Transaction Type Item Code Se Item Description Found 478 Records gt 007 15 50 27 03 2007 15 49 Adjust Bin Qu Adjust Bin Qu gt Additional Item Code 8 03 8080803 a at BO Boa al S ar S KIT item s 720 lt Demo1 04 0 oo 20 00 admin KIT item Ss KDemo1 04 03 01 10 00 15 02 2007 12 25 15 02 2007 12 25 Receive 49930123 Demo PIC KDemo1 01 4 06 10 00 Receive 5530123 Demo PIC Demo1 01 01 14 39 00 15 02 2007 12 24 Receive 3101749 Demo HM9 KDemo1 03 03 01 40 00 15 02 2007 12 24 Receive 3101749 Demo HM9 KDemo1 03 02 03 9 00 16 02 2007 12 20 Issue 6501822 Demo TN NADemo1 02 01 10 00 15 02 2007 12 20 Issue 3101694 Demo HM9 NADemo1 01 01 10 00 15 02 2007 12 19 Issue 3101694 Demo HMS kKDermo1 01 A 02 10 00 Note This report in contrast to other repor
299. of Items Issue process with budget restrictions Page 307 of 432 BER MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 If system option 107 is set the user s User Group is attached to a Budget Group and the requested item is in that group MATRIX TM will allow the item to be issued subject to the following quantity restriction Allowed Quantity Budget Quantity for the defined period Quantity issued to date for the defined period For example If the number of days defined is 2 the system checks transactions for today and yesterday If the number of days is 7 the system will check the last 7 days To create budget definitions To restrict issue by quantity of items you will need to activate the budget to create budget group and to link budget group to the user group Activate budget 1 Set System Option 107 Activate issue budget by Quantity of items YES Create budget group 2 Goto Menu System Tables gt Budget Group Budget Group Key P Budget Group Name E o Found 3 Records High Value Items Average Value Item Low Value Items Page 308 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 DEN 3 Click the lt Add gt button on the toolbar to add a new budget group The following screen will be displayed HE Budget Group Maintenance Ox Budget Group Name Mm Default Number of Days m 4 Fill in the required fields and click the lt Save gt button The Budget
300. older defined in the System Option 404 Page 302 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Recommendation Locate the image files in one folder shared to all the Matrix users and set the system option 404 for example pcname Matrix GroupImages This will prevent unnecessary copies of files and maintenance for each folder separately 16 4 Item Authorizations Group In case that you want to restrict the issue of items to certain employees you can use the Authorization by Item option To activate this option you need to define four parts e Define Item Authorization Groups e Define User Groups this topic is covered in Chapter D Group of Users section 18 1 when adding users to the system you will be required to link them to a User Group to define their use rights e Link items to an Item Authorization Group e Link User Groups with the Item Authorization Groups 16 4 1 Defining Item Authorization Groups 1 Goto Menu System Tables gt Item Authorization Group 2 Define the Item Authorization Group Try to plan the number of groups that you want to use taking into account that a smaller number of groups will make it easier to manage Ee Item Authorizations Group oj x ltem Authorizations Group Key E ltem Authorizations Group Name Found 5 Records High Value Low Yalue Medium Value No Value Mast High Value Page 303 of 432 MATRIX CITIMS M
301. ompter casiers i Pa 4 Make the required changes and click the E lt Save gt button 5 Click the EJ lt Save gt button on the main toolbar Note Only Messages group translations are effective online All other translations require re entering to the system 16 System Tables In order to open the tables click the System Tables menu This menu will give you the ability to Search Update and Delete existing records or create new records in the different tables The correct way of working is to follow the operating principles described in the User Guide Existing tables in the system e Currency e Item Category e Item Group e Item Authorizations Group e Shipping Method e Site e Budget Group Page 300 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Soo e Unit of Measure 16 1 Currency In order to define a new currency follow the next steps 1 Go to Menu System Tables gt Currency 2 Click the lt Add gt button and the following screen will appear HA Currency Maintenance i lol x Currency key Eoo Currency Symbol i Currency Name General Currency Exchange Rate 1 0000 3 Fill in the data Currency Symbol Currency Name Exchange Rate 4 Click the lt Save gt button 16 2 Item Category In order to define a new item category follow the next steps 1 Goto Menu System Tables gt Item Category 2 Click the lt Add gt button and the following scr
302. on 4 2 MATRI Type D 11 Type D 12 Poe Lege n For MATRIX Series 4 For MATRIX Series 4 Page 13 of 432 Sots CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See S C6 0 amp sad MATA ie 1 3 Software Overview The MATRIX TM software package comprises the MANAGE and TOUCH modules and server services The software enables a user to manage an unlimited number of defined MATRIX cabinets control the access to the cabinets and to manage the stock MATRIX TM MANAGE It is a Graphic User Interface program Installed on the MATRIX Cabinet PC and other PC workstation connected to the local network The module enables the user to manage the item data in the MATRIX dispenser and execute stock operations according to user authorization It can also be used as a stand alone stock management system for a manual warehouse like shelves and cabinets The module supports multiple languages MATRIX TM TOUCH It is a Graphic User Interface program Installed on the MATRIX Cabinet PC and operated by a touch screen attached to the cabinet For testing or demonstration purposes the module can also be installed on any PC and operated with no connection to an automatic cabinet The module enables the user to open the drawers and bins of the MATRIX dispenser and execute a variety of stock operations such as issuing returning receiving and counting according to defined user authorizations The module supports
303. on 8 1 Receive stock process 1 Press on the lt Receive gt icon from the Main screen The search screen will be displayed like following listing all the order open lines Page 268 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gf x Receive Item admin ITMDemo 12 07 2007 Enter Item Order oe 3101694 Demo HM90 E Milling 50 00 5601196 Demo APKT 1 Milling Demo1 01 02 09 10 00 demo doc 3101749 Demo HM90 E Milling Demo1 09 01 04 demo doc 3101749 Demo HM90 E Milling demo doc 3101749 Demo HM90 E Milling demo doc 5530123 Demo PICCO Threading demo sta 502222 Demo TPMR 2 Iso Turn Demo1 01 04 10 demo sta 3102566 Demo HMSO E 3 Milling Dermo1 09 01 05 demo sta 4509194 Demo DIN698 Tooling demo sta 5601196 Demo APKT 1 Milling Please notice that some order lines might be with Bin Code information and some lines without this information The order lines with Bin Code information were ordered on the Bin level for particular bins The order lines without Bin Code information were ordered on the Item level meaning with no specific bin assignment or Cabinet level for particular cabinet The order lines that were ordered for a particular bin or cabinet can be received also to different locations as described below 2 Select the order line you wish to receive into stock and press on the lt Next gt button
304. on one of the Matrix cabinets The PC stations that run Manage access the database via LAN Cabinet Workstation 1 The Microsoft Net Framework 2 0 is usually installed If not install the program 2 The MSDE is usually installed If not install the program 3 Install Matrix setup with Server Manage and Touch modules 1 Install Microsoft Net Framework 2 0 2 Install Matrix setup with Manage module only No need to install Server and Touch modules Note If you decide to install SQL on a local PC we recommend installing SQL on the cabinet PC Page 19 of 432 Sox CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 A 2 3 Install MSDE In order to work on a local database you need to Install MSDE SP4 as described below 1 Open MATRIX TM installation CD 2 Open MSDE directory 3 Run the Install bat file NOT the Setup exe file Follow the installation instructions This should locate the link to Service Manager in the Windows Startup menu as on the following screen oo ily ies Liter ewe Command Prom ZENworks for Desktops 4 Aio Service Manager All Programs S Adobe Reader 7 0 Adobe Acrobat Speed Laun Location C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server 80 Tools Binn amp Internet Explorer aY Touch aA MsN After the installation is finished you are ready to install MATRIX TM software Page 20 of 432 amp BLE PX R CITMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See MATA 2 4 I
305. onent items and their respective quantities will be shown The displayed quantities represent the respective quantities of each component item in that kit multiplied by the quantity of kits to be issued Issue Kit Item a ela CWE 3101686 Demo KIT HM90 E804 D20 3 V 20 C Demo HM90 E90A D20 3 V 20 C Choose bins and quantity Demo1 Demo1 09 07 05 25 00 Demo1 g Demo1 09 07 11 40 00 Demo2 01 02 08 Demo2 02 03 04 OOOOLOO OOO gt Page 260 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 mr a Note MATRIX TM will choose the components according to a method which minimizes the number of drawers to open and maximizes storage efficiency by choosing the smallest bin which supplies the needed quantity 8 Edit the quantities if required and press lt lssue gt to proceed to the next step The list of component items in the cabinet s will be displayed for issue drawer by drawer like in the following screens After you pick up the items from each drawer and close the drawer you will be prompted to pick up items from the next drawer and so on until all items from all drawers have been picked up Please follow the instructions marked in red above the table Figure 1 Open drawer for first portion of the components Issue Kit Item siniewene rom Open Drawer Demo1 Demo1 01 01 14 44 00 CiTiIMiSH Page 261 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version
306. open Menu Main gt Item to get the Search Item screen This search screen was set to filter all the items from the Drilling group which have the DR string in their description and with item key above 52 Search parameter types fl Search Item lol x ltem Key E2 Item Code El Group Drilling ltem Type Additional Item Code Category ltem Description E HDR ltem Long Description ss Main Farnily Primary Supplier z ltem Auth Group E l z Sub Family z The search parameter types are e Numerical Use numerical value only in the example Item Key field e Textual Use any alphanumeric value which fits exactly to the value in the record It you wish to search by partial string you have to use sign in the example Item Description field See also important note below e List Select the value from list displayed when clicking on the arrow next to the field in the example Group field e Date Select the date from the calendar displayed when clicking on the field To search for a record 1 Open the relevant search screen and set the search parameter values 2 If needed change the sign on the buttons located on the left side of each search parameter by clicking on the button Each click will change its sign to either or or z or in order to enable searching records by more less equal or not equal to the searc
307. orders will be created and automatically sent to the supplier using the supplier s email Page 158 of 432 RR CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 obo MATRIX rr 7 3 Sending an Order to Supplier An order can be sent to a supplier in 2 ways e An automatic operation done after creating automatically an Order or an Internal Order This option is described in Chapter B Create Automatic Orders section 7 2 e A manual operation done by the user through the Order maintenance screen The order must be in the Draft or Open status Follow the steps described here in order to send the order In order to send the order manually 1 Open the Order maintenance screen on the tab General 2 If the order is in status Draft change the status to Open and save the order details by clicking the lt Save gt button on the Menu bar 3 Click the button Send Order The following screen will appear E Order Number px ooo Print Destination EMail H File Type sie m Email Address matrix ctms imc com M Mark Order as Sent V Show Closed Orders Send Order c Show Order gt fi Cancel i 4 Fill in the required field Print Destination Choose the output destination E Mail Print or No Sending select this option together with Mark Order as Sent if you need to change the status of the order lines to Sent to supplier without sending the order Page 159 of 432 ED T MATR
308. ork Center 1 WC Grinding1 ei n E 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 Work Center 1 WC Grinding1 3101686 Demo HM90 E90A D20 3 W Work Center W2 WC Grinding2 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 Work Center W2 WC Grinding2 These two items will be available for cost center Department Grinding and for its two sub cost centers Work Center WC Grinding 1 and WC Grinding 2 By this the required definitions are completed Page 343 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gin Open Touch application and test the results in the Issue module For the cost centers screen select the cost centers for which you have defined the items RP cost Centers o xl aamin Teno awm ela E Please input the following data Department ae jeoo Work Center E e00 Machine eS l je00 Job Number fF Cm D OOOLOOOOO Department Grinding Work Center WC Grinding 1 or WC Grinding 2 And continue Page 344 of 432 os CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATEI EP Item selection st TD awen O e Please select an Item 4 3101686 Milling Demo HM90 E90A D2 0 C Demo HM90 ES0A D2 3101749 Milling Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 W 75 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 W 92 00 The screen of the items will filter the list and will display only the two items that were linked to the selected cost centers Note If selectin
309. parated only Reworkable 21 5530123 Demo PICCO L MF 1 3 1 00 69 8080803 KIT item separated only Expendable 42 5600224 DemoSPK 42EDFL 1 0 1 00 E eae ae PE la losna zan La La wr 9 10 2 Item Supplier Report This report displays all the items that have at least one supplier definition Items that are supplied by more than one supplier are listed with a separate record for each supplier The report details the information of the item by supplier such as his price for the item his pack size minimum order quantity lead times calculated by the Monthly Usage Process and more Note This report can be also used as a pricelist of supplier For the report open Menu Reports gt Items gt Item Supplier Report Page 222 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 e22 H Item Supplier Report l ol x Supplier E n Additional Item Code E C Item Code DOOS E Item Type E y Supplier Item Code Po Item Description LoS O Discount Minimum Order Quantity Cost Breaks El E E Expire Date E n Found 64 Records 5605179 Demo APK Expendable Iscar 3101686 Demo HM9 Kit Outiltec 3101694 Demo HM9 Durable 3 Outiltec 3102566 Demo HM9 Durable Outiltec 31017465 Demo HM9 Durable Outiltec 5605180 Demo APK Expendable Ingersoll 3101749 Demo HM9 Durable Outiltec 5600048 Demo APK Expendable Ingersoll 5601196 Demo APK Expendable Outiltec 5502097 Demo T
310. planation of the next step to be performed The column named Current Stock contains the actual quantity stored in each bin In the Quantity field you can choose the quantity to issue for the selected item There are two ways to select the quantity 1 By using the numbers from the virtual keyboard 2 By pressing on the Add Reduce buttons If the quantity in the chosen bin is exceeded then another press on the Add button will move the cursor automatically to the next bin in the table Page 254 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 AATE 9 Note The quantity that will appear on the Add Reduce buttons is the default issue quantity defined for that item in the MANAGE system If no default issue quantity is defined then the Add Reduce buttons will be 1 1 9 Note If the field Issue Any Quantity is marked in the MANAGE system under the Cabinet details then you have the possibility to issue any quantity in the bin If this field is not marked you can issue only the full quantity that exists in the bin or not issue at all Page 255 of 432 ED SEX re T MS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 DO MATRIX Issue 1 After selecting the quantity of the chosen item from each bin press on the Gun lt Issue gt button The drawer light will come on Open the drawer and take out the items issued by the entered quantities Close the drawer After closing the drawer the stock quantity
311. ponents MATRIX allows you to MANAGE your cutting tools and any other kind of inventory MATRIX hardware is an ATD Automatic Tool Dispenser MATRIX TM is a software package comprised of two main modules e MATRIX TM MANAGE the management module e MATRIX TM TOUCH the hardware interface system Page 8 of 432 gx CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 A 1 1 General Description of the System The system combines an ATD with software that controls access to the ATD and management of the stock The software can manage an unlimited number of ATD units The user interface of the ATD is implemented by TOUCH screens and the stock can also be managed from regular work stations Automatic cabinet operated by KS TOUCH screen ss Matrix TM server Work station for managing stock gt Database server Support For more detailed information regarding the system please read this User Guide and the MATRIX Hardware User Guide Page 9 of 432 ler sae CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 z MATRIX 1 2 Hardware Overview The MATRIX cabinet includes an integrated PC with its peripheral devices and a TOUCH screen on the front to operate the cabinet Bin PETET a E Drawer Cabinet The cabinet houses multiple drawers that are locked and released by a software command Bins 4 Drawer Drawer o Each storage drawer is divided into bins o In width the maximum number of bin columns i
312. port attached In order to learn more about these options read Chapter B Help and Technical Support section 10 Page 51 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CHAPTER B MATRIX TM MANAGE MODULE MANAGE Module Preview MANAGE is installed on a PC work station Manage lets you define and maintain all the important entities in MATRIX TM e g Item Bin Cabinet Manage is a fully featured stock management application which can be used to manage stock in an ATD or manual warehouse Cabinet MATRIX TM customers are located worldwide so the system supports multiple languages by using language and header tables which contain the system s text translated to different languages The system enables the user to move between different languages by just choosing the language from a menu Page 52 of 432 MATRIX v CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Bo 4 MANAGE Interface and Initial Operations 4 1 Login to the MANAGE System 1 Operate the Login Screen User Name rT Password M 2 Enter the User Name and Password Click the lt Login gt button or hit the lt Enter gt key 4 If the entered User Name and Password are valid the system s opening screen its Desktop will appear Page 53 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 g araise 4 2 The System s Desktop The system s desktop is its main screen and is first displayed after login is completed It functions as
313. ports gt Dead Bins Report Page 209 of 432 MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CITMS HE Dead Bins Report Tagik Bin Key sd Bin Code Coo e Cabinet Name ns Item Key Ct ltem Code sd Item Description DO ltem Type l Supplier Name lr a Found 169 Records Demo1 01 04 06 5902160 Expendabi 08 02 2006 08 13 08 02 2006 07 27 Dermo1 01 03 13 5600660 Expendah 08 02 2006 08 12 08 02 2006 07 26 08 02 2006 07 26 Demo1 01 03 08 6402110 Expendab i 08 02 2006 08 12 Demo2 01 01 03 3101686 kit Hl i 08 02 2006 08 11 Demo1 01 01 13 5505421 Expendab i 01 11 2004 08 02 2006 07 24 Demo1 01 02 09 5601196 Expendab i i Ne 01 11 2004 08 02 2006 07 24 Demo2 01 02 08 3101745 Durable 01 11 2004 Demo1 01 01 01 5501822 Expendabi J i 08 02 2006 07 22 Demo1 01 01 02 560209 Expendab r i 08 02 2006 07 23 Demo1 01 01 03 8 9 99 No 0 9 3 4 Stock by Bin This report displays all the bins and their stock provided that the bin has an item definition It also displays the Bin stock management information for each bin such as Min amp Max quantities draft and ordered quantities usage information etc To run the report open Menu Reports gt Stock Reports gt Stock by Bin 9 3 5 Stock by Cabinet This report displays all the items and their stock by cabinet
314. r of the items from the Source to the Destination bin by the Count Bins operation or Adjust Item in the TOUCH module without adjusting quantities Page 184 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CR 8 8 Recorded Stock Transactions The transactions screen lists all the stock transactions recorded in the system You can access this screen via the Menu Operations gt Transaction The following types of transactions are defined in the system Adjust Bin Quantity Created with or quantity In Manage created by changing Issue Receive Return To Cabinet Send To Rework Stock Count Transfer Zero Issue quantity in the Items in Bin field on the Bin Maintenance screen In Touch created by Adjust Item module Created with or quantity with when issuing item and with when reversing transaction In Manage created by Issue functionality and reversed by lt Update Quantity gt on the Transaction Maintenance screen In Touch created by Issue module and reversed by Transaction module Created with or quantity with when receiving item and with when returning to supplier In Manage created by Receive Order functionality and reversed by Return to Supplier functionality In Touch created by Receive module and cannot be reversed Created with quantity In Manage created by Return functionality
315. r of this User Group to check the new settings Note You can give authorization to a full menu or specific sub menus Giving authorization to a sub menu will be allowed only if the group has authorization to enter the main menu 18 3 2 Controls Authorization To set Controls authorizations in Touch and Manage 1 Open Menu Administration gt Users and Authorizations gt Authorization Manager 2 Inthe User Group field select the group for which you want to set the authorizations 3 Select Controls Authorization tab In this tab you receive a list of all the subjects in the system Under each subject is a list of screens Selecting a screen will display its controls and operations available for the screen Page 329 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ee a H Authorization Manager lol x User Group Admin o Menu Authorization Controls Authorization item Auth Group Budget Auth Group Subject TOUCH SYSTEM a Screen pean Adjust Item Additional Fields Additional Fields gai elie Additional Fields Report Exit Enabled Additional Fields Report Issue gt 4 Adjust Item Count Bins Enabled Advanced Orders Report ET Receive Enabled Advanced Orders Report Disabled Advanced Stock Report Transactions Advanced Stock Report Advanced Transactions Report M Add Advanced Usage Report Application Manager
316. rage Cost 525 25 Price of Reworked Consignment i Item Management Levet j Remarks x Caer orainaren menee Item Key 23 Item Code 4509194 Additional Item Code Barcode Item Description Demo DIN69871 40 ER32 SHORT Page 247 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 3 Switch to the other tabs by pressing on the buttons Item Information Cim somnar Casanare Ctesi f N u Item Information x C Csi Color Size m2 Tested Test Date Item Information xj SSS Demo1 Demo1 09 01 07 Demo1 09 01 12 Demo1 09 01 14 Demo1 Demo1 4 To close the window press on the lt OK gt button Please notice When pressing on the image in Transactions module it will display additional tab called Cost Centers The tab will display the cost centers for which the item was issued Page 248 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 goers Item Information x 4 A es Gaerne aaae Gamera Ne Department Diin Sts lt CSsS Children Driling Machine Parents WC Drilinga Diilinal Page 249 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ae 13 System operations admin ITMDemo 30 06 2008 Select an Option Issue Receive Return 3 Adjust Item Count Bins Transfer Order Receive without Order 13 1 ISSUE Item This module enabl
317. ral Server IP leeh tt i O C User ID Imma t lt i Password Language Enin S Log File No m Application TouchFom Touch Mode Machine ook Come e a Page 34 of 432 BOLL Ex ene CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See MATA 2 Fill in the data on the Settings screen Server IP Server name or IP Address where the database of MATRIX is located If the database is running on the same computer where MATRIX TM is installed then put in this field the name local or use period symbol User ID User ID which is used to access the database initially will be ITM Password Password which is used to access the database initially will be ITM Database Name List of available databases for selection according to the chosen Server IP User ID and Password If there was any incompatibility with the above fields then the list will be empty 9 Note It is not recommended to edit changes in the ITMDemo database since this database is used for updating databases of previous versions and is replaced when reinstalling Server Language List of all the available languages for the currently selected database Choose one Log File The system is able to create logs on the selected level Select a log level No No error logs will be written Minimum Logs will be written only on selected events Maximum Extensive logs will be writ
318. red unit on the Cabinet Maintenance screen on the Cabinet Units tab and click the za lt Update gt button that is on the right side of the grid 2 Ifthe unit has a Bin Code value remove the bin code value and save the change 3 Click the B lt Delete gt button that is on the right side of the grid 5 2 2 Deleting an Entire Cabinet In order to delete a cabinet 1 If the cabinet has Bins and or Bin Units you must first delete them following the deletion instructions described in this guide 2 Mark the required cabinet record and click the cj lt Delete gt button on the Menu bar Page 83 of 432 ZS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 5 2 3 Adding Drawer Types This module allows adding any drawer type by any configuration of bins in order to support managing stock in the KARDEX cabinet and NON AUTOMATIC warehouses You can also build a manual configuration for a MATRIX drawer in addition to the predefined drawer types 1 Open Menu Administration gt Touch Machine gt Drawer Type 2 Click the lt Add gt button The screen Create Drawer Type will be displayed Drawer Type Key j Drawer Type Code Cabinet Type Kardex F Max X l Max Z ie as Create Drawer Type HE Create Drawer Type E E lol x Cabinet Type Select the type of the cabinet for which you wish to add a drawer type Max X The number of bins in the row Max Z The number of b
319. ress MatrixSupport ctms ime com Email Address _ Mail subject Send lags to support Enter message body English 2 Here you can set the Email Address Mail subject Use the message box to describe the problem and click lt Send gt button You will be notified about the success or failure of the sending In case of delivery failure 1 Goto Menu Administration gt System Options 2 Search system options by the group Email Search for Option 705 of Mail server and verify that the option value was set correctly Check for other email options as well Page 227 of 432 GRD g T MS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 xO MATRIX 10 3 Create an Email Report The user has an option to create a report draft and send it through email When working with generic search screens the 6 lt E Mail gt button is available through the Menu bar This feature uses the email program installed on your PC and creates an email draft that you can edit and send For example 1 Go to Menu Main gt Bin to receive a list of bins The button lt E Mail gt on the Menu bar will be enabled 2 Click the 6 lt E Mail gt button on the Menu bar An E Mail draft will be created on your Desktop attaching to it an MS Excel file of Bins report By using the email program you can edit the email address subject etc Page 228 of 432 om ee ew I totes CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide
320. rocess History option To check the restored database set the Settings program to the created database and login to the Manage module 25 3 Activate Jobs A job is a series of commands designed to do a certain task Jobs are stored on a server level and usually activated automatically by the operating system 25 3 1 Jobs in MATRIX TM MATRIX TM software creates five different types of jobs in order to enable automatic processes such as creating automatic purchase orders sending reports etc The jobs are automatically activated while being created and they will normally be run automatically by the operating system at the scheduled time The Activate Jobs option in the Database Administration tool enables activating a job manually or deleting it from the server Please use this option carefully The five types of jobs are 1 DBName EndOfMonthProcess This job is responsible for the automatic running of the Monthly Process The job is created by changing system options 304 305 in the Manage module and activated automatically at the time scheduled in these system options See more in Chapter D Monthly Process section 21 1 2 DBName ReportsEngine This job is responsible for the automatic running of the Scheduled Reports and Interfaces Page 397 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 The job is created by changing system option 209 in the Manage module and activated automatically every hour
321. roject for importing the cost centers of Machine header and import the data similar to the previous import Cost centers of Machine header imported by the project ioj x Cost Center Details Key 57 Cost Center Code Name Cost Center Description Mm Found 19 Records Work Center Work Center Tooling Milling work Center Drilling Work Center Machine Machine Threading INTEGREX 30 INTEGREX 100 Machine INTEGREX 200 Machine INTEGREX 300 Machine Machine Machine Machine _ MAC TURN MAZAK6200 1 _ MAZAK6200 2 MAZAK6200 3 Machine MAZAK6200 4 Machine MAZAK6200 5 Machine NAKAMURA WWT250 7 Machine NAKAMURA WT250 8 Machine OKUMA LT10 1 Machine Machine OKUMA LT102 OKUMA LT103_ Page 367 of 432 CA CITMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 as S 6 Create data table for the links of cost centers of Machine header to the cost centers of Work Center header as in the following table Table 3 Data for table TVL_COST_CENTER_LINKS COST_CENTER_CODE_CHILD COST_CENTER_CODE_PARENT WC01 Please note that in the table of links some of the Machine cost centers marked in red are linked to more than one Work Center 7 Create import project for importing the links and import the data as in the following screen Page 368 of 432 CITIMIS MATR
322. s Links Orders Cost Centers Department Grinding Work Center We Grinding Work Center WC Grinding2 4 Click the lt Save gt button on the main toolbar 5 Open the report that displays the linked item to cost centers by Menu Reports gt Items gt Items Cost Centers The screen will display results as following Page 336 of 432 ms Cost Centers Item Key si ltem Code P ltem Description D Cost Center Name E y C Found 3 Records 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 Work Center 10 x WC Grinding2 WC Grinding1 3101749 Demo HM90 E904 D1 25 3 Department D1 Grinding 6 Open the cost center header for which you want to limit item selection for issue mark the Item Limitation field and save In the example here open the Departmen and Work Center headers HE Cost Center Header Maintenance Cost Center Name Cost Center Sequence fi Is Required Vv Min Length D 0 x Cost Center Label Department Manual Input Type Choose from List Cost Center Parent f ti H Max Length ss Remarks Item Limitation M RE Cost Center Header Maintenance Cost Center Name Work Center Center Cost Center Sequence A Is Required Iv Min Length By this the required definitions are completed l x Cost Center Label Work Center Manual Input Type Choose from L
323. s program and set the connection to the database that you need to upgrade as also described in Chapter A Connect to the Database section 3 1 4 Login to the Database Administration program and check that the Connection details point to the correct database Page 417 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 5 Backup the database into file as described in Chapter E Backup of the Database section 25 1 This will guarantee the data is saved before making changes and in case any problem happens during the upgrade you can always go back to the previous version by restoring the database from the backed up file until finding a solution for failure 6 Select Restore Defaults option to upgrade the database as also described in Chapter E Restore Defaults section 25 6 Now you are ready to run the Manage and Touch software Note It is not possible to adjust the database to the earlier versions but only restoring the database from backed up file which will include changes done until the time of backup 26 6 How to Add a cabinet other than MATRIX MATRIX TM software supports working with Kardex and Non Automatic warehouses as well as with the MATRIX cabinet To build these types of cabinets 1 Follow Chapter B Adding Drawer Types section 5 2 3 for adding customized drawer configurations 2 Follow Chapter B Adding a Cabinet section 5 2 1 for adding a warehouse of the desired type and by Cabinet Units
324. s 14 In depth the maximum number of bin rows is 7 Drawers are supplied in pre fixed bin configurations ranging from 20 bins per drawer up to maximum density 7 14 98 bins as seen in the diagram o Drawers are supplied in 3 heights 50 75 and 100mm Page 10 of 432 SEs CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 z MATRIX 9 Note There is an exception where a drawer is not divided into bins open drawer it functions as a single or multiple virtual bins Bin o A bin is the basic stock management unit o Each bin has a cover that is locked o Each bin location is defined according to its X Y Z coordinates known as Bin Units Page 11 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eee MATRIX Drawer configurations Note The table below displays all the available configurations for drawers in MATRIX cabinet drawer configurations For more details please refer to the documentation of hardware innovations Type D 0 23 gt 45 7 8 0 1 12 13 84 Solencs ID wor Drawer with no division to bins Type D 1 fa alala als alala a ala nla fa alala l als afela alala ala fa slala als alela sla a nla gT fa ala alala alee ala n n n ag Pehalala atalala lala nl s i fa ala alala alala lala aa GLLLLELLLLLLLLL s o wwo we Type D 3 Page 12 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Versi
325. s see Chapter D Item Authorizations Group section 16 4 The unit in which the item is measured e g PCS Pieces The group to which the item belongs This information is helpful for tracking an item in the system An additional classification of the item You can edit its options in the list as described in Chapter D Item Category section 16 2 An additional classification of the item The options in this list cannot be edited An additional classification of the item The options in this list cannot be edited The list is filtered according to the selected Main Family The item image as it is also displayed on the TOUCH module To change the image click the CJ browse button and select an image file This will copy the selected file into the folder as defined in system option 400 Item Pictures path and will rename the file using Item Code as a file name with extension as defined in system option 204 Picture File Type Indicates the number of items in this type of package Default Issue Quantity The default quantity for an issue of this item When defining Item Weight Item Price this item for bin this value will be copied to the bin s Default Issue Quantity field The item weight for information Indicates the default item price When defining this item for a bin this value will be copied to the bin s Issue Price field Page 102 of 432 CR T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Average Cost This fi
326. s the quantity of ITEM 5530123 in each cabinet 3 ITEM level manages the quantity of ITEM 5530123 in all cabinets According to periods of use and usage statistics the system calculates automatically or manually depending on the set parameters of the user the usage data for each Stock Management Level For example the system calculates the required minimum and maximum quantities of items on each level in order to avoid stock shortage It is the user s decision whether to use this calculation and allow the system to create automatic orders based on it Alternatively the user can define minimum and maximum quantities for each Stock Management Level manually For more information see Chapter D Manual Processes section 21 Page 128 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 The Chart of Stock Management Levels ITEM Level CABINET Level Demo 2 Drawer 1 tain oon aT E EHE Bin Key 53 54 356 362 363 447 448 449 InStock 1 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 E New M used O Reworked Demo1 01 01 14 Demo1 01 04 11 MatrixDemo1 MatrixDemo1 5530123 Reworkable No Reworkable No 54 Demo1 01 04 12 MatrixDemo1 58530123 Reworkable No Yes 5 00 356 Demo1 09 07 07 MatrixDemo1 35530123 Reworkable No No 1 00 362 Demo1 09 07 13 MatrixDemo1 5530123 Reworkable Yes No 3 00 Demo1 09 07 14 Demo2 01 06 14 MatrixDemo1 MatrixDemo2 55930123 5530123 Reworkable Reworka
327. s to load image files of the items in order to make them available for display in the Manage and Touch modules To load the files properly all the files must be named exactly as Item Code or as Additional Item Code or as primary Supplier Item Code with the extension defined in the Manage module system option 204 To transfer the image files ds In the Manage module set the System Option 400 Item Pictures path to the folder that should contain item image files Verify that all the files that you wish to transfer are named by Item Code or by Additional Item Code or by Supplier Item Code and with extension as defined in System Option 204 Picture File Type In the Folder Path select the folder that contains all the image files Select one of the three options by which the files are named For example if the files are named by Additional Item Code then select this option Check the Overwrite Pictures option to overwrite the files on the destined folder if they exist Click the lt Transfer Picture gt button to execute the transfer The program will scan the info of each item from the database defined in Connection details and will search for a compatible image file in the folder defined in Folder Path If a match was found the file will be copied to the folder defined in system option 400 and respectively renamed by Item Code in order to display the image in Manage and Touch modules the system uses It
328. ser has an email defined on his User Maintenance screen File the created report will remain on the hard drive by location defined in field File Name Insert a file name or full path for the created report If this value is empty the system will use the Query Name as File Name If you define only a file name or a full path which is identical to the path defined in system option 401 then the file will be created temporarily This system option points to temporary folder and its content is automatically removed when loading closing Manage application The default folder will be MatrixTempDir Reports inside the installation folder Therefore if you need to keep the copy of the report as a file on the hard drive it is recommended to insert a full and different path in order to override the path in the system option 401 Date Last Updated Updated by the system with the date when the last check for Separator Active automatic reports was done Please notice that the report will not be created at the day that was defined in this field therefore it is recommended to keep this field initially empty or with a past date Separator sign used for separating fields in TXT files Option to activate or deactivate the automatic running of the report Click the ta lt Save gt button The record will be added to the list of scheduled reports At the defined time the report will run and will automatically create the report
329. ses time It is recommended to make the End of Month process a scheduled process to run at the beginning of the new month You can schedule this task through the task scheduler You can also run this option manually through the menus Menu Administration gt Manual Process choose the Monthly Usage Process and click lt Commit gt Page 349 of 432 fe Manual Process Monthly Usage Process Automatic PO Process Supplier Name Cabinet Name Site oouo Page 350 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 21 2 Automatic PO Process This process scans the system and locates stock shortages Once a stock shortage has been found the system will create an automatic order to fulfill the need In general the system is looking at the current stock in the selected stock level and comparing it to the minimum stock level parameter If the stock is less than the minimum stock level an order will be created to bring the stock up to the maximum stock level The order which is created can be assigned to a certain Bin an Item Cabinet or an Item The decision as to which stock level will apply to replenish is defined in the bin Bin stock management in the Cabinet and also in the Item The system also looks at system option 903 see explanation below The orders which are created can be active orders or draft orders See system option no 802 for a detailed explanation It is recommended to ma
330. sic KobiB 1209 Kobi Bryant Kobi Bryant Basic JacobC 1112 Jacob Cohen Jacob Cohen Basic continuation of the table 1 955 85 66 Grant tooling com 60050 en US 1 955 85 67 lan tooling com 60051 en US 1 955 85 68 George tooling com 60052 de 1 955 85 69 Hillary tooling com 60053 de 1 955 85 70 Andrew tooling com 60054 hu 1 955 85 71 Greg tooling com 60055 de 1 955 85 72 Kobi tooling com 60056 ru 1 955 85 73 Jacob tooling com 60057 he 9 Note It is not necessary to rename the column names in Excel the same as in the example but the format of the value must be equal Numeric Text Boolean or Date Page 355 of 432 CITMS 2 MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CR RD P tte MATRIX 22 1 2 Import Item Groups This section describes Import of Item Groups by table TVL_ITEM_GROUPS This table can be imported independently Required GROUP_CODE Group Code Free text up to 50 characters Required Unique GROUP_DESCRIPTION Group Description Free text up to 100 characters DATE_CREATED USER_CREATED DATE_LAST_MODIFIED USER_LAST_MODIFIED These fields are not in the interface and not recommended for import Example for Excel format 01 Tooling 02 Milling 03 Drilling 04 Threading 05 ISO Turn Page 356 of 432 CITMS 22 1 3 MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Import Suppliers P OSNA MATIX This s
331. sor is positioned at the time instead of the user having to key in the data Important The Barcode reader is usually configured to add a prefix to the read barcode the information is available from the Barcode supplier or its hardware documentation In order to work with barcodes the barcode configured prefix must fit the prefix expected to be read in the MATRIX TM software To fit the prefix set the System Option 1012 Barcode prefix in the MANAGE module The barcode can be used in several screens 1 Login to the system Page 236 of 432 j T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CR If the user has a badge with a barcode ID number he can login automatically to the system by reading the barcode with the barcode reader or otherwise manually input the user name and password To enable login with a bar coded badge define the User Code Badge Number for the user in the MANAGE module For more information read Chapter D Users section 18 2 Input Cost Centers in the Issue process If the cost centers are configured as Numerical or Alpha numerical fields and not as a list in the MANAGE module the user can input the values by reading them by barcode Search Item In all the search screens where the system expects to get item information like Item Code or Item Description the user can read a barcode of the item As a response if only one match was found the next screen of the process will appear
332. st dur Item Description Capacity jo Items in Bin po Allow Over Capacity V Used Item E Reworked E Transaction Maintenance screen This screen includes four additional reference fields ftest dur Kardex 01 2 5 WE Transaction Maintenance Transaction Key Update fez sS S S Transaction Type Receive Bin Code Create User admin c proctor Update User admin creator Create Date 29 10 2007 Update Date 29 10 2007 General Costs Cabinet Status ive ltem Code ftest dur ltem Description jtest dur Matrix O7 01 08 Matrix Matrix PO and Costs PO Number pa Reference 1 T Reference 2 Transaction Value Line No a poo United States Dollar Trans value in System currency Be200 8 I Consignment System Curr NIS Reference 3 e Reference 4 E Page 389 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATRIX v 24 3 Interface Results Report The report displays all the transactions that were transmitted or that were attempted to be transmitted Open Menu Administration gt Interfaces gt Interface Report The following screen will be displayed E Interface Report Transaction Key OOo O Transaction Date 20 10 2007 gt Transaction Types o y Found 61 Records 22 10 2007 11 10 Receive DEMO1 5600224 admin creator Transmitted 22 10 2007 11 14 Receive DEM
333. t you will continue issue process to next step and this will create Issue transaction only for the item stored in locker By pressing lt No gt the issue process will be stopped System Message Message Number 1519 The Key for the selected bin is not available lastly issued by admin A Would you like to continue with transaction Page 267 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 13 1 3 Issue Items by Cost Centers You can define list of items that will be available for Issue according to the selected cost center All the other items to be filtered and non accessible This will require defining the links between cost centers and items in the Manage application For making the required definitions please follow the Chapter D Define Items per Cost Center section 19 3 13 2 RECEIVE Item The purpose of this process is to restock the cabinet with the items that were ordered The system will display all open order lines filtering the order lines that were ordered for cabinets warehouses that are not connected to the current TOUCH station The process supports receive of all the types of orders Standard Purchase Order Order of new items supplied by supplier vendor Rework Order Order of reworked regrind items supplied usually by regrinding supplier Internal Order Internal Order of items from another system defined cabinet For more information it is important to read Chapter B RECEIVE Items secti
334. t Receive without Order gt icon The following screen will be displayed Page 288 of 432 AOE pY CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 SX FA RD Receive Item admin ITMDemo 29 06 2008 Please enter Item Order HeliOcto Cutter F45KT DO63 22 Demo HM90 ES0A D2 Demo HM90 E90A D20 3 W20 C Milling i 9999999 00 3101694 Demo HM90 E90A D3 Demo HM90 E904 D32 4 2 Milling 56 999999 Demo HM90 E90A D 7 Demo HM90 E90A D 75 3 W 75 C Milling i 156 00 Demo HM90 E90A D1 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 W 75 Milling 9999999 00 Demo HM90 E90A D 6 Demo HM90 E90A D 62 2 C 62 LB Milling 151 00 HeliAlu Cutter HM90 EAL D50 W AFO 24 00 Demo CHAMRING 110 Demo CHAMRING 110 WN32 09 Drilling 9999999 00 Demo CHAMRING 080 Demo CHAMRING 080 WWN20 06 Drilling 9999999 00 ChambDrillJet Drill DSM 160 024 AFO 32 00 DemoDR MF 10L 2 25 Demo DR MF 10L 2 25D 12A 05 Drilling 78 00 This screen displays all the items of the current Touch station that also have free space to be stored in The Space column represents the maximal number of items that can be received When the space 9 999 999 00 it means that some of the bins with that item was marked with Allow Over Capacity and therefore there is no limit on the number of items that can be received 2 Select the item you wish to receive into stock and press on the lt
335. tails Password Insert the password Confirm password Insert the same password Full Name Full name Phone No Phone No E Mail Insert the email for receiving the scheduled reports and more Locked Check the box for locking the login to the system for the user First Name First Name Last Name Last Name Badge Number User Code The barcode on the personal card in order to login to the Touch module by the barcode reader The user code in order to login to the Touch module by the card reader Page 326 of 432 RR CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 UA MATRIX User s Language The personal settings of interface language for Manage and Touch modules If no value is selected the default language will be taken from general setting Click the c lt Save gt button on the Menu bar Assign user to group groups After saving a frame will appear on the bottom of the window with the possibility to connect the user to a Group or Groups of Users In order to add the user to a group click the lt Add gt button inside the frame The following screen will appear Users Group User Group Cc Choose the group required and click the E lt Save gt button on the dialog screen Repeat the steps 3 4 to assign the user to other groups Click the E lt Save gt button on the Menu bar Page 327 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 o gt 18 3 Authorizatio
336. taller will guide you through the steps required to install Matrix Tools on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Cancel i Page 30 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 e 2 Choose Location i Matrix Tools Select Installation Folder The installer will install Matrix Tools to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Folder C Program Files iscar CIM Matrix Tools Browse Disk Cost Install Matrix Tools for yourself or for anyone who uses this computer Everyone C Just me Cancel lt Back T Page 31 of 432 Sox CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 z 3 Finally click lt Next gt to start the MATRIX Tools Installation Ta Matrix Tools Confirm Installation The installer is ready to install Matris Tools on your computer Click Next to start the installation TECHNICAL NOTES for MATRIX Tools e Before you run the application verify that a serial RS232 cable is connected between your computer and the machine controller It can also work if your computer has 2 free serial ports In this case you
337. ten TOUCH Mode Select the mode to run TOUCH module Machine Working with MATRIX cabinet Virtual Working virtually with no MATRIX cabinet and no simulator Simulator Working with VMDemo cabinet simulator 9 Note You must check Settings definitions after installation of version upgrades 9 Note If this screen was opened while MANAGE or TOUCH module is open then you must restart the software modules for the changes to take effect Page 35 of 432 PQ ODD Jee CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATRIX 3 2 MANAGE module The Manage module is an administrative tool for initializing the Matrix database with the data 3 2 1 Login to MANAGE Steps to login to MANAGE module 1 Go to the Windows Start Menu gt Programs gt MATRIX TM gt MATRIX TM Manage The Login screen will be displayed If there is any problem in running the module please refer to Chapter A Connect to the Database section 3 1 User Name o Password M Login 2 Fill in the User Name and Password fields and click the lt Login gt button Initial User Name admin Initial Password admin If there is any problem to login check the user name and password 9 Note After the first login the password should be changed to ensure data security Page 36 of 432 os CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MATRIX 3 MATRIX TM Manage screen will then be displayed Main Menu Toolbar g Matrix TM Mana
338. the 902 cases average lead time Stock management level used for the automatic order calculation 1 BIN level ordering 2 ITEM CABINET level ordering 3 ITEM level ordering 4 Combination 903 Stock Management level of all levels ordering Page 319 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 CR GREI oSA MATRIX If checked Reworked bin will function the same as New bin for Reworkable items 1 The stock from Reworked bin will be summed up from the Bin level to the Cabinet and Item levels 2 The Receive process will allow using reworked bin for receiving new item and new bin for Item from Reworked bin good receiving reworked item meaning mixing in one bin new 904 as New and reworked items If checked Used bin will function the same as New bin for Durable Kit items 1 The stock from Used bin will be summed up from the Bin level to the Cabinet and Item levels 2 The Receive amp Return processes will allow Item from Used bin good as using used bin for new item and new bin for used item 905 New meaning mixing in one bin new and used items Require password when badge Does the user have to input password after badge is 1004 is scanned scanned Waiting time in seconds until the system will automatically log the user out if no actions were taken 1007 Login Time out If Zero then there will be no timeout A specific User name is chosen After loadin
339. the drawer following the instructions and adjust the quantities on the screen according to actual quantities counted in the bin s 4 Press on the lt Update gt button to save the new quantities Close the drawer At this point a Count transaction s will be created with the logged in user name Note The difference between Adjust Item and Count Bin Adjust Item the search and selection is done for particular item in any drawer Count Bins the search and selection is done for particular bin or all bins in particular drawer 3 3 8 Transfer Orders A user who has authority to execute a transfer order can transfer the ordered items from one cabinet Transaction and then receive them into the cabinet which made the Internal Order In the MANAGE module an Internal Order with the items for transfer must first have been created in Open status To execute the transfer order 1 Press on the lt Transfer Order gt icon Page 48 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 EERO 2 3 4 5 Search for an item by barcode or from the list and select it Open the bin following the instructions written at the top of the screen in RED and issue the item Once the user opens the drawer and the bin latch pops up the item is considered as issued for transfer At this point a Transfer transaction with a negative Transaction quantity with the logged in user will be created Check this transaction in
340. the drawer which is lit up All bins chosen for counting will open For every bin in the screen where there are discrepancies you must update the stock quantities in the Quantity field This can be done by using the virtual keyboard Note You can also close the drawer and then update the counted quantities in the system Note If all quantities in the bin match the counted quantities you can mark the Counted field for all displayed bins by pressing on the ana lt Mark All gt button Note Where the quantity is updated the Counted field will be automatically marked If there were no differences between the counted quantity and the Quantity field the Counted field check box must be marked manually This will update the last counted date for that bin 8 Close the drawer 9 Press on the lt Update gt button 10 All stock quantities will be updated and for every bin that was marked as counted the last counting date will be updated A stock count transaction on the difference will be also created 13 6 TRANSFER ORDER This module enables transferring items from one cabinet to another the ordering receiving cabinet against an Internal Order An Internal Order contains order lines that detail the ordering cabinet bin the ordered item and quantity that needs to be transferred For more information regarding internal orders see Chapter B Orders Purchase Rework and Internal section 7 Page 2
341. the frame for all the system s screens The desktop includes the system s menu toolbar and shortcuts Following is the Desktop Description Main Menu Toolbar MATRIX TM Manage 18 x Main Operations Order Reports Tables Administration ep Windows See Seaeeq ae Ic TIMIS Ai Text status ITMDemo admin Shortcuts Page 54 of 432 SREP SE CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 See PX MATA Main Menu The system s menu includes the following options 1 Main e Bin e item e Cabinet e Supplier 2 Operations contains stock management related modules e Issue e Return e Stock Count e Stock Transfer e Transaction 3 Order e Order Orders standard order maintenance Rework Orders Internal Orders Show All Orders e Transfer Orders e Receive Order e Receive without Order e Invoices e Return to Supplier 4 Reports e Transactions Advanced Transactions Report Issue Return Comparison e Stock Reports Advanced Stock Report Dead Items Report Page 55 of 432 R CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 E Dead Bins Report Stock by Bin Stock by Cabinet Stock by Item Min Comparison Max Comparison e Usage Report Basic Usage Report Advanced Usage Report e Stock Shortage Stock Shortage Advanced Stock Shortage Early Warning Report e Stock Valuation Report Valuation By Bin Report Valuation By Item Report Valuation By Cabi
342. then before allowing an item to be issued the system will verify that the user did not exceed the Quantity budget limit for this item If the Activate issue budget by requested quantity exceeds quantity budget the 107 Quantity of items requested issue will not be allowed If the budget is activated then before allowing an item to be issued the system will verify that the user did not exceed the Amount budget limit If the requested Activate issue budget by quantity exceeds amount budget the requested issue 108 Amount will not be allowed Force to issue old items before If checked the TOUCH module will compel the issue of 109 new items Used Reworked items before displaying new items Display options to close order line or remain open when Display options for partial the order line is received partially If unchecked the 110 receive order line will not be closed until fully received Page 316 of 432 CITMS Number of reference fields to MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 BRR T Sete MATRIX Qf em Number of reference fields to use on Receive process 111 use on Receive for interfaces with ERP systems 112 Type of Reference fields Type of Reference fields for Interfaces Numeric or Text 201 Font Size Font Size used for buttons in TOUCH module 203 System Currency Key The system currency key 204 Picture File Type File type for item pictures Maximum number of
343. tion Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions Additional Item Code LOSS O ltem Long Description DemoDR MF 10L 2 25D 124 05 Barcode LOSS ltem Auth Group L H Unit of Measure Peces H ltem Group Drilling i ee Category fReguar O Main Family C Default Issue Quantity T00 Sub Family D ltem Weight E Item Price fico Average Cost 85 60 Price of Reworked Primary Supplier Ingersoll M Item Management Level Im Consignment m Update Create User facher Update User fachi Create Date 08 02 2006 Update Date 08 02 2006 m Remarks Make the required changes on the maintenance screen of the record and click lt Save gt button to save them Whilst your update screen is open you can switch to the next or previous record from the list by clicking the lt Back gt or lt Next gt button on the toolbar Page 66 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Delete a record User can delete records in a generic search screen like from the list of Items Suppliers etc To delete a record 1 Open the relevant search screen 2 Search for the relevant record mark it in the grid and click the lt Delete gt button on the toolbar The selected record will be deleted from the database If for any reason a record cannot be deleted a system message explaining the reason will appear Shortcut keys MANAGE module enables
344. tion from the cabinet and workstations Page 17 of 432 MATRIX TM MANAGE MATRIX TM TOUCH Administrative workstations Cabinet operated by Touch screen LAN Network connection Database is located on a Network Server DATABASE SERVER The Matrix cabinets and the PC stations that SQL Server or MSDE is installed run Manage access the database via LAN with MATRIX TM Database Server 1 If not installed install the Microsoft Net Framework 2 0 2 If Microsoft SQL Server is not installed install MSDE 3 During Matrix setup install Server and Manage modules No need to install Touch module Cabinet 1 The Microsoft Net Framework 2 0 is usually installed If not install the program 2 Install Matrix setup with Manage and Touch modules No need to install Server module Workstation 1 Install Microsoft Net Framework 2 0 2 Install Matrix setup with Manage module only No need to install Server and Touch modules Page 18 of 432 SEs CITIM S MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 a 2 2 2 SQL Database installed on the Cabinet PC The Database is located on the cabinet PC which is used as a server and is accessed through the network connection from the workstations MATRIX TM MANAGE MATRIX TM TOUCH Administrative workstations Cabinet operated by Touch screen MATRIX TM Database local ly Cabinet PC used as Server D MSDE is installed with amp a watts LAN Network connection Database is located
345. tion message will appear for the line 3 Fill the values for the fields Cabinet Bin Quantity etc Adding BINS to a REWORK order 1 Click the lt Add gt button located at the right of the order line grid The following screen will appear EE j aloixl Bin Key DOO Bin Code f J Item Key DOO Cabinet Name E Item Code oO Cabinet Type Name y Used Item H ltem Description a ltem Type H Calc Level H Automatic Order 0 H Do not Order H Search Select Found 4 Records z 3101694 Demo2 01 03 09 5 3101745 Milling Demo2 01 06 02 3102566 Milling Demo2 01 06 04 3201154 Drilling Demo CHA It will display all the bins that contain used items of Durable Kit Reworkable types 2 Search for the required BINs mark the line and click the lt Select gt button or double click the line Note You can select multiple bins by holding the CTRL key and selecting the records The Bins screen will be closed and the selected bins will be added transferring all the bin stock to the order As a result an additional index tab will appear below 3 Change the values for the fields Quantity etc if required Page 141 of 432 9 CITMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Sub tabs The sub tabs created below appear after adding an item bin to an order If you cannot see the tabs and you need to edit
346. to make the software accessible to all users of this computer and click lt Next gt to continue ii MATRIX TM 5 Select the program modules you wish to install and click lt Next gt to continue Page 23 of 432 Choose Installation Programs IV Install Server IV Install Manage IV Install Touch and Manage M Install Server A Server module for Database Choose this option if the current computer contains the Database Important In order to work on a local database you need to install MSDE from as described in Chapter A Install MSDE section 2 3 Note This setup will install a new DB on your server or update an existing DB overwriting the demo database M Install Manage A Client module for Administrative work It is recommended to choose this option whether or not the current computer is connected to MATRIX Cabinet M Install Touch A Client module for work with the cabinet Choose this option if the current computer is connected to the MATRIX Cabinet Page 24 of 432 ais MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 tee Q Note This module can be installed on a computer that is not connected to a MATRIX cabinet in order to simulate cabinet functionality 6 Click lt Register Now gt to install a registered version using a serial number or Click lt Next gt to install a Demo version that will expire after 30 days If you install a Demo version skip to step 8 otherwise continue to the ne
347. tock Management field Check the box of Automatic Order field Make sure that the field Do not Order is not checked Select Stock Management tab and fix the following settings Page 154 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 RE Bin Maintenance i 0 x Bin Key Bin Code Cabinet Code ltem Code ltem Description General Stock Management Custom Fields Usage information Calculated Override Effective Until Av Monthly Usage boo 8 i E Emz Minimum Quantity foo ooo E Maximum Quantity bo E Frequency Class Issues per month E C E m y Average Frequency i ae Look at the Minimum and Maximum levels which are calculated by the system If they are sufficient you do not need to change any data in this tab If you wish to override those values do the following Fill in the value for Minimum Quantity field Fill in the value for Maximum Quantity field Fill in the date for Effective Until field This date will be effective for creating automatic orders according to minimum and maximum quantities that were inserted manually Override column When this date expires the automatic orders will be created according to the minimum and maximum quantities that were calculated automatically Calculated column If you decided to include the Item Cabinet level for automatic orders Go to the Cabinet Maintenance screen of the cabinets that you wish to include
348. touch screen You will have to create new drawer types compatible to the trays configuration For more information see Chapter B Adding Drawer Types section 5 2 3 NON AUTOMATIC Any warehouse such as tool cabinet or open shelves The stock of such a warehouse can be managed as well by the MATRIX Page 74 of 432 CITMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 TM software by attaching it to the TOUCH definitions In the TOUCH module when the user will request to open a bin he will be redirected to the warehouse You will have to create new drawer types compatible to this manual warehouse For more information see Chapter B Adding Drawer Types section 5 2 3 Stock Management Level Cabinet Sequence COM Port Is Internal Order For creating automatic orders set the appropriate stock management level for the cabinet Bin level Uses the minimum and maximum quantities defined for each bin of the same cabinet Items Cabinet level Uses the minimum and maximum quantities defined for each item in the same cabinet Item_ level Does not use the minimum and maximum quantities defined for Bin and Items Cabinet levels Please note that the creation of automatic orders will depend also on the value of the System Option 903 Sys Opt Bin Item Cabinet Item All levels 903 Cabinet Bin N Item Cabinet N Ni Item N N Cabinet sequence number in the chain of the cabinets attac
349. ts also enables you to update the transactions For more information read Chapter B Recorded Stock Transactions section 8 8 9 2 2 Advanced Transactions Report This screen enables the user to create a customized report for transactions based on the records of the basic transactions report It also enables the user to save the report and to run it at scheduled time The report displays the selected transactions by Quantity Value The quantity of items in the transaction The total monetary value of the transaction taken from Line value system currency of the transaction To run the report open Menu Reports gt Transactions gt Advanced Transactions Report Page 205 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ematera Advanced Transactions Report lol xi Description Transactions report Issued quantities in 2007 by Chart Filter and Grouping Choose Fields Report Type l Group By By Design Report C Standard Chart Revert ime Listing No Subtotals i item Code F Listing Subtotals X Field item Code F Subtotals Only Field ouantty H Chart PE Quantity Color Style Condition operator All conditions C At least one condition O D simpe Tte Title Adjust Bin Quantity Issue Receive Return To Cabinet Transfer Zero Issue Stock Count Send To Rework Transaction Ty a gt Transaction Date gt Pe 31 07 2007 E
350. type bak v Cancel 3 To create a new and empty MATRIX TM database select the following file MATRIX Installation folder ServerSetup DB ITM bak Otherwise select any other database backup file bak from which to restore the data 4 The data from the backup file will be restored into the database displayed in the Connection details as selected in the Settings program If you want to restore the file into a different database check the New box and insert a new name into New Database name field 5 Click the lt Restore gt button to activate the restore If you selected to restore the data into existing database the following message will be displayed Attention hl The specified database name already exists Would you like to overwrite it Carefully select if to overwrite the database or to restore it to another database At this point the database will be restored and notify about the restore status Important The Restore operation will also create jobs according to the definitions in the restored database Please take it into account when restoring temporary databases it might send emails with orders and reports if the jobs are set to create them It is strongly recommended to delete the unnecessary jobs as described in Chapter E Activate Jobs section 25 3 Page 396 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Note A restore will also create a transaction which you can track in the P
351. upplier we will usually receive them to the new bins depends also on the system options 904 and 905 Rework Order An order for sending used items from stock to rework regrind process 1 Operated by Menu Order gt Rework Orders 2 The order can be created manually only 3 When creating the order we select bins that store used items Select bin that is defined as Used Item see for Bin Maintenance screen and that contains any type of Page 131 of 432 3 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 item except Expendable In order to take out the items physically from the cabinet use Adjust Item option or Count Bins in the TOUCH module to open the bins and to take the items out without adjusting quantities 4 In order to Receive the items into the system it is necessary to make lt Send Order gt operation 5 When the items are returned from regrind process we will receive them as usual to the bins defined as Reworked depends also on the system options 904 and 905 Internal Order An order for transferring stock from cabinet to cabinet The tools for transfer can be taken from a main warehouse or from any other cabinet The ordered item can be transferred from any location to any location such as bin to bin from cabinet to cabinet and also from site to site 1 Operated by Menu Order gt Internal Orders 2 The Internal order can be created both manually and automatically 3 When creating the I
352. upport 10 1 MANAGE Help Documentation The MATRIX TM software has an option to open Help by topic When using some system features and opening screens the help is available through the Menu bar For example 1 Goto Menu Main gt Bin to receive a list of bins The button lt Help gt on the Menu bar will be enabled 2 Click the tc lt Help gt button on the Menu bar MANAGE Help will be opened to the topic Bin Usually it will describe the feature fields and the instructions for use Page 225 of 432 MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 From here you can search for other topics of the MANAGE module and TOUCH module Also e You can view the MATRIX TM Help by going to Menu Help gt Help or e For Help files on different languages only those that were translated open the MATRIX TM installation folder and continue to the folder MATRIX TM helpFiles 10 2 Sending Logs from MATRIX TM The user has an option to send an email directly from MATRIX TM MANAGE to Technical Support or to any other email address The e mail will automatically attach the log files AutoPO YYYYMMDD log and Communication YYYYMMDD log that the system created for the same day in order to help resolve the issue 1 Goto Menu Help gt Send Email to Support The following screen will appear Page 226 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 S MATRIX HE Send Email to Support loj x CTMS Support Add
353. urn Item gt button to confirm return of all the quantities The stock will be updated and a Return to Cabinet transaction will be recorded in the system for each record Note You can return items to the bin according to the bin capacity limits Page 174 of 432 SREY CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 z s ad v 8 5 ISSUE Item This screen allows the user to issue items from stock In order to display this screen choose Menu Operations gt Issue The screen will require the user to perform a number of steps before the issue e Choose employee who is requesting the issue Issue to e Choose cost centers e Search and Choose items e Update quantities e Operate issue process HE Issue 0 x Issue to admin z Cost Center Department Drilling Machine Drilling Machine 12 Work Center we Drilling 7 Job Number Generic Search Item Code 320 ltem Description o NNi Cabinet O Bin gt 3202028 DemoDR M Drilling Demo Demo1 06 01 01 DemoDR M Durable Drilling Demo1 Demo1 06 01 02 2 00 3202030 Demo1 06 01 03 3202031 DemoDR M Demo1 Demo1 06 01 02 Page 175 of 432 ey 1a CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 m MATRIX Choose employee requesting the issue Choose the employee from the list Issue to admin creator Choose cost centers m Cost Center Department Department 1 z Machi
354. used for follow up Order Date Indicates the date the order was initiated Requested By Indicates the name of the user who made the request Request Date Indicates the date by which the order is needed Currency Received from the supplier s definition and used for the order s cost calculation Freight The amount to be paid for shipping the order Page 138 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 Total Price The value of all lines in the order automatically calculated Sent Indicates whether the order was sent to supplier Site The site that the order is created for Send to ERP Indicates whether this order and its order lines will be sent to an ERP system This value is automatically received from Supplier definition Remarks General remarks Create User Create Date Update User Update Date Filled automatically by the system and cannot be changed manually 7 1 2 Tab Details This tab enables adding updating and deleting order lines It is divided into two sections The top section contains a grid which displays PO records The lower part contains an index tab with the following sub tabs Line Details Remarks Additional Fields and Invoices When creating a standard Order or Internal Order the user will have to select the ITEMS to be ordered When creating a Rework Order the user will have to select BINS which contain the used items that need to be reworked Page 139 of 432 CITIMS
355. user is notified that the copying operation has successfully ended Page 116 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 5 4 3 Kit Management MATRIX TM lets you manage Kits A kit is created from a list of items along with the quantity of each such item In order to define a kit you need to open an item of type Kit Once a Kit item is opened a new tab Kit Items is displayed In this tab it is possible to define all the items which make up the kit These items are defined along with their respective quantities When a Kit item is being issued there are two possibilities e If the kit item is stored in a bin as one assembly it is issued like any other item from a bin e Ifthe kit item is comprised of items stored in different bins the system will issue all the defined items continuously one after the other 5 4 3 1 Defining a Kit Item 1 Goto Menu Main gt Item 2 Open an item and choose Item Type Kit This will open a new tab called Kit Items In this TAB you can add the individual items which make up the kit For each individual item in the Kit you can add the following data Quantity How many of each individual item per kit unit Sequence In what order to show the lines Remarks Any text which is related to this item For reading more information about kits see Chapter B Issue Kit section 8 5 1 and Chapter C Issue a Kit section 13 1 1 Page 117 of 432 CITIM S MATRIX TM User Gui
356. ve Item admin 1TMDemo swreor S jr aj Aung 5601196 Expendable Demo APKT 1003PDTR 76 1C328 Demo APKT 1003PDTR 76 1C328 Choose Bin and quantity Demo1 01 02 02 26 00 24 00 Demo1 01 02 09 Demo1 09 07 04 Demo2 01 02 04 SOOO OOOO 4 Edit the quantities to receive in the Receive field by using the Add Reduce buttons or through the virtual keyboard and press on the lt Receive gt button Page 273 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 irtual Machine Drawer Mapping Click Close 5 Open the drawer and put the items to receive into the allocated bin s 6 Close the drawer Stock will be updated 9 Note In case you update a smaller quantity than in the order line the system will display the following screen Page 274 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eee Matrix v System Message Message Number 20239 This quantity is less than Ordered quantity Do you want to close the current order line If the lt Yes gt button is pressed then the order line will be closed even though not all the quantity was received If the lt No gt button is pressed then the order line will stay open with the balance which remains to be received 13 3 RETURN Item This option allows the user to return items previously issued from the cabinet Enter this screen by clicking the lt Return gt icon on the first screen T
357. vel Frequency Class Issue transactions per month The average frequencies are classified to groups Group A a most active item measured in number of issue transactions per month and Group B a less active item Average Frequency The average number of orders per month The column Calculated displays automatically calculated values as a result of running Monthly Usage Process The column Override enables overriding the automatically calculated values If the Override column has input and the Effective Until date has not expired the Automatic Purchase order process will create orders according to the input Otherwise it will create the orders according to the data in the Calculated column Page 110 of 432 KRK Ky MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 gqgafeisep For more information see Chapter D Monthly Process section 21 1 and Chapter D Automatic PO Process section 21 2 After updating the required fields click the lt Save gt button 5 4 1 5 Tab Locations a Item Maintenance ltem Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type 22 5505421 Demo 101 0295 56 ic908 Expendable ES Links Orders Cost Centers General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transactions Demo1 Demo1 01 01 13 45 00 Demo2 01 04 02 5 00 Demo4 01 05 13 6 00 This tab displays a list of bins in all cabinets where the current it
358. view a line s details select the required line in the order screen grid and click the za lt Update gt button that is on the right side of the grid or double click the line As a result an additional index tab will appear below Sub Tab Line Details Line Details Remark Additional Fields Invoices ltem p522 Demo TPMR221 IC70 tsts S Cabinet Pema Bin Demo1 010410 Quantity foo Received Quantity feo Unit Price as t S Total Price haza Order Date fosm22006 x Request Date 08 02 2006 x Promised Date 0870272006 z Receive Date 2406 2007 Status Partial a Fields description Item The ordered item and its description Cabinet Select the cabinet for which the order is intended or leave it empty Bin Select the bin for which the order is intended or leave it empty When the item is received this will be the default bin However the user is allowed to select a different bin when receiving Note In case of a Rework Order once the bin is selected the fields Cabinet and Bin are set and disabled Also in case the focus on the order line was lost these fields become disabled Quantity The order line quantity Received Quantity The quantity that has already been received Unit Price The item s unit price as defined in the Item module Total price The item s price multiplied by its ordered quantity Order Date The date the item was ordered Page 142 of 432 T M
359. which minimizes the issued levels Drawers in MATRIX type cabinet and maximizes storage efficiency by choosing the smallest bin which supplies the needed quantity You can manually change the quantity of a kit component Page 179 of 432 SEX MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 awe fee Demo HM90 E90A D 62 2 C 62 Demo2 03 05 01 Demo TPMR 221 IC70 Demo2 01 06 05 Demo 16EL A 55 Demo2 Demo2 01 01 05 You cannot add other items to the lower grid if it is full with components If you try to add a new item to the bottom screen the following message will appear HE System Message xi Kit item can t be selected for issue while other items are selected Message Number 1512 Once the o tsu lt Issue gt button is clicked the kit components will be issued as normal Stock will be subtracted and Issue transactions will be added to the transactions list for each component item Those transactions will contain a remark referring to the kit indicated in red Page 180 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 aE HE Transaction Maintenance Transaction Key zo ltem Code 3102566 ltem Description Demo HM90 E904 D 62 2 Transaction Type lissue Bin Code Remo2 03 05 01 Cabinet Demo2 MatrixDemo2 Update Create User admin creator Update User Jadmin creator Create Date Mems2006 Update Date ei9apo06 Status Betre General Po Information Cost Center
360. will be updated in the system 4 Press on the Ce lt Exit gt button will take you directly to the Login screen Important You can issue from only one drawer at a time but you may issue from multiple bins within that drawer Stock Shortage In case the item is out of stock the user can send an Alert that will create a stock shortage transaction Zero Issue transaction and also send an email to the responsible stock manager 1 In the search item screen select on the item record that is out of stock the line will be lightened in color and press on the lt Next gt button The Item Stock Situation screen will appear Page 256 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 ematera Item Stock Situation 3101749 Demo HM90 E90A D1 25 3 WV 75 C The quantity in the selected item is 0 To create stock shortage transaction click alert Demo2 MatrixDemo2 This screen displays at the top part the Item Code and Item Description Beneath that section there is a display of all existing stock of that item in other cabinets or warehouses that are not connected to the currently accessed TOUCH system 2 Press on the lt Alert gt button This will create a stock shortage transaction and send an alert by email to the responsible stock manager Note The email for alert is taken from the cabinet details 13 1 1 Issue a Kit Kit component items can be located all together in one bin and issued as one
361. xisting cost centers and items which are part of 1TMDemo database 1 Select item to open its Item Maintenance screen and select Cost Centers tab ee Item Maintenance _ 5 x ltem Key ltem Code ltem Description Item Type F 2101749 Demo HM90 E904 D1 25 3 W 7 Durable oe General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage mal a T ransactions Links Orders Cost Centers q Page 335 of 432 CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 amp ae gt Click the lt Add gt button on the right side of the grid This will display the list of cost centers HE Search Cost Center Details 5 x Cost Center Details Key DOSS Cost Center Code Doo Name H Cost Center Description sis C Found 27 Records Seach L Select Department Department Department Department fork Center Grinding Honing Milling Drilling WC Grinding1 Work Center W2 WC Grinding2 Work Center WS WC Grinding3 3 Select the cost centers for which this item should be available for issue and click the lt Select gt button You can select multiple cost centers by holding the CTRL key and selecting the records a Item Maintenance ltem Key ltem Code ltem Description ltem Type F 3101749 Demo HM90 ESOA D1 25 3 W 7E Durable 7 General Supplier Information Additional Fields Stock Management Locations Usage Transaction
362. xt step Q Note You can also register the program by running the Windows Start Menu gt Programs gt MATRIX TM gt MATRIX TM Tools gt MATRIX TM Registration program ji MATRIX TM 7 Insert the serial number that you received from MATRIX Support and click the lt Next gt button Page 25 of 432 Enter your Serial Number iT Cancel lt Back Next gt 8 Click lt Next gt to begin installation ramar The installer is ready to install MATRIX TM on your computer Click Next to start the installation Page 26 of 432 CITIMS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 eez If you did not check the option Install Server at the beginning of this section skip to step 12 Otherwise continue to the following step 9 By this step you will install a Server with a New Database or Update of an existing Database SQL Database can be installed locally on the cabinet PC or on a server connected to the network Note The installation of Server requires pre installation of MSDE SP4 or SQL Server If this software is missing run the MSDE install bat file as described in Chapter A Install MSDE section 2 3 To install server click lt Next gt on the following screen to continue F Server Setup loj x Welcome to the Server Setup YYizard The installer will guide you though the steps required to install Server Setup on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyrght law
363. ystem pulls the defaults The step uses system options 300 301 902 Average Monthly Usage This step calculates average monthly usage for each item based on the Issue transactions The calculation has two options Page 347 of 432 T MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 MWA Moving Weighted Average Flat Arithmetic Average The system options which affect the average usage calculations are 301 900 and 901 Average Frequency and Frequency Class Calculated from the Issue transactions frequency According to the Issue transaction occurrence the system calculates the classes of frequency A is the most frequent bin cabinet or item B is less and so on The Frequency levels are calculated according to the following table Frequency Class Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency A 20 100000 B 10 20 C 5 10 D 2 5 5 E 0 5 2 5 Z 0 0 5 N 2 1 Minimum Quantity and Maximum Quantity Calculated according to the Min and Max Factors which are retrieved according to the Average Lead Time and the Frequency Classes calculated before The Min and Max factors are multiplied by the Average Usage to obtain Min and Max levels in quantity Those Min and Max levels are stored in the Bin Item Cabinet and Cabinet levels The monthly process will update the last monthly process system option number 303 The process can be run through the automatic scheduler or through the menu option Rememb
364. ystem will display the locations by the last counting date This will help us count first those bins which have the oldest Last Counting Date Stock counting process 1 Press on the lt Count Bins gt icon from the Main screen 2 Search and choose the Bin you wish to count 3 Question displayed Do you want to count all bins in the drawer If you press lt Yes gt all the bins in that specific drawer will be selected for counting 4 The next screen will appear Note The text in red above the table describes the next operation to be performed Count Bins x admin ITMDemo 19 11 2006 2 Cung Select Bin ca Demo1 Demo1 01 05 03 IT 2 asse KIT 2 Demo No Group Demo 1 01 05 04 KIT 2 asse KIT 2 Demo No Group Demo1 02 01 01 8080808 Demo general item i No Group Demo1 02 01 02 8080808 Demo general itern No Group Demo1 02 01 03 8080808 Demo general item i No Group Demo1 02 01 04 8080808 Demo general item i No Group Demo1 02 01 06 Item 3 for kit Item 3 for kit No Group Derno1 02 01 07 ltem 3 for kit Item 3 for kit No Group Demo1 02 02 01 Item 3 for kit Item 3 for kit f No Group Demo1 02 02 02 Item 3 for kit Item 3 for kit No Group Demo1 02 02 04 Item 4 for kit Item 4 for kit No Group Page 279 of 432 ED ED y 1a CITIMIS MATRIX TM User Guide Version 4 2 m MATRI Press on the lt Open gt button Open

MATRIX-TM User Guide Version 4.2

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents